Ipod Touch User Guide
This document was uploaded by user and they confirmed that they have the permission to share it. If you are author or own the copyright of this book, please report to us by using this DMCA report form. Report DMCA
Overview
Download & View Ipod Touch User Guide as PDF for free.
More details
- Words: 43,353
- Pages: 169
iPod touch User Guide For iPhone OS 3.1 Software
Contents
2
7 7 7 8 8 9 13 15 16
Chapter 1: Getting Started
17 17 19 22 24 27 32 33 34 34 35 36 37 38 39
Chapter 2: Basics
40 40 42 50 54 54
Chapter 3: Music and Video
Viewing the User Guide on iPod touch What You Need Registering iPod touch Setting Up iPod touch Using VoiceOver Syncing Mail, Contacts, and Calendar Accounts Installing Configuration Profiles Disconnecting iPod touch from Your Computer iPod touch at a Glance Home Screen Buttons Touchscreen Onscreen Keyboard Searching Voice Control Stereo Headset Bluetooth Headphones Connecting to the Internet Battery Security Features Cleaning iPod touch Restarting and Resetting iPod touch Getting Music, Video, and More Music and Other Audio Videos Setting a Sleep Timer Changing the Browse Buttons
55 55 58 58 59
Chapter 4: Safari
60 60 60 62 63 64 64 65 65
Chapter 5: App Store
66 66 66 67 71 71
Chapter 6: Mail
73 73 73 74 75 75 76 77 78
Chapter 7: Calendar
79 79 79 79 81 81 83 83
Chapter 8: Photos
84 84
Chapter 9: Contacts
Viewing Webpages Searching the Web Bookmarks Web Clips About the App Store Browsing and Searching Info Screen Downloading Applications Deleting Applications Writing Reviews Updating Applications Syncing Purchased Applications Setting Up Email Accounts Sending Email Checking and Reading Email Searching Email Organizing Email About Calendar Syncing Calendars Viewing Your Calendar Searching Calendars Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars Adding Calendar Events to iPod touch Responding to Meeting Invitations Alerts About Photos Syncing Photos and Videos with Your Computer Viewing Photos and Videos Slideshows Sharing Photos and Videos Assigning a Photo to a Contact Wallpaper Adding Contacts Contents
3
85 85
Searching Contacts Managing Contacts on iPod touch
86 86 87 88 89 89 90
Chapter 10: YouTube
91 91 92
Chapter 11: Stocks
93 93 97 97 99 99
Chapter 12: Maps
Finding and Viewing Videos Controlling Video Playback Managing Videos Getting More Information Using YouTube Account Features Changing the Browse Buttons Viewing Stock Quotes Getting More Information Finding and Viewing Locations Bookmarking Locations Getting Directions Showing Traffic Conditions Finding and Contacting Businesses
101 Chapter 13: Weather 101 Viewing Weather Summaries 102 Getting More Weather Information 103 103 104 104 105 106 106
Chapter 14: Voice Memos
107 107 107 108 108
Chapter 15: Notes
Recording Voice Memos Listening to Voice Memos Managing Voice Memos Trimming Voice Memos Sharing Voice Memos Syncing Voice Memos Writing and Reading Notes Searching Notes Emailing Notes Syncing Notes
109 Chapter 16: Clock 109 World Clocks 110 Alarms 110 Stopwatch
4
Contents
111 Timer 112 Chapter 17: Calculator 112 Using the Calculator 112 Standard Memory Functions 113 Scientific Calculator Keys 115 115 116 116 116 117 123 124 124 125 125 129 130
Chapter 18: Settings
131 131 132 133 133 134 135 135 135 136 136
Chapter 19: iTunes Store
Wi-Fi VPN Notifications Brightness General Music Video Photos Store Mail, Contacts, Calendars Safari Nike + iPod About the iTunes Store Finding Music, Videos, and More Purchasing Music or Audiobooks Purchasing or Renting Videos Streaming or Downloading Podcasts Checking Download Status Syncing Purchased Content Changing the Browse Buttons Viewing Account Information Verifying Purchases
137 Chapter 20: Nike + iPod 137 Activating Nike + iPod 138 Additional Nike + iPod Settings 139 139 140 146 147 147 147
Chapter 21: Accessibility Accessibility Features VoiceOver Zoom White on Black Mono Audio Speak Auto-text Contents
5
148 Triple-click Home 148 Closed Captioning and Other Helpful Features
6
150 150 150 151 152 153 154 156 158
Appendix A: Troubleshooting
159 159 160 160 161
Appendix B: Other Resources
162
Index
Apple iPod touch Support Site General iTunes and Syncing Sound, Music, and Video iTunes Stores Safari, Mail, and Contacts Backing Up iPod touch Updating and Restoring iPod touch Software Safety, Software, and Service Information Viewing the User Guide on iPod touch Disposal and Recycling Information Apple and the Environment
Contents
1
Getting Started
·
WARNING: To avoid injury, read all operating instructions in this guide and safety information in the iPod touch Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/ipodtouch before using iPod touch.
Viewing the User Guide on iPod touch
The iPod touch User Guide, optimized for viewing on iPod touch, is available at help. apple.com/ipodtouch. View the guide on iPod touch: In Safari, tap bookmark.
, then tap the iPod touch User Guide
Add an icon for the guide to the Home screen: When viewing the guide, tap , then tap “Add to Home Screen.” The iPod touch User Guide is available in many languages. View the guide in a different language: Tap “Change Language” at the bottom of the screen on the main contents page, then choose the language you want.
What You Need
To use iPod touch, you need: • A Mac or a PC with a USB 2.0 port and one of the following operating systems: • Mac OS X version 10.4.11 or later; version 10.5.7 or later is required for
syncing Notes • Windows XP Home or Professional with Service Pack 3 or later • Windows Vista Home Premium, Business, Enterprise, or Ultimate edition • Display resolution on your computer set to 1024 x 768 or higher • iTunes 9 or later, available at www.itunes.com/download • QuickTime 7.6.2 or later • An iTunes Store account (for purchases from the iTunes Store or App Store) • An Internet connection for your computer (broadband recommended)
7
Registering iPod touch
Before you can use any of the iPod touch features, you must use iTunes to set up iPod touch. You can also register iPod touch and create an iTunes Store account (not available in some countries) if you don’t already have one.
Register iPod touch: 1 Download and install the latest version of iTunes from www.itunes.com/download.
2 Connect iPod touch to a USB 2.0 port on your Mac or PC using the cable that came with iPod touch.
3 Follow the onscreen instructions in iTunes to register iPod touch and sync iPod touch with music, video, and other content from your iTunes library, and with your contacts, calendars, and bookmarks on your computer.
Setting Up iPod touch Using VoiceOver
If you’re visually impaired, VoiceOver (available only on Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) can help you set up iPod touch without a sighted assistant. VoiceOver describes aloud what appears on the screen, so you can use iPod touch without seeing it. When you connect iPod touch to your computer, iTunes detects whether you’re using a compatible screen reader on your computer, such as VoiceOver on a Mac or GW Micro Window-Eyes on a PC, and automatically enables VoiceOver on iPod touch. A sighted user can also enable VoiceOver on iPod touch for you, using Accessibility settings. See “Using VoiceOver” on page 144. Note: VoiceOver isn’t available in all languages.
8
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Syncing About Syncing With iPod touch, it’s easy to have instant access to your music, video, downloaded applications, and other iTunes library content. iTunes can sync all this information to iPod touch, and your contacts, calendars, and your browser bookmarks as well. iTunes lets you specify the information and content on your computer that you want to sync with iPod touch. By default, iTunes syncs automatically with iPod touch whenever you connect iPod touch to your computer.
Syncing with iTunes You can set iTunes to sync any or all of the following: • Music and audiobooks • Movies • TV Shows • Games and applications downloaded from the iTunes Store • Music videos • Podcasts • iTunes U collections • Photos and videos (in your computer’s photo application or folder) • Contacts—names, phone numbers, addresses, email addresses, and more • Calendars—appointments and events • Notes (requires Mac OS X version 10.5.7 or later on a Mac, or Microsoft Outlook 2003
or 2007 on a PC) • Email account settings • Webpage bookmarks
You can adjust sync settings whenever iPod touch is connected to your computer. Music, audiobooks, podcasts, iTunes U collections, videos, and applications can be synced from your iTunes library. If you don’t already have content in iTunes, the iTunes Store (available in some countries) makes it easy to preview and download content to iTunes. You can also add music to your iTunes library from your CDs. To learn about iTunes and the iTunes Store, open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help. Contacts, calendars, notes, and webpage bookmarks are synced with applications on your computer, as described in the following section. Contacts and calendars are synced both ways between your computer and iPod touch. New entries or changes you make on iPod touch are synced to your computer, and vice versa. Notes and webpage bookmarks are also synced both ways. Photos and videos (Mac only) can be synced from an application or from a folder. Chapter 1 Getting Started
9
Email account settings are synced only from your computer’s email application to iPod touch. This allows you to customize your email accounts on iPod touch without affecting email account settings on your computer. Note: You can also set up email accounts directly on iPod touch. See “Mail, Contacts, and Calendar Accounts.” Purchases you make on iPod touch in the iTunes Store or the App Store are synced back to your iTunes library. You can also purchase or download content and applications directly from the iTunes Store on your computer, and then sync them to iPod touch. You can set iPod touch to sync with only a portion of what’s on your computer. For example, you might want to sync only certain music playlists, or only unwatched video podcasts. Important: You should be logged in to your own computer user account before connecting iPod touch.
Set up iTunes syncing: 1 Connect iPod touch to your computer, and open iTunes (if it doesn’t open automatically).
2 In iTunes, select iPod touch in the sidebar.
3 Configure the sync settings in each of the settings panes. See the following section for descriptions of the panes.
4 Click Apply in the lower-right corner of the screen. By default, “Open iTunes when this iPod is connected” is selected.
iPod touch Settings Panes in iTunes The following sections provide an overview of each of the iPod touch settings panes. For more information, open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help.
10
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Summary Pane Select “Open iTunes when this iPod is connected” to have iTunes open and sync iPod touch automatically whenever you connect it to your computer. Deselect this option if you want to sync only by clicking the Sync button in iTunes. For more information about preventing automatic syncing, see “Preventing Automatic Syncing” on page 13. Select “Sync only checked songs and videos” if you want iTunes to skip unchecked items in your iTunes library when syncing. Select “Manually manage music and videos” to turn off automatic syncing in the Music and Video settings panes. See “Manually Managing Content” on page 41. Select “Encrypt iPod backup” if you want to encrypt the information stored on your computer when iTunes makes a backup. Encrypted backups are indicated by a padlock icon, and a password is required to restore the information to iPod touch. See “Backing Up iPod touch” on page 156. Click Configure Universal Access to turn on Accessibility features (available only on Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more). See Chapter 21, “Accessibility,” on page 139. Applications Pane Use the Applications pane to specify which App Store applications to sync on iPod touch, or to arrange your Home screen (requires iTunes 9 or later). Any applications downloaded directly to iPod touch are automatically backed up to your iTunes library when you sync. If you manually delete an application on iPod touch, you can reinstall it from this pane as long as it was previously synced. Music, Movies, TV Shows, Podcasts, and iTunes U Panes Use these panes to specify the media you want to sync. You can sync all music, movies, TV shows, podcasts, and iTunes U collections, or select the content you want on iPod touch. If you want to watch rented movies on iPod touch, transfer them to iPod touch using the Movies pane in iTunes. If there’s not enough room on iPod touch for all the media you’ve specified, iTunes can create a special playlist and set it to sync with iPod touch. Note: The iTunes U pane appears only in iTunes 9 or later. In earlier versions of iTunes, iTunes U content appeared in the Podcasts pane. Photos Pane You can sync photos and videos (Mac only, iTunes 9 required) with iPhoto 4.0.3 or later, or Aperture on a Mac; or with Adobe Photoshop Elements 3.0 or later on a PC. You can also sync photos and videos in any folder on your computer that contains images.
Chapter 1 Getting Started
11
Info Pane The Info pane lets you configure the sync settings for your contacts, calendars, email accounts, and web browser. • Contacts You can sync contacts with applications such as Mac OS X Address Book, Yahoo! Address Book, and Google Contacts on a Mac, or with Yahoo! Address Book, Google Contacts, Windows Address Book (Outlook Express), Windows Vista Contacts, or Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC. (On a Mac, you can sync contacts with multiple applications. On a PC, you can sync contacts with only one application at a time.) If you sync with Yahoo! Address Book, you only need to click Configure to enter your new login information when you change your Yahoo! ID or password after you’ve set up syncing. • Calendars
You can sync calendars from applications such as iCal on a Mac, or from Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC. (On a Mac, you can sync calendars with multiple applications. On a PC, you can sync calendars with only one application at a time.) • Web Browser
You can sync bookmarks from Safari on a Mac, or from Safari or Microsoft Internet Explorer on a PC. • Notes
Sync notes in the Notes application on iPod touch with notes in Mail on a Mac or with Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC. (On a Mac, you must have Mac OS version 10.5.7 or later installed to sync notes.) • Mail Accounts
You can sync email account settings from Mail on a Mac, and from Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 or Outlook Express on a PC. Account settings are only transferred from your computer to iPod touch. Changes you make to an email account on iPod touch don’t affect the account on your computer. Note: The password for your Yahoo! email account isn’t saved on your computer, so it can’t be synced and must be entered on iPod touch. In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” tap your Yahoo! account, and enter the password. • Advanced
These options let you replace the information on iPod touch with the information on your computer during the next sync.
12
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Preventing Automatic Syncing You can prevent iPod touch from syncing automatically when you connect iPod touch to a computer other than the one you usually sync with. Turn off automatic syncing for iPod touch: Connect iPod touch to your computer. In iTunes, select iPod touch in the sidebar, then click the Summary tab. Deselect “Open iTunes when this iPod is connected.” You can still sync by clicking the Sync button. Prevent automatic syncing for all iPhones and iPods: In iTunes choose iTunes > Preferences (on a Mac) or Edit > Preferences (on a PC), click Devices, and select “Disable automatic syncing for all iPhones and iPods.” If this checkbox is selected, iPod touch won’t sync automatically, even if “Open iTunes when this iPod is connected” is selected in the Summary pane. Prevent automatic syncing one time, without changing settings: Open iTunes, connect iPod touch to your computer, then press and hold Command-Option (on a Mac) or Shift-Control (on a PC) until you see iPod touch appear in the sidebar. Sync manually: In iTunes, select iPod touch in the sidebar, then click Sync in the bottom-right corner of the window. Or, if you’ve changed any sync settings, click Apply.
Mail, Contacts, and Calendar Accounts
iPod touch works with MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, and many of the most popular email systems.
Setting Up Accounts MobileMe and Microsoft Exchange provide not only email, but contact and calendar information that can be synced to iPod touch automatically, over the air. MobileMe can also sync your bookmarks on iPod touch with Safari on a Mac, or with Safari or Microsoft Internet Explorer on a PC. You set up MobileMe, Exchange, and other email accounts directly on iPod touch. iPod touch uses the Exchange ActiveSync protocol to sync email, calendars, and contacts with the following versions of Microsoft Exchange: • Exchange Server 2003 Service Pack 2 • Exchange Server 2007 Service Pack 1
For many popular email accounts, iPod touch automatically enters most of the settings for you. If you don’t already have an email account, you can get a free account online at www.yahoo.com, www.google.com, or www.aol.com. You can also try MobileMe, free for 60 days. Go to www.me.com.
Chapter 1 Getting Started
13
Set up an account on iPod touch: 1 From the iPod touch Home screen, tap Settings.
2 Tap “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” then tap Add Account.
3 Tap an account type: • Microsoft Exchange • MobileMe • Google email • Yahoo! Mail • AOL • Other
4 Enter your account information and tap Save. Your service provider or system administrator can provide the account settings you need. Exchange accounts: Enter your complete email address, domain (optional), user name, password, and a description. The description can be whatever you like. iPod touch supports Microsoft’s Autodiscovery service, which uses your user name and password to determine the address of the Exchange server. If the server’s address can’t be determined, you’re asked to enter it. (Enter the complete address in the Server field.) Once you connect to the Exchange server, you may be prompted to change your passcode to match the policies set on the server.
5 If you’re setting up a MobileMe or Microsoft Exchange account, tap the items you want to use on iPod touch—mail, contacts, calendars, and bookmarks (MobileMe only). MobileMe includes the Find My iPod touch feature that helps you locate iPod touch if it’s been lost or stolen, and remotely lock, set a passcode, or erase the information on iPod touch if necessary. See “Security Features” on page 37. If you enable Find My iPod touch for your MobileMe account, make sure that Push is turned on for Fetch New Data. In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Fetch New Data, and if Push is off, tap to turn it on. For Exchange accounts, you can set how many days of email you want to sync to iPod touch. If you already have contact or calendar information on iPod touch when you enable the account, iPod touch asks what you want to do with existing information on iPod touch. You can choose to merge the existing data into your MobileMe or Exchange account. If you don’t merge the data, you can choose to keep it in a separate account on iPod touch (the account is labeled “On My iPod touch”), or delete it. Existing bookmarks can only be merged or deleted.
14
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Similarly, when you disable contacts or calendars in an MobileMe or Exchange account, or if you delete an account, iPod touch asks if you want to keep information or delete it. You can add contacts using an LDAP account if your company or organization supports it. See “Adding Contacts” on page 84. You can subscribe to CalDAV or iCal (.ics) calendars. See “Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars” on page 75.
Push Accounts MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, and Yahoo! Mail are known as “push” accounts. When new information is available, such as the arrival of an email message, the information is automatically delivered (pushed) to iPod touch. (In contrast, “fetch” services require your email software to periodically check with your service provider to see if new messages have arrived, and then request them to be delivered.) MobileMe and Exchange also use push to sync your contacts, calendars, and bookmarks (MobileMe only) if you have those items selected in the account settings. Synced information is transferred automatically over your wireless connection; you don’t need to connect iPod touch to your computer to sync. iPod touch can receive pushed data over a Wi-Fi connection only when iPod touch is awake (the screen is on, or iPod touch is connected to your computer or a power adapter).
Installing Configuration Profiles
If you’re in an enterprise environment, you may be able to set up accounts and other items on iPod touch by installing a configuration profile. Configuration profiles provide a way for system administrators to quickly set up your iPod touch to work with the information systems at your company, school, or organization. For example, a configuration profile might set up your iPod touch to access the Microsoft Exchange servers at work, enabling iPod touch to access your Exchange email, calendars, and contacts. Configuration profiles can configure multiple settings on iPod touch all at once. For example, a configuration profile can set up your Microsoft Exchange account, VPN account, and certificates for secure access to your company’s network and information. A configuration profile may turn on the Passcode Lock, requiring you to create and enter a passcode for using iPod touch. Your system administrator may distribute configuration profiles by email or by putting them on a secure webpage. A system administrator may also install a configuration profile directly on iPod touch for you.
Chapter 1 Getting Started
15
Install a configuration profile: 1 Using iPod touch, open the email message or download the configuration profile from the website provided by your system administrator.
2 When the configuration profile opens, tap Install.
3 Enter passwords and other information as requested. Important: You may be asked to verify that the configuration profile is trusted. If in doubt, consult your system administrator before installing a configuration profile. Settings provided by a configuration profile cannot be altered. If you want to change these settings, you must first remove the configuration profile or install an updated configuration profile. Remove a profile: In Settings, choose General > Profile, then select the configuration profile and tap Remove. Removing a configuration profile deletes the settings and all other information installed by the configuration profile from iPod touch.
Disconnecting iPod touch from Your Computer
Unless iPod touch is syncing with your computer, you can disconnect it from your computer at any time. When iPod touch is syncing with your computer, iPod touch shows “Sync in progress.” If you disconnect iPod touch before it finishes syncing, some data may not get transferred. When iPod touch finishes syncing, iTunes shows “iPod touch sync is complete.” Cancel a sync: Drag the slider on iPod touch.
16
Chapter 1 Getting Started
2
Basics
iPod touch at a Glance Sleep/Wake button
Wi-Fi antenna
Status bar Volume buttons Application icons
Internal speaker
Touchscreen
Home button Dock connector
Headphones port
Your Home screen may look different, depending on the model of iPod touch you have and whether you have rearranged its icons.
iPod touch Included Accessories
Stereo headset
Dock Connector to USB Cable
17
Item
What you can do with it
Apple Earphones with Remote and Mic (Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) Apple Earphones (8 GB model)
Listen to music, audiobooks, podcasts, and videos. Use the built-in microphone to speak. Press the center button to play or pause a song, or press twice quickly to skip to the next track. Use the + and – buttons to adjust the volume (Apple Earphones with Remote and Mic included only with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more). Press and hold the center button to use Voice Control (available only on Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more).
Dock Connector to USB Cable
Use the cable to connect iPod touch to your computer to sync and charge, or to the USB power adapter (sold separately) to charge. The cable can be used with the optional dock or plugged directly into iPod touch.
Status Icons The icons in the status bar at the top of the screen give information about iPod touch: Status icon
18
What it means Wi-Fi
Shows that iPod touch is connected to the Internet over a Wi-Fi network. The more bars, the stronger the connection. See “Joining a Wi-Fi Network” on page 35.
Network activity
Shows network activity. Some third-party applications may also use this icon to indicate an active process.
VPN
Shows that you are connected to a network using VPN. See “Network” on page 117.
Lock
Shows that iPod touch is locked. See “Sleep/Wake Button.”
Play
Shows that a song, audiobook, or podcast is playing. See “Playing Songs” on page 42.
Alarm
Shows that an alarm is set. See “Alarms” on page 110.
Bluetooth
Blue or white icon: Bluetooth® (not available on first-generation iPod touch) is on and a device, such as a headset, is connected. Gray icon: Bluetooth is on, but no device is connected. No icon: Bluetooth is turned off.
Battery
Shows battery level or charging status. See “Charging the Battery” on page 36.
Chapter 2 Basics
Home Screen
Press the Home button at any time to go to the Home screen, which contains your iPod touch applications. Tap any application icon to get started.
iPod touch Applications The following applications are included with iPod touch: Listen to your songs, audiobooks, and podcasts. Create on-the-go playlists, or use Genius to create playlists for you. Listen to Genius Mixes of songs from your library. Music
Videos
Safari
App Store
Mail
Calendar
Photos
Watch purchased or rented movies, music videos, video podcasts, and TV shows on the go. Or connect iPod touch to your TV to watch on a larger screen (TV connection requires cable available for purchase separately). Browse websites over Wi-Fi. Rotate iPod touch sideways for widescreen viewing. Double-tap to zoom in or out—Safari automatically fits the webpage column to the iPod touch screen for easy reading. Open multiple pages. Sync bookmarks with Safari or Microsoft Internet Explorer on your computer. Add Safari web clips to the Home screen for fast access to favorite websites. Save images from websites to your Photo Library. Search the App Store for iPod touch applications you can purchase or download using your Wi-Fi connection. Read reviews or write your own reviews for your favorite apps. Download and install the applications on your Home screen. iPod touch works with MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, and many of the most popular email systems—including Yahoo! Mail, Google email, and AOL—as well as most industry-standard POP3 and IMAP email systems. View PDFs and other attachments within Mail. Save attached photos and graphics to your Photo Library. View and search your MobileMe, iCal, Microsoft Entourage, Microsoft Outlook, or Microsoft Exchange calendars. Enter events on iPod touch and they get synced back to the calendar on your computer. Subscribe to calendars. Set alerts to remind you of events, appointments, and deadlines. View photos and videos (only on Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) received in Mail messages, or synced from your computer’s photo application (video syncing on Macs only). View them in portrait or landscape mode. Zoom in on photos for a closer look. Watch a slideshow. Email photos and videos, or publish them to MobileMe galleries. Assign images to contacts, and use them as wallpaper.
Chapter 2 Basics
19
Contacts
YouTube
Stocks
Maps
Get contact information synced from MobileMe, Mac OS X Address Book, Yahoo! Address Book, Google Contacts, Windows Address Book (Outlook Express), Microsoft Outlook, or Microsoft Exchange. Search, add, change, or delete contacts, which get synced back to your computer. Play videos from YouTube’s online collection. Search for any video, or browse featured, most viewed, most recently updated, and top-rated videos. Set up and log in to your YouTube account—then rate videos, sync your favorites, show subscriptions, and more. Watch your favorite stocks, updated automatically from the Internet. View company news and current trading information, such as opening or average price, trading volume, or market capitalization. Rotate iPod touch to see detailed charts in landscape orientation. Drag your finger along the charts to track price points, or use two fingers to see a range between points. See a street map, satellite view, or hybrid view of locations around the world. Zoom in for a closer look, or check out the Google Street View. Find your current approximate location. Get detailed driving, public transit, or walking directions and see current highway traffic conditions. Find businesses in the area. Get current weather conditions and a six-day forecast. Add your favorite cities for a quick weather report anytime.
Weather
Voice Memos
Record voice memos on iPod touch. (Requires a compatible external microphone or headset with microphone. Not available on first-generation iPod touch.) Play them back on iPod touch or sync them with iTunes to listen to voice memos on your computer. Attach voice memos to email messages. Jot notes on the go—reminders, grocery lists, brilliant ideas. Send them in email.
Notes View the time in cities around the world—create clocks for your favorites. Set one or more alarms. Use the stopwatch, or set a countdown timer. Clock
20
Chapter 2 Basics
Add, subtract, multiply, and divide. Rotate iPod touch sideways to use expanded scientific functions. Calculator
Settings
iTunes
Adjust all iPod touch settings in one convenient place. Set your own volume limit for listening comfort. Set your wallpaper, screen brightness, and settings for network, mail, web, music, video, photos, and more. Set auto-lock and a passcode for security. Restrict access to explicit iTunes content and certain applications. Reset iPod touch. Search the iTunes Store for music, audiobooks, TV shows, music videos, and movies. Browse, preview, purchase, and download new releases, top items, and more. Rent movies to view on iPod touch. Stream and download podcasts. Read reviews or write your own reviews for your favorite store items.
When activated in Settings, Nike + iPod turns your iPod touch into a workout companion. Track your pace, time, and distance from one workout to the next and choose a song to power through your routine. (Requires select Nike shoes and a Nike + Nike + iPod iPod Sensor, sold separately. Not available on first-generation iPod touch.)
Note: Application functionality and availability may vary depending on the country or region where you purchase and use iPod touch.
Customizing the Home Screen You can customize the layout of icons on the Home screen—including the Dock icons along the bottom of the screen. If you want, arrange them over multiple Home screens.
Rearrange icons: 1 Touch and hold any Home screen icon until the icons begin to wiggle.
2 Arrange the icons by dragging them.
3 Press the Home
button to save your arrangement.
You can also add links to your favorite webpages on the Home screen. See “Web Clips” on page 59. You can also rearrange the Home screen icons and the order of the screens (in iTunes 9 or later) when iPod touch is connected to your computer. Select iPod touch in the iTunes sidebar, then click the Applications tab.
Chapter 2 Basics
21
Create additional Home screens: While arranging icons, drag an icon to the right edge of the screen until a new screen appears. You can flick to return to the original screen and drag more icons to the new screen.
You can create up to 11 screens. The number of dots above the Dock shows the number of screens you have, and indicates which screen you’re viewing. Switch to another Home screen: Flick left or right, or tap to the left or right of the row of dots. Go to the first Home screen: Press the Home
button.
Reset your Home screen to the default layout: Choose Settings > General > Reset and tap Reset Home Screen Layout.
Buttons
A few simple buttons make it easy to turn iPod touch on and off, and adjust the volume.
Sleep/Wake Button When you’re not using iPod touch you can lock it. When iPod touch is locked, nothing happens if you touch the screen. You can still listen to music and adjust the volume, and use the center button on your iPod touch headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) to play or pause a song. By default, if you don’t touch the screen for a minute, iPod touch locks automatically.
Sleep/Wake button
22
Chapter 2 Basics
Lock iPod touch
Press the Sleep/Wake button.
Unlock iPod touch
Press the Home button or the Sleep/Wake button, then drag the slider.
Turn iPod touch completely off
Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button for a few seconds until the red slider appears, then drag the slider.
Turn iPod touch on
Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears.
For information about changing how long before iPod touch locks, see “Auto-Lock” on page 118. For information about setting iPod touch to require a passcode to unlock it, see “Passcode Lock” on page 119.
Volume Buttons When you’re listening to songs, movies, or other media, the buttons on the side of iPod touch adjust the audio volume. Otherwise, the buttons control the volume for alerts and other sound effects. Note: Volume buttons aren’t included on the first-generation iPod touch. WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/ipodtouch. To adjust the volume, use the buttons on the side of iPod touch.
Volume up Volume down
To set a volume limit for music and videos on iPod touch, see “Music” on page 123.
Chapter 2 Basics
23
Touchscreen
The controls on the iPod touch touchscreen change dynamically depending on the task you’re performing.
Opening Applications Open an application: Tap an icon.
Close an application and return to the Home screen: Press the Home below the display.
button
Scrolling Drag up or down to scroll. On some screens such as webpages, you can also scroll side to side.
Dragging your finger to scroll won’t choose or activate anything on the screen.
24
Chapter 2 Basics
Flick to scroll quickly.
You can wait for the scrolling to come to a stop, or touch anywhere on the screen to stop it immediately. Touching the screen to stop scrolling won’t choose or activate anything. To quickly scroll to the top of a list, webpage, or email, just tap the status bar.
Lists Some lists have an index along the right side, which helps you navigate quickly. Find items in an indexed list: Tap a letter to jump to items starting with that letter. Drag your finger along the index to scroll quickly through the list.
Index
Choose an item: Tap an item in the list. Depending on the list, tapping an item can do different things—for example, it may open a new list, play a song, open an email, or show someone’s contact information. Return to a previous list: Tap the back button in the upper-left corner.
Chapter 2 Basics
25
Zooming In or Out When viewing photos, webpages, email, or maps, you can zoom in and out. Pinch your fingers together or apart. For photos and webpages, you can double-tap (tap twice quickly) to zoom in, then double-tap again to zoom out. For maps, double-tap to zoom in and tap once with two fingers to zoom out.
Viewing in Landscape Many iPod touch applications let you view the screen in either portrait or landscape orientation. Rotate iPod touch and the display rotates too, adjusting automatically to fit the new screen orientation.
You may prefer landscape for viewing webpages in Safari, or when entering text, for example. Webpages automatically scale to the wider screen in landscape, making the text and images larger. Similarly, the onscreen keyboard is larger in landscape, which may help increase your typing speed and accuracy. The following applications support both portrait and landscape orientation: • Music and Video • Mail • Safari • Notes • Contacts
26
Chapter 2 Basics
• Stocks • Photos • Calculator
Movies viewed in Video and YouTube appear only in landscape orientation. Street views in Maps also appear in landscape.
Onscreen Keyboard
Use the onscreen keyboard to enter text, such as contact information and web addresses.
Typing Depending on the application you’re using, the intelligent keyboard may automatically suggest corrections as you type to help prevent mistyped words.
Enter text: 1 Tap a text field, such as in a note or new contact, to bring up the keyboard.
2 Tap keys on the keyboard. Start by typing with just your index finger. As you get more proficient, you can type more quickly using two thumbs. As you type, each letter appears above your thumb or finger. If you touch the wrong key, you can slide your finger to the correct key. The letter isn’t entered until you release your finger from the key.
Chapter 2 Basics
27
Type uppercase
Tap the Shift key before tapping a letter. Or touch and hold the Shift key, then slide to a letter.
Quickly type a period and space
Double-tap the space bar. (You can turn this feature on or off in Settings > General > Keyboard.)
Turn caps lock on
key. The Shift key turns Double-tap the Shift blue, and all letters you type are uppercase. Tap the Shift key again to turn caps lock off. (You can turn this feature on or off in Settings > General > Keyboard.)
Show numbers, punctuation, or symbols
Tap the Number key. Tap the Symbol to see additional punctuation and symbols.
Type letters or symbols that aren’t on the keyboard
Touch and hold the related letter or symbol, then slide to choose a variation.
key
Dictionary For many languages, iPod touch has dictionaries to help you type. The appropriate dictionary is activated automatically when you select a supported keyboard. For a list of supported languages, see www.apple.com/ipodtouch/specs.html. iPod touch uses the active dictionary to suggest corrections or complete the word you’re typing. You don’t need to interrupt your typing to accept the suggested word.
Suggested word
Accept or reject dictionary suggestions: mm To reject the suggested word, finish typing the word as you want it, then tap the “x” to dismiss the suggestion before typing anything else. Each time you reject a suggestion for the same word, iPod touch becomes more likely to accept your word. mm To use the suggested word, type a space, punctuation mark, or return character. Turn Auto-Correction on or off: Choose General > Keyboard and turn Auto-Correction on or off. Auto-Correction is on by default. Note: If you’re entering Chinese or Japanese, tap one of the suggested alternatives.
28
Chapter 2 Basics
Editing An onscreen magnifying glass helps you position the insertion point for typing and editing text. You can select text to cut, copy, and paste. Position the insertion point: Touch and hold to bring up the magnifying glass, then drag to position the insertion point.
Select text: Tap the insertion point to display the selection buttons. Tap Select to select the adjacent word or tap Select All to select all text. When you’re typing, you can also double-tap to select a word. In read-only documents, such as webpages or email you’ve received, touch and hold to select a word. Drag the grab points to select more or less text.
Cut or copy text: Select text, then tap Cut or Copy.
Paste text: Tap the insertion point and tap Paste. The last text that you cut or copied is inserted. Or select text and tap Paste to replace the text. Undo the last edit: Shake iPod touch and tap Undo.
Chapter 2 Basics
29
International Keyboards iPod touch provides keyboards that allow you to enter text in many different languages, including languages that read from right to left. For a complete list of supported keyboards, go to www.apple.com/ipodtouch/specs.html.
Turn international keyboards on or off: 1 In Settings, choose General > International > Keyboards. 2 Turn on the keyboards you want. Languages with more than one keyboard, such as Japanese and Chinese, indicate the number of keyboards available. Tap to choose a keyboard for that language. Switch keyboards if more than one keyboard is turned on
Tap to switch keyboards. When you tap the symbol, the name of the newly activated keyboard appears briefly.
Type letters, numbers, or symbols that aren’t on Touch and hold the related letter, number, or the keyboard symbol, then slide to choose a variation. On the Hebrew and Thai keyboards, for example, you can choose native numbers by touching and holding the related Arabic number.
30
Enter Japanese Kana
Use the Kana keypad to select syllables. For more syllable options, tap the arrow key and select another syllable or word from the window.
Enter Japanese QWERTY
Use the QWERTY keyboard to input code for Japanese syllables. As you type, suggested syllables appear. Tap the syllable to choose it.
Chapter 2 Basics
Enter Korean
Use the 2-Set Korean keyboard to type Hangul letters. To type double consonants or compound vowels, touch and hold the letter, then slide to choose the double letter.
Enter Simplified or Traditional Chinese Pinyin
Use the QWERTY keyboard to enter Pinyin for Chinese characters. As you type, suggested Chinese characters appear. Tap a character to choose it, or continue entering Pinyin to see more character options.
Enter Traditional Chinese Zhuyin
Use the keyboard to enter Zhuyin letters. As you type, suggested Chinese characters appear. Tap a character to choose it, or continue entering Zhuyin to see more character options. After you type an initial letter, the keyboard changes to show more letters.
Enter handwritten Simplified or Traditional Chinese
Use the touchpad to enter Chinese characters with your finger. As you write character strokes, iPod touch recognizes them and shows matching characters in a list, with the closest match at the top. When you choose a character, its related characters appear in the list as additional choices. You can get some complex characters by entering two or more component characters. For example, enter 魚 (fish), then 巤 (bristle), to get 鱲 (partial name of Hong Kong International Airport), which appears in the character list with an arrow next to it. Tap the character to replace the characters you entered.
When Simplified or Traditional Chinese handwriting formats are turned on, you can enter Chinese characters with your finger, as shown:
Touchpad
Chapter 2 Basics
31
Searching
You can search many applications on iPod touch, including Mail, Calendar, Music, Video, Notes, and Contacts. You can search an individual application, or search all the applications at once using Spotlight.
Go to Spotlight: From the main page of the Home screen, flick left to right. If you’re on the main Home screen page, you can press the Home button to go to Spotlight. From the Spotlight page, press the Home button to return to the main Home screen page. You can also set iPod touch to go to Spotlight when you doubleclick the Home button. See “Home” on page 120. Search iPod touch: On the Spotlight page, enter text in the Search field. Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more of the results. Icons to the left of the search results let you know which application the results are from. Tap an item in the results list to open it. Application
What’s searched
Contacts
First, last, and company names
Mail
To, From, and Subject fields of all accounts (the text of messages isn’t searched)
Calendar
Event titles, invitees, and locations (notes aren’t searched)
Music and Video
Music (names of songs, artists, and albums) and the titles of podcasts, video, and audiobooks
Notes
Text of notes
Spotlight also searches the names of the native and installed applications on iPod touch, so if you have a lot of applications you may want to use Spotlight as a way to locate and open applications. Open applications from Spotlight: Enter the application name, then tap to open the application directly from the search results. Use the Search Results settings to choose which applications are searched and the order in which they’re searched. See “Home” on page 120.
32
Chapter 2 Basics
Voice Control
Voice Control (available only on Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) lets you control iPod music playback using voice commands. Note: Requires included headset or compatible accessory with microphone. Voice Control isn’t available in all languages.
Use Voice Control: Press and hold the Home button until the Voice Control screen appears and you hear a beep. You can also press and hold the center button on the iPod touch headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset). Use the following commands to play songs. Control music playback
Say “play” or “play music.” To pause, say “pause” or “pause music.” You can also say “next song” or “previous song.”
Play an album, artist, or playlist
Say “play,” then say “album,” “artist,” or “playlist” and the name.
Shuffle the current playlist
Say “shuffle.”
Find out more about the currently playing song Say “what’s playing,” “what song is this,” “who sings this song,” or “who is this song by.” Use Genius to play similar songs
Say “Genius,” “play more like this,” or “play more songs like this.”
Cancel Voice Control
Say “cancel” or “stop.”
For best results: • Speak clearly and naturally. • Say only iPod touch commands and names. Pause slightly between commands.
By default, Voice Control expects you to speak voice commands in the language that’s set for iPod touch (the General > International > Language setting). The Voice Control settings let you change the language for speaking voice commands. Some languages are available in different dialects or accents. Change language or country: In Settings, choose General > International > Voice Control and tap the language or country. Chapter 2 Basics
33
See“Using Voice Control with iPod” on page 46.
Stereo Headset
The headset included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more (shown here) features a microphone, volume buttons, and an integrated button that allows you to control audio and video playback.
Center button
Plug in the headset to listen to music or record a voice memo using the built-in microphone. Press the center button to control music playback, even when iPod touch is locked. You can also use the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset to control these functions. Pause a song or video
Press the center button once. Press again to resume playback.
Skip to the next song
Press the center button twice quickly.
Adjust the volume
Press the + or – button.
Use Voice Control
Press and hold the center button. See “Voice Control” on page 33.
Bluetooth Headphones
You can use iPod touch with Bluetooth stereo headphones for wireless listening (not available on first-generation iPod touch).
Pairing Headphones with iPod touch You must first pair your Bluetooth headphones with iPod touch before you can use them.
34
Pair Bluetooth headphones with iPod touch: 1 Follow the instructions that came with the headphones to make them discoverable.
2 In Settings, choose General > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth on.
3 Select the headphones and, if prompted, enter the passkey or PIN number. See the instructions about the passkey or PIN that came with your headphones.
Chapter 2 Basics
After you pair headphones with iPod touch, the product name and a Bluetooth audio icon appear on the screen when you are viewing audio or video playback controls. Tap to switch to a different audio output, such as the internal speaker.
Bluetooth Status The Bluetooth icon appears in the iPod touch status bar at the top of the screen: • (blue) or (white): Bluetooth is on and a device is connected to iPod touch. (The color depends on the current color of the status bar.) •
(gray): Bluetooth is on but no device is connected. If you’ve paired a device with iPod touch, it may be out of range or turned off.
• No Bluetooth icon: Bluetooth is turned off.
Unpairing a Bluetooth Device from iPod touch If you’ve paired iPod touch with one Bluetooth device and want to use another device instead, you must unpair the first device.
Unpair a Bluetooth device: 1 In Settings, choose General > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth on.
2 Choose the device and tap “Forget this Device.”
Connecting to the Internet
iPod touch connects to the Internet via Wi-Fi networks. iPod touch can join AirPort and other Wi-Fi networks at home, at work, or at Wi-Fi hotspots around the world. When joined to a Wi-Fi network that is connected to the Internet, iPod touch connects to the Internet automatically whenever you use Mail, Safari, YouTube, Stocks, Maps, Weather, the App Store, or the iTunes Store.
Joining a Wi-Fi Network The Wi-Fi settings let you turn on Wi-Fi and join Wi-Fi networks. Turn on Wi-Fi: Choose Settings > Wi-Fi and turn Wi-Fi on. Join a Wi-Fi network: Choose Settings > Wi-Fi, wait a moment as iPod touch detects networks in range, then select a network (fees may apply to join some Wi-Fi networks). If necessary, enter a password and tap Join (networks that require a password appear with a lock icon). Once you’ve joined a Wi-Fi network manually, iPod touch automatically connects to it whenever the network is in range. If more than one previously used network is in range, iPod touch joins the one last used. When iPod touch is connected to a Wi-Fi network, the Wi-Fi icon in the status bar at the top of the screen shows the connection strength. The more bars you see, the stronger the connection.
Chapter 2 Basics
35
For information about configuring Wi-Fi settings, see “Wi-Fi” on page 115.
VPN Access VPN (virtual private network) provides secure access over the Internet to private networks, such as the network at your company or school. Use Network settings to configure and turn on VPN. See “Network” on page 117. VPN can also be automatically set up by a configuration profile. See “Installing Configuration Profiles” on page 15. When VPN is set up by a configuration profile, iPod touch may turn on VPN automatically whenever it’s needed. Contact your system administrator for more information.
Battery
iPod touch has an internal rechargeable battery. The battery isn’t user accessible and should only be replaced by an authorized service provider.
Charging the Battery WARNING: For important safety information about charging iPod touch, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/ipodtouch. The battery icon in the upper-right corner shows the battery level or charging status.
Charging
Charged
Charge the battery and sync iPod touch: Connect iPod touch to your computer using the included Dock Connector to USB Cable.
Important: The iPod touch battery may drain instead of charge if iPod touch is connected to a computer that’s turned off or is in sleep or standby mode.
36
Chapter 2 Basics
If you charge the battery while syncing or using iPod touch, it may take longer to charge. You can also charge iPod touch using the Apple USB Power Adapter, available separately. Important: If iPod touch is very low on power, it may display one of the following images, indicating that iPod touch needs to charge for up to ten minutes before you can use it. If iPod touch is extremely low on power, the display may be blank for up to two minutes before one of the low-battery images appears.
or
Maximizing Battery Life iPod touch uses lithium-ion batteries. To learn more about how to maximize the lifespan and battery life of your iPod touch, go to www.apple.com/batteries.
Replacing the Battery Rechargeable batteries have a limited number of charge cycles and may eventually need to be replaced. The iPod touch battery isn’t user replaceable; it can only be replaced by an authorized service provider. For more information, go to www.apple.com/support/ipod/service/battery.
Security Features
Security features help protect the information on iPod touch from being accessed by others. You can set up a passcode that you must enter each time you turn on or wake up iPod touch. Set a passcode: Choose General > Passcode Lock and enter a 4-digit passcode, then enter the passcode again to verify it. iPod touch then requires you to enter the passcode to unlock it or to display the passcode lock settings. For addition information about using a passcode lock, see “Passcode Lock” on page 119.
Chapter 2 Basics
37
The Find My iPhone feature helps you locate iPod touch if it’s been lost or misplaced, and display a message on your iPod touch to help someone return it to you. It includes Remote Wipe, which lets you erase all your information on iPod touch in case you don’t recover it. The Remote Passcode Lock feature lets you remotely lock your iPod touch and create a new or replacement 4-digit passcode. Find My iPhone requires a MobileMe account. MobileMe is an online service, available by subscription. Go to www.apple.com/mobileme for more information. To enable this feature, turn on Find My iPod touch in your MobileMe account settings. See “Setting Up Accounts” on page 13. Find your iPod touch: Log in to your MobileMe account at www.me.com and go to the Find My iPhone pane. Follow the onscreen instructions to locate your device on a map and display a message on its screen along with an optional sound to help you find it. Remotely wipe information on your iPod touch: Log in to your MobileMe account at www.me.com, then go to the Find My iPhone pane. Click “Remote Wipe…,” and follow the onscreen instructions. A remote wipe is equivalent to the “Erase all content and settings” feature in Settings. It resets all settings to their defaults and erases all your information and media. See “Resetting iPod touch” on page 122. Remotely lock your iPod touch: Log in to your MobileMe account at www.me.com, then go to the Find My iPhone pane. Click Remote Passcode Lock, and follow the onscreen instructions.
Cleaning iPod touch
To clean iPod touch, unplug all cables and turn off iPod touch (press and hold the Sleep/ Wake button, then slide the onscreen slider). Then use a soft, slightly damp, lintfree cloth. Avoid getting moisture in openings. Don’t use window cleaners, household cleaners, aerosol sprays, solvents, alcohol, ammonia, or abrasives to clean iPod touch. For additional information about handling iPod touch, see the iPod touch Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/ipodtouch.
38
Chapter 2 Basics
Restarting and Resetting iPod touch
If something isn’t working right, try restarting, force quitting an application, or resetting iPod touch. Restart iPod touch: Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the red slider appears. Slide your finger across the slider to turn off iPod touch. To turn iPod touch back on, press and hold the Sleep/Wake until the Apple logo appears. If you can’t turn off iPod touch or if the problem continues, you may need to reset. A reset should be done only if turning iPod touch off and on doesn’t resolve the problem. Force quit an application: Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of iPod touch for a few seconds until a red slider appears, and then press and hold the Home button until the application quits. Reset iPod touch: Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button and the Home button at the same time for at least ten seconds, until the Apple logo appears. For more troubleshooting suggestions, see Appendix A, “Troubleshooting,” on page 150.
Chapter 2 Basics
39
Music and Video
3
iPod touch syncs with iTunes on your computer to get songs, videos, and other content you’ve collected in your iTunes library. For information about adding music and other media to your iTunes library, open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help.
Getting Music, Video, and More
To get music, video, and other content onto iPod touch, you can set up iTunes on your computer to automatically sync content in your library, or you can manually manage the media you put on iPod touch.
Syncing Content from iTunes You can transfer music, video, and more onto iPod touch by syncing content from iTunes. You can sync all of your media, or you can select specific songs, videos, podcasts, and iTunes U collections.
Set iTunes to sync iPod content automatically: 1 Connect iPod touch to your computer.
2 In iTunes, select iPod touch in the sidebar.
3 On the Music, Movies, TV Shows, Podcasts, and iTunes U tabs, select the content you want to sync to iPod touch. For example, you could set iTunes to sync selected music playlists and the three most recent episodes of your favorite video podcast.
4 Click Apply. Important: If you delete an item from iTunes, it will also be deleted from iPod touch the next time you sync. Only songs and videos encoded in formats that iPod touch supports are transferred to iPod touch. For information about which formats iPod touch supports, see “Song, Video, or Other Items Won’t Play” on page 153.
40
If there are more songs in your iTunes library than can fit on your iPod touch, iTunes offers to create a special playlist to sync with iPod touch. iTunes fills the playlist with random selections from your library. You can add or delete songs from the playlist and sync again. If you listen to part of a podcast or audiobook, your place in the story is included if you sync the content with iTunes. If you started listening to the story on iPod touch, you can pick up where you left off using iTunes on your computer—or vice versa. For more information about using iTunes to get music and other media onto your computer, see “What You Need” on page 7.
Manually Managing Content The manually managing feature lets you choose just the music, video, and podcasts you want to have on iPod touch.
Set up iPod touch for manually managing content: 1 Connect iPod touch to your computer.
2 In iTunes, select iPod touch in the sidebar.
3 Click the Summary tab and select “Manually manage music and videos.”
4 Click Apply. Add items to iPod touch: Drag a song, video, podcast, or playlist in your iTunes library to iPod touch (in the sidebar). Shift-click or Command-click (Mac) or Control-click (Windows) to select multiple items to add at the same time. iTunes syncs the content immediately. If you deselect “Manually manage music and videos,” the content you added manually is removed from iPod touch the next time iTunes syncs content. Remove items from iPod touch: With iPod touch connected to your computer, select the iPod touch icon in the iTunes sidebar. Click the disclosure triangle to the left of the icon to show the contents. Select a content area, such as Music or Movies, then select the items you want to delete and press the Delete key on the keyboard. Removing an item from iPod touch doesn’t delete it from your iTunes library.
Purchasing and Downloading Content from the iTunes Store You can use the iTunes Store on iPod touch to purchase and download songs, albums, TV shows, movies, music videos, and audiobooks directly to iPod touch. You can also stream and download audio and video podcasts, as well as iTunes U content. See “About the iTunes Store” on page 131.
Chapter 3 Music and Video
41
Transferring Purchased Content to Another Computer You can transfer content on iPod touch that was purchased using iTunes on one computer to an iTunes library on another authorized computer. The computer must be authorized to play content from your iTunes Store account. To authorize the computer, open iTunes on the computer and choose Store > Authorize Computer. Transfer purchased content: Connect iPod touch to the other computer. iTunes asks if you want to transfer purchased content.
Converting Videos for iPod touch You can add videos other than those purchased from the iTunes Store to iPod touch, such as videos you create in iMovie on a Mac, or videos you download from the Internet and then add to iTunes. If you try to add a video from iTunes to iPod touch and a message says the video can’t play on iPod touch, you can convert the video. Convert a video to work with iPod touch: Select the video in your iTunes library and choose Advanced > “Create iPod or iPhone Version.” Then add the converted video to iPod touch.
Music and Other Audio
The high-resolution Multi-Touch display makes listening to songs on iPod touch as much a visual experience as a musical one. You can scroll through your playlists, or use Cover Flow to browse through your album art. You can listen to audio from the internal speaker (not available on first-generation iPod touch), headphones attached to the headphones port, or Bluetooth stereo headphones paired wirelessly. When headphones are attached or paired, no sound comes out of the speaker. WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/ipodtouch.
Playing Songs Browse your collection: Tap Playlists, Artists, or Songs. Tap More to browse Albums, Audiobooks, Compilations, Composers, Genres, iTunes U, or Podcasts. Browse Genius Mixes: Tap Genius. If Genius doesn’t appear, you need to turn on Genius in iTunes 9 or later, and then sync iPod touch with iTunes. See “Using Genius on iPod touch” on page 48. Play a song: Tap the song. Shake to shuffle: Shake iPod touch to turn shuffle on and immediately change songs. Shake anytime to change to another song. 42
Chapter 3 Music and Video
You can turn the “Shake to Shuffle” feature on or off in Settings > Music (it’s on by default). See “Music” on page 123.
Controlling Song Playback When you play a song, the Now Playing screen appears. Back Track List
Play/Pause Next/Fast-forward
Previous/ Rewind
Volume
Pause a song
Tap , or press the center button on the iPod touch headset (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset.
Resume playback
Tap , or press the center button on the iPod touch headset (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset.
Raise or lower the volume
Drag the volume slider or use the buttons on the side of iPod touch. You can also use the volume buttons on the iPod touch headset (only on Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more).
Restart a song or a chapter in an audiobook or podcast
Tap
Chapter 3 Music and Video
.
43
Skip to the next song or chapter in an audiobook or podcast
Tap , or press the center button on the iPod touch headset (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset twice quickly.
Go to the previous song or chapter in an audiobook or podcast
twice, or press the center button on the Tap iPod touch headset (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset three times quickly.
Rewind or fast-forward
Touch and hold or . The longer you hold the control, the faster the song rewinds or fastforwards. On the iPod touch headset (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more), press the center button (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) twice quickly and hold to fast forward, or three times quickly and hold to rewind.
Return to the iPod browse lists
Tap , or swipe to the right over the album cover.
Return to the Now Playing screen
Tap Now Playing.
Display a song’s lyrics
Tap the album cover when playing a song. (Lyrics appear if you’ve added them to the song using the song’s Info window in iTunes.)
You can display playback controls at any time when you’re listening to music and using another application—or even when iPod touch is locked—by double-clicking the Home button. If you’re using an application, the playback controls appear on top of the application. After using the controls, you can close them or tap Music to go to the Now Playing screen. If iPod touch is locked, the controls appear onscreen, then disappear automatically after you finish using them.
Additional Song Controls From the Now Playing screen, tap the album cover. The repeat, Genius, and shuffle controls appear along with the scrubber bar. You can see elapsed time, remaining time, and the song number. The song’s lyrics also appear, if you’ve added them to the song in iTunes.
44
Chapter 3 Music and Video
The scrubber bar lets you skip to any point along the timeline. You can adjust the scrub rate from high-speed to fine by sliding your finger down as you drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Repeat
Genius
Scrubber bar
Shuffle
Playhead
Set iPod touch to repeat songs
Tap . Tap again to set iPod touch to repeat only the current song. = iPod touch is set to repeat all songs in the current album or list. = iPod touch is set to repeat the current song over and over. = iPod touch isn’t set to repeat songs.
Skip to any point in a song
Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Slide your finger down to adjust the scrub rate. The scrub rate becomes slower the farther down you slide your finger.
Make a Genius playlist
Tap , and the Genius playlist appears. See “Using Genius on iPod touch” on page 48.
Set iPod touch to shuffle songs
Tap . Tap again to set iPod touch to play songs in order. = iPod touch is set to shuffle songs. = iPod touch is set to play songs in order.
Shuffle the tracks in any playlist, album, or other Tap Shuffle at the top of the list. For example, to list of songs shuffle all the songs on iPod touch, choose Songs > Shuffle. Whether or not iPod touch is set to shuffle, if you tap Shuffle at the top of a list of songs, iPod touch plays the songs from that list in random order.
Podcast and Audiobook Controls From the Now Playing screen, tap the cover. The email, 30-second repeat, and playback speed controls appear along with the scrubber bar. You can see elapsed time, remaining time, and the episode or chapter number.
Chapter 3 Music and Video
45
The scrubber bar lets you skip to any point along the timeline. You can adjust the scrub rate from high-speed to fine by sliding your finger down as you drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Email
30-second repeat
Playback speed Scrubber bar
Playhead
Send an email link to this podcast
Tap
.
Skip to any point
Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Slide your finger down to adjust the scrub rate. The scrub rate becomes slower the farther down you slide your finger.
Play back the last 30 seconds
Tap
Set the playback speed
Tap
. . Tap again to change the speed. = Play at double speed. = Play at half speed. = Play at normal speed.
Using Voice Control with iPod You can use Voice Control (available only on Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) to control music playback on iPod touch. Note: Requires included headset or compatible accessory with microphone. Voice Control isn’t available in all languages. Use Voice Control: Press and hold the Home button until the Voice Control screen appears and you hear a beep. Then use the commands described below to play songs. You can also press and hold the center button on the iPod touch headset (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset to bring up Voice Control.
46
Control music playback
Say “play” or “play music.” To pause, say “pause” or “pause music.” You can also say “next song” or “previous song.”
Play an album, artist, or playlist
Say “play,” then say “album,” “artist,” or “playlist” and the name.
Shuffle the current playlist
Say “shuffle.”
Chapter 3 Music and Video
Find out more about the currently playing song Say “what’s playing,” “what song is this,” “who sings this song,” or “who is this song by.” Use Genius to play similar songs
Say “Genius,” “play more like this,” or “play more songs like this.”
Cancel Voice Control
Say “cancel” or “stop.”
Browsing Album Covers in Cover Flow When you’re browsing music, you can rotate iPod touch sideways to see your iTunes content in Cover Flow and browse your music by album artwork.
Browse album covers
Drag or flick left or right.
See the tracks on an album
Tap a cover or
Play any track
Tap the track. Drag up or down to scroll through the tracks.
Return to the cover
Tap the title bar. Or tap
Play or pause the current song
Tap or . You can also press the center button on the iPod touch headset (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset.
Chapter 3 Music and Video
.
again.
47
Viewing All Tracks on an Album See all the tracks on the album that contains the current song: From the Now Playing screen tap . Tap a track to play it. Tap the album cover thumbnail to return to the Now Playing screen. Rating bar Back to Now Playing screen
Album tracks
In track list view, you can assign ratings to songs. You can use ratings to create smart playlists in iTunes that dynamically update to include, for example, your highest rated songs. Rate a song: Drag your thumb across the rating bar to give the song zero to five stars.
Searching Music You can search the titles, artists, albums, and composers of songs, podcasts, and other content you’ve synced to iPod touch.
Search music: Enter text in the search field at the top of a song list, playlist, artist list, or other view of your iPod content. (Tap the status bar to scroll quickly to the top of a list and reveal the search field.) Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more of the results. You can also use Spotlight to search for music. See “Searching” on page 32.
Using Genius on iPod touch Genius finds songs in your iTunes library that go great together. A Genius playlist is a collection of songs that are picked for you to go with a song you choose from your library. A Genius Mix is a selection of songs of the same kind of music. Genius Mixes are recreated each time you listen to them, so they’re always new and fresh. You can create Genius playlists in iTunes and sync them to iPod touch. You can also create and save Genius playlists directly on iPod touch.
48
Chapter 3 Music and Video
Genius Mixes are created in iTunes. iTunes creates different mixes depending on the variety of music you have in your iTunes library. For example, you may have Genius Mixes that highlight R&B songs, or Alternative Rock songs. To use Genius on iPod touch, first turn on Genius in iTunes, then sync iPod touch with iTunes. Genius Mixes are synced automatically, unless you manually manage your music and choose which mixes you want to sync in iTunes. Genius is a free service, but requires an iTunes Store account. Genius Mixes require iTunes 9 or later. When you sync a Genius Mix, iTunes may select and sync songs from your library that you haven’t otherwise chosen to sync. Browse Genius Mixes: Tap Genius. The number of dots at the bottom of the screen shows the number of mixes you’ve synced from iTunes, and indicates which mix you’re viewing. Flick left or right to access your other mixes.
Play a Genius Mix: Tap the mix or tap .
Make a Genius playlist on iPod touch: 1 Tap Playlists and tap Genius. 2 Tap a song in the list. Genius creates a playlist with additional songs that go great with that song. You can also make a Genius playlist of songs that go great with the song you’re playing. From the Now Playing screen, tap the album cover to display additional controls, then tap . Save a Genius playlist: In the playlist, tap Save. The playlist is saved in Playlists with the title of the song you picked. You can make and save as many Genius playlists as you want. If you save a Genius playlist created on iPod touch, it syncs back to iTunes the next time you connect.
Chapter 3 Music and Video
49
Refresh a Genius playlist: In the playlist, tap Refresh. Refreshing a playlist creates a playlist of different songs that go great with the song you picked. You can refresh any Genius playlist, whether it was created in iTunes and synced to iPod touch, or created directly on iPod touch. Create a Genius playlist from a new song: In the playlist, tap New, then pick a new song. Delete a saved Genius playlist: In a playlist that you saved directly on iPod touch, tap Edit, then tap Delete Playlist. Once a Genius playlist is synced back to iTunes, you won’t be able to delete it directly from iPod touch. You can use iTunes to edit the playlist name, stop syncing, or delete the playlist.
Making On-The-Go Playlists
Make an on-the-go playlist: 1 Tap Playlists and tap On-The-Go.
2 Browse for songs using the buttons at the bottom of the screen. Tap any song or video to add it to the playlist. Tap Add All Songs at the top of any list of songs to add all the songs in the list.
3 When you finish, tap Done. When you make an on-the-go playlist and then sync iPod touch to your computer, the playlist is saved on iPod touch and in your iTunes library, then deleted from iPod touch. The first is saved as “On-The-Go 1,” the second as “On-The-Go 2,” and so on. To put a playlist back on iPod touch, select iPod touch in the iTunes sidebar, click the Music tab, and set the playlist to sync. Edit an on-the-go playlist: Tap Playlists, tap On-The-Go, tap Edit, then do one of the following: • To move a song higher or lower in the list, drag
next to the song.
• To delete a song from the playlist, tap
next to a song, then tap Delete. Deleting a song from the on-the-go playlist doesn’t delete it from iPod touch.
• To clear the entire playlist, tap Clear Playlist. • To add more songs, tap
Videos
.
With iPod touch, you can view video content such as movies, music videos, and video podcasts. If a video contains chapters, you can skip to the next or previous chapter, or bring up a list and start playing at any chapter that you choose. If a video provides alternate language features, you can choose an audio language or display subtitles.
50
Chapter 3 Music and Video
Playing Videos Play a video: Tap Videos and tap the video. Display playback controls: Tap the screen to show the controls. Tap again to hide them.
Controlling Video Playback Videos play in widescreen to take full advantage of the display. The scrubber bar lets you skip to any point along the timeline. You can adjust the scrub rate by sliding your finger down as you drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Scrubber bar
Playhead Scale
Play/Pause Next/Fastforward
Restart/Rewind
Volume
Lovers in Japan by Coldplay is available in the iTunes Store
Pause a video
Tap , or press the center button on the iPod touch headset (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset.
Resume playback
Tap , or press the center button on the iPod touch headset (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset.
Raise or lower the volume
Drag the volume slider. You can also use the volume buttons on the iPod touch headset (only on Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more).
Start a video over
Drag the playhead on the scrubber bar all the way to the left, or tap if the video doesn’t contain chapters.
Chapter 3 Music and Video
51
Skip to the next chapter (if available)
Tap , or press the center button on the iPod touch headset (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset twice quickly.
Go to the previous chapter (if available)
Tap , or press the center button on the iPod touch headset (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset three times quickly.
Start playing at a specific chapter (if available)
Tap
Rewind or fast-forward
Touch and hold
Skip to any point in a video
Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Slide your finger down to adjust the scrub rate. The scrub rate becomes slower the farther down you slide your finger.
, then choose a chapter from the list. or
.
Stop watching a video before it finishes playing Tap Done. Or press the Home Scale a video to fill the screen or fit to the screen
Tap to make the video fill the screen. Tap to make it fit the screen. You can also double-tap the video to toggle between fitting and filling the screen. When you scale a video to fill the screen, the sides or top may be cropped from view. When you scale it to fit the screen, you may see black bars on the sides or above and below the video.
Select an alternate audio language (if available) Tap list. Show or hide subtitles (if available)
button.
, then choose a language from the Audio
Tap , then choose a language, or Off, from the Subtitles list.
Searching Video You can search the titles of movies, TV shows, and video podcasts you’ve synced to iPod touch.
Search video: Enter text in the search field at the top of the list of videos. Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more of the results.
52
Chapter 3 Music and Video
Watching Rented Movies You can rent movies in standard (480p) definition from the iTunes Store and watch them on iPod touch. You can download rented movies directly to iPod touch, or transfer them from iTunes on your computer to iPod touch. You can also transfer rented movies back to iTunes from iPod touch. (Rented movies aren’t available in all regions.) The movie must be fully downloaded before you can start watching. You can pause a download and resume it later. Rented movies expire after a certain number of days, and once you start a movie you have a limited amount of time to finish watching it. The time remaining appears near a movie’s title. Movies are automatically deleted when they expire. Check the iTunes Store for the expiration time before renting a movie. Transfer rented movies to iPod touch: Connect iPod touch to your computer. Then select iPod touch in the iTunes sidebar, click Movies, and select the rented movies you want to transfer. Your computer must be connected to the Internet. View a rented movie: Choose Videos and select a movie.
Watching Videos on a TV You can connect iPod touch to your TV and watch your videos on the large screen. Use the Apple Component AV Cable, Apple Composite AV Cable, or other authorized iPod touch compatible cable. You can also use these cables with the Apple Universal Dock to connect iPod touch to your TV. (The Apple Universal Dock includes a remote that lets you control playback from a distance.) Apple cables and docks are available for purchase separately in many countries. Go to www.apple.com/ipodstore (not available in all countries).
Deleting Videos from iPod touch You can delete videos from iPod touch to save space. Delete a video: In the videos list, swipe left or right over the video, then tap Delete. When you delete a video (other than rented movies) from iPod touch, it isn’t deleted from your iTunes library and you can sync the video back to iPod touch later. If you don’t want to sync the video back to iPod touch, set iTunes to not sync the video. See “What You Need” on page 7. Important: If you delete a rented movie from iPod touch, it’s deleted permanently and cannot be transferred back to your computer.
Chapter 3 Music and Video
53
Setting a Sleep Timer
You can set iPod touch to stop playing music or videos after a period of time. Set a sleep timer: From the Home screen choose Clock > Timer, then flick to set the number of hours and minutes. Tap When Timer Ends and choose Sleep iPod, tap Set, then tap Start to start the timer. When the timer ends, iPod touch stops playing music or video, closes any other open application, and then locks itself.
Changing the Browse Buttons
You can replace the browse buttons at the bottom of the screen with buttons you use more frequently. For example, if you often listen to podcasts, you can replace the Songs button with Podcasts. Change the browse buttons: Tap More and tap Edit, then drag a button to the bottom of the screen, over the button you want to replace.
You can drag the buttons at the bottom of the screen left or right to rearrange them. Tap Done when you finish. Tap More at any time to access the buttons you replaced.
54
Chapter 3 Music and Video
Safari
4
Viewing Webpages
Safari lets you surf the web and view webpages on iPod touch in the same way as if you were on your computer. You can create bookmarks on iPod touch and sync bookmarks with your computer. Add web clips for quick access to your favorite sites directly from the Home screen. To use Safari, iPod touch must join a Wi-Fi network that is connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 35. You can view webpages in either portrait or landscape orientation. Rotate iPod touch and the webpage rotates too, automatically adjusting to fit the page.
Opening Webpages Open a webpage: Tap the address field (on the left side of the title bar), then type the web address and tap Go. If the address field isn’t visible, tap the status bar at the top of the screen to quickly scroll to the address field at the top of the webpage.
55
As you type, web addresses that start with those letters appear. These are bookmarked pages or recent pages you’ve opened. Tap an address to go to that page. Keep typing if you want to enter a web address that’s not in the list. Erase the text in the address field: Tap the address field, then tap
.
Zooming and Scrolling Zoom in or out: Double-tap a column on a webpage to expand the column. Doubletap again to zoom out.
You can also pinch to zoom in or out manually. Scroll around a webpage
Drag up, down, or sideways. When scrolling, you can touch and drag anywhere on the page without activating any links.
Scroll within a frame on a webpage
Use two fingers to scroll within a frame on a webpage. Use one finger to scroll the entire webpage.
Scroll quickly to the top of a webpage
Tap the status bar at the top of the iPod touch screen.
Navigating Webpages Links on webpages typically take you to another place on the web. Follow a link on a webpage: Tap the link. Links on iPod touch can also display a location in Maps or create a preaddressed Mail message. To return to Safari after a link opens another application, press the Home button and tap Safari.
56
See a link’s destination address
Touch and hold the link. The address pops up next to your finger. You can touch and hold an image to see if it has a link.
Stop a webpage from loading
Tap
.
Reload a webpage
Tap
.
Return to the previous or next page
Tap
or
Chapter 4 Safari
at the bottom of the screen.
Return to a recently viewed page
Tap and tap History. To clear the history list, tap Clear.
Send a webpage address via email
Tap
Save an image or photo to your Photo Library
Touch and hold the image, then tap Save Image.
and tap “Mail Link to this Page.”
Opening Multiple Pages You can have up to eight pages open at a time. Some links automatically open a new page instead of replacing the current one. The number inside the pages icon at the bottom of the screen shows how many pages are open. If there’s no number inside, just one page is open. For example: = one page is open = three pages are open Open a new page: Tap Go to another page: Tap
Close a page: Tap
and tap New Page. and flick left or right. Tap the page you want to view.
and tap
. You can’t close a page if it’s the only one open.
Entering Text and Filling Out Forms Some webpages have text fields and forms to fill out. You can set Safari to remember names and passwords of websites you visit and fill out text fields automatically with information from Contacts. See “Safari” on page 129.
Chapter 4 Safari
57
Bring up the keyboard
Tap inside a text field.
Move to another text field
Tap another text field, or tap the Next or Previous button.
Submit a form
Once you finish filling out a form, tap Go or Search. Most pages also have a link you can tap to submit the form.
Close the keyboard without submitting the form
Tap Done.
Enable AutoFill to help you fill out web forms: In Settings, choose Safari > AutoFill, then do one of the following: • To use information from contacts, turn Use Contact Info on, then choose My Info and
select the contact you want to use. Safari uses information from Contacts to fill in contact fields on web forms. • To use information from names and passwords, turn Names & Passwords on.
When this feature is on, Safari remembers names and passwords of websites you visit and automatically fills in the information when you revisit the website. • To remove all AutoFill information, tap Clear All.
Searching the Web
By default, Safari searches using Google. You can search using Yahoo!, instead.
Search the web: 1 Tap the search field (on the right side of the title bar).
2 Type a word or phrase that describes what you’re looking for, then tap Google.
3 Tap a link in the list of search results to open a webpage. Set Safari to search using Yahoo!: From the Home screen choose Settings > Safari > Search Engine, then choose Yahoo!.
Bookmarks
You can bookmark webpages you want to return to later. Bookmark a webpage: Open the page and tap . Then tap Add Bookmark. When you save a bookmark you can edit its title. By default, bookmarks are saved at the top level of Bookmarks. Tap Bookmarks to choose another folder. If you use Safari on a Mac, or Safari or Microsoft Internet Explorer on a PC, you can sync bookmarks with the web browser on your computer.
58
Chapter 4 Safari
Sync bookmarks with your computer: 1 Connect iPod touch to your computer.
2 In iTunes, select iPod touch in the sidebar.
3 Click the Info tab, select “Sync … bookmarks” under Web Browser, then click Apply. See “Syncing” on page 9. Sync bookmarks with MobileMe: In Settings on iPod touch, select Bookmarks in your MobileMe account. See “Setting Up Accounts” on page 13. Open a bookmarked webpage: Tap see the bookmarks inside.
, then choose a bookmark or tap a folder to
Edit a bookmark or bookmark folder: Tap , choose the folder that has the bookmark or folder you want to edit, then tap Edit. Then do one of the following: • To make a new folder, tap New Folder. • To delete a bookmark or folder, tap
, then tap Delete.
• To reposition a bookmark or folder, drag
.
• To edit the name or address, or to put it in a different folder, tap the bookmark or folder.
When you’re finished, tap Done.
Web Clips
Add web clips to the Home screen for fast access to your favorite webpages. Web clips appear as icons on the Home screen, and you can arrange your web clips along with the other icons. See “iPod touch Applications” on page 19. Add a web clip: Open the webpage and tap . Then tap “Add to Home Screen.” When you open a web clip, Safari automatically zooms and scrolls to the area of the webpage that was displayed when you saved the web clip. The displayed area is also used to create the icon for the web clip on your Home screen, unless the webpage comes with its own custom icon. When you add a web clip, you can edit its name. If the name is too long (more than about 10 characters), it may appear abbreviated on the Home screen. Web clips aren’t bookmarks, and aren’t synced by MobileMe or iTunes.
Delete a web clip: 1 Touch and hold any icon on the Home screen until the icons start to wiggle.
2 Tap
3 Tap Delete, then press the Home
in the corner of the web clip you want to delete.
Chapter 4 Safari
button to save your arrangement.
59
App Store
5
About the App Store
You can search for, browse, review, purchase, and download applications from the App Store directly to iPod touch. Applications you download and install from the App Store on iPod touch are backed up to your iTunes library the next time you sync iPod touch with your computer. You can also install applications you’ve purchased or downloaded through iTunes on your computer when you sync with iPod touch. Note: The App Store is not available in all regions. To use the App Store, iPod touch must join a Wi-Fi network that’s connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 35. You also need an iTunes Store account (not available in some countries) to download applications. By default, iPod touch gets your iTunes Store account settings from iTunes. If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, or if you want to make purchases from another iTunes Store account, go to Settings > Store. See “Store” on page 125.
Browsing and Searching
Browse the featured selections to see new, notable, or recommended applications, or browse Top 25 to see the most popular applications. If you’re looking for a specific application, use Search.
60
Browse applications: Tap Featured, Categories, or Top 25. Choose a category, or choose a sorting method at the top of the screen to browse by lists such as New, What’s Hot, Genius, Top Paid, or Top Free.
Browse using Genius: Tap Genius to see a list of recommended apps based on what’s already in your app collection. To turn Genius on, follow the onscreen instructions. Genius is a free service, but it requires an iTunes Store account. Search for applications: Tap Search, tap the search field and enter one or more words, then tap Search.
Chapter 5 App Store
61
Info Screen
Tap any application in a list to see more information, such as the application’s price, screenshots, ratings, and other information.
If you’ve already installed the application, “Installed” appears instead of the price on the Info screen. Email a link to the application’s Info page in iTunes: Tap “Tell a Friend” near the bottom of the Info screen.
View screenshots: Swipe left or right over a screenshot to view additional screenshot pages. Double-tap to zoom in. Get ratings and read reviews: Tap Ratings near the bottom of the Info screen. Report a problem: Tap “Report a Problem” near the bottom of the Info screen. Select a problem from the list or type optional comments, then tap Report.
62
Chapter 5 App Store
Downloading Applications
When you find an application you want in the App Store, you can purchase and download it to iPod touch. If the application is free, you can download it without charge after providing your iTunes account information. Once you download an application, it’s immediately installed on iPod touch.
Purchase and download an application: 1 Tap the price (or tap Free), then tap Buy Now.
2 Sign in to your account as requested, then tap OK. If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, tap Create New Account to set one up. Downloads for purchase are charged to your iTunes Store account. For additional downloads made within the next fifteen minutes, you don’t have to enter your password again. Some applications allow you to make purchases within the application. You can restrict in-app purchases in Settings. See “Restrictions” on page 119. Some applications use push notifications to alert you of new information, even when the application isn’t running. Notifications differ depending upon the application, but may include text or sound alerts, and a numbered badge on the application’s icon on the Home screen. See “Notifications” on page 116. You can redeem iTunes Store gift cards, gift certificates, or other promotional codes to make purchases. When you’re signed in to your account, your remaining store credit appears with your account information at the bottom of most App Store screens. Enter a redemption code: Tap Redeem near the bottom of the Featured screen, then follow the onscreen instructions. See the status of downloading applications: After you begin downloading an application, its icon appears on the Home screen and shows a progress indicator.
If a download is interrupted, iPod touch starts the download again the next time it has an Internet connection. Or, if you open iTunes on your computer, iTunes completes the download to your iTunes library (if your computer is connected to the Internet and signed in to the same iTunes account).
Chapter 5 App Store
63
Deleting Applications
You can delete applications you’ve installed from the App Store. If you delete an application, data associated with the application will no longer be available to iPod touch, unless you reinstall the application and restore its data from a backup. You can reinstall an application and restore its data as long as you backed up iPod touch with iTunes on your computer. (If you try to delete an application that hasn’t been backed up to your computer, an alert appears.) To retrieve the application data, you must restore iPod touch from a backup containing the data. See “Restoring from a Backup” on page 157.
Delete an App Store application: 1 Touch and hold any application icon on the Home screen until the icons start to wiggle.
2 Tap
3 Tap Delete, then press the Home
in the corner of the application you want to delete. button to save your arrangement.
When you delete an application, its data is no longer accessible via the iPod touch user interface, but it isn’t erased from your iPod touch. For information about erasing all content and settings, see “Erase All Content and Settings” in iPod touch settings. See “Resetting iPod touch” on page 122.
Writing Reviews
You can write and submit your own application reviews directly on iPod touch.
Write a review: 1 Tap Ratings near the bottom of the Info screen.
2 On the Reviews screen, tap “Write a Review.”
3 Select the number of stars (1–5) for your rating of the application, and enter your nickname, a title for the review, and optional review comments. If you’ve written reviews before, the nickname field is already filled in. Otherwise, you’re asked to create a reviewer nickname.
4 Tap Send. You must be signed in to your iTunes Store account and have purchased or downloaded the item in order to submit reviews.
64
Chapter 5 App Store
Updating Applications
Whenever you access the App Store, it checks for updates to applications you’ve installed. The App Store also automatically checks for updates every week. The App Store icon shows the total number of application updates available.
If an update is available and you access the App Store, the Updates screen appears immediately. Application updates are downloaded and automatically installed when you choose to update them. Application upgrades are new releases that can be purchased or downloaded through the App Store on iPod touch or the iTunes Store on your computer.
Update an application: 1 At the bottom of the screen, tap Updates.
2 Tap an application to see more information about the update.
3 Tap Update. Update all applications: At the bottom of the screen, tap Updates, then tap Update All. If you try to update an application purchased from a different iTunes Store account, you’re prompted for that account’s ID and password in order to download the update.
Syncing Purchased Applications
iTunes automatically syncs applications you’ve downloaded or purchased on iPod touch to your iTunes library when you connect iPod touch to your computer. This lets you access the downloads on your computer and provides a backup if you delete applications from iPod touch. Downloaded applications are backed up the next time you sync with iTunes. Afterwards, only application data is backed up when you sync with iTunes. Applications are synced to the Applications list in your iTunes library. iTunes creates the list if it doesn’t exist.
Chapter 5 App Store
65
6
Mail
Mail works with MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, and many of the most popular email systems—including Yahoo! Mail, Google email, and AOL—as well as other industrystandard POP3 and IMAP email systems. You can send and receive embedded photos and graphics, and view PDFs and other attachments. To download and send messages in Mail, iPod touch must join a Wi-Fi network that is connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 35.
Setting Up Email Accounts
You can set up email accounts on iPod touch in either of the following ways: • Set up an account directly on iPod touch. See “Setting Up Accounts” on page 13. • In iTunes, use the iPod touch preference panes to sync email accounts settings from
your computer. See “Syncing” on page 9.
Sending Email
You can send an email message to anyone who has an email address.
Compose and send a message: 1 Tap . 2 Type a name or email address in the To field, or tap contacts.
to add a name from your
As you type an email address, matching email addresses from your contacts list appear below. Tap an address to add it. To add more names, tap Return or . Note: If you’re composing a message from your Microsoft Exchange account and have access to your enterprise Global Address List (GAL), matching addresses from the contacts on iPod touch appear first, followed by matching GAL addresses.
66
3 Tap Cc/Bcc/From if you want to copy or blind copy the message to others, or change the account you send the message from. If you have more than one email account, you can tap the From field to change the account you’re sending from.
4 Enter a subject, then your message. You can tap Return to move from one field to another.
5 Tap Send. Send a photo in an email message
In Photos, choose a photo, tap , then tap Email Photo or Email Video. You can also copy and paste photos. The photo is sent using your default email account (see “Mail” on page 127).
Send a video in an email message
In Photos, choose a video, then touch and hold the video until the Copy command appears. Tap Copy. Go to Mail and create a new message. Tap to place an insertion point where you want the video, then tap the insertion point to display the edit commands and tap Paste. The video is sent using your default email account (see “Mail” on page 127).
Save a draft of a message to complete later
Tap Cancel, then tap Save. The message is saved in the Drafts mailbox.
Reply to a message
Tap . Tap Reply to reply only to the sender or tap Reply All to reply to the sender and all recipients. Type your return message, then tap Send. Files or images attached to the initial message aren’t sent back.
Forward a message
Open a message and tap , then tap Forward. Add one or more email addresses, type your message, then tap Send. When you forward a message, you can include the files or images attached to the original message.
Share contact information
In Contacts, choose a contact, tap Share Contact at the bottom of the Info screen, then tap Email.
Checking and Reading Email
The Mail icon shows the total number of unread messages in all your inboxes. You may have other unread messages in other mailboxes. Number of unread emails in your inboxes
Chapter 6 Mail
67
Check for new messages: Choose a mailbox or tap
at any time.
On each account screen, you can see the number of unread messages in each mailbox. Tap to see all your email accounts
Number of unread messages
Tap a mailbox to see its messages. Unread messages have a blue dot
next to them.
Unread messages
When you open a mailbox, Mail loads the number of most recent messages specified in your Mail settings, if the messages haven’t already been loaded automatically. (See “Mail” on page 127.) Load additional messages: Scroll to the bottom of the list of messages and tap Load More Messages. Read a message: Tap a mailbox, then tap a message. Within a message, tap see the next or previous message.
68
or
to
Zoom in on part of a message
Double-tap an area of the message to zoom in. Double-tap again to zoom out.
Resize any column of text to fit the screen
Double-tap the text.
Resize a message manually
Pinch to zoom in or out.
Chapter 6 Mail
Follow a link
Tap the link. Text links are typically underlined and blue. Many images are also links. A link can take you to a webpage, open a map, or open a new preaddressed email message. Web and map links open Safari or Maps on iPod touch. To return to your email, press the Home button and tap Mail.
See a link’s destination address
Touch and hold the link. The address is displayed, and you can choose to open the link in Safari or copy the link address to the clipboard.
iPod touch displays picture attachments in many commonly used formats (JPEG, GIF, and TIFF) inline with the text in email messages. iPod touch can play many audio attachments (such as MP3, AAC, WAV, and AIFF). You can download and view files (such as PDF, webpage, text, Pages, Keynote, Numbers, and Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint documents) attached to messages you receive. Open an attached file: Tap the attachment. It downloads to iPod touch and then opens.
Tap attachment to download
You can view attachments in portrait or landscape orientation. If the format of an attached file isn’t supported by iPod touch, you can see the name of the file but you can’t open it. iPod touch supports the following document types: .doc
Microsoft Word
.docx
Microsoft Word (XML)
.htm
webpage
.html
webpage
.key
Keynote
.numbers
Numbers
.pages
Pages
Chapter 6 Mail
69
.pdf
Preview, Adobe Acrobat
.ppt
Microsoft PowerPoint
.pptx
Microsoft PowerPoint (XML)
.rtf
Rich Text Format
.txt
text
.vcf
contact information
.xls
Microsoft Excel
.xlsx
Microsoft Excel (XML)
Save an attached photo to your Saved Photos album: Tap the photo, then tap Save Image. If the photo hasn’t been downloaded yet, tap the download notice first. Save an attached video to your Saved Photos album: Touch and hold the attachment, then tap Save Video. If the video hasn’t been downloaded yet, tap the download notice first. See all the recipients of a message
Tap Details. Tap a name or email address to see the recipient’s contact information. Then tap an email address to contact the person. Tap Hide to hide the recipients.
Add an email recipient to your contacts list
Tap the message and, if necessary, tap Details to see the recipients. Then tap a name or email address and tap Create New Contact or “Add to Existing Contact.”
Mark a message as unread
Open the message and tap “Mark as Unread.” A blue dot appears next to the message in the mailbox list until you open it again.
Open a meeting invitation: Tap the invitation.
You can get contact information for the organizer and other attendees, set an alert, add notes to the event, and add comments that are included in your response emailed to the organizer. You can accept, tentatively accept, or decline the invitation. See “Responding to Meeting Invitations” on page 77. Turn Push on or off: In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Fetch New Data, then turn Push on or off.
70
Chapter 6 Mail
Searching Email
You can search the To, From, and Subject fields of email messages. Mail searches the downloaded messages in the currently open mailbox. For MobileMe, Exchange, and some IMAP mail accounts, you can also search messages on the server.
Search email messages: Open a mailbox, scroll to the top, and enter text in the Search field. Tap From, To, Subject, or All (From, To, and Subject) to choose which fields you want to search. (Tap the status bar to scroll quickly to the top of the list and reveal the search field.) Search results for the messages already downloaded to iPod touch appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more of the results. Search messages on the server: Tap “Continue Search on Server” at the end of the search results. Note: Search results of messages on servers may vary depending on the type of account. Some servers may search only whole words.
Organizing Email
You can delete messages one at a time, or select a group to delete all at once. You can also move messages from one mailbox or folder to another. Delete a message: Open the message and tap . You can also delete a message directly from the mailbox message list by swiping left or right over the message title, then tapping Delete.
To show the Delete button, swipe left or right over the message.
Chapter 6 Mail
71
Delete multiple messages: When viewing a list of messages, tap Edit, select the messages you want to delete, then tap Delete.
Move a message to another mailbox or folder: When viewing a message, tap then choose a mailbox or folder. Move multiple messages: When viewing a list of messages, tap Edit, select the messages you want to move, then tap Move and select a mailbox or folder.
72
Chapter 6 Mail
,
Calendar
7
About Calendar
Calendar lets you view individual calendars for your different accounts or a combined calendar for all accounts. You can view your events in a continuous list, by day, or by month, and search events by title, invitee, or location. You can sync iPod touch with the calendars on your computer. You can also make, edit, or cancel appointments on iPod touch, and have them synced back to your computer. You can subscribe to Google, Yahoo!, or Mac OS X iCal calendars using a CalDAV or iCalendar (.ics) account. If you have a Microsoft Exchange account, you can receive and respond to meeting invitations.
Syncing Calendars
You can sync Calendar in either of the following ways: • In iTunes, use the iPod touch preference panes to sync with iCal or Microsoft Entourage on a Mac, or Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC when you connect iPod touch to your computer. See “Syncing” on page 9. • In Settings on iPod touch, select Calendar in your MobileMe or Microsoft
Exchange accounts to sync your calendar information over the air. See “Setting Up Accounts” on page 13. To sync calendars, iPod touch must join a Wi-Fi network that is connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 35.
73
Viewing Your Calendar
You can view individual calendars for your different accounts or a combined calendar for all accounts. View a different calendar: Tap Calendars, then select a calendar. Tap All Calendars to view combined events from all calendars. You can view your calendar events in a list, by day, or by month. The events for all of your synced calendars appear in the same calendar on iPod touch. Switch views: Tap List, Day, or Month. • List view: All your appointments and events appear in a scrollable list. • Day view: Scroll up or down to see the events in a day. Tap
or
to see the
previous or next day’s events. • Month view: Tap a day to see its events. Tap
month. Add an event
Days with dots have scheduled events
Events for selected day Respond to calendar invitation Go to today
Switch views
See the details of an event: Tap the event.
74
Chapter 7 Calendar
or
to see the previous or next
Searching Calendars
You can search the titles, invitees, and locations of the events in your calendars. Calendar searches the calendar you’re currently viewing, or all calendars if you’re viewing them all.
Search events: In list view, enter text in the search field. Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more results.
Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars
You can subscribe to calendars that use the CalDAV or iCalendar (.ics) formats. Many calendar-based services, including Yahoo!, Google, and the Mac OS X iCal application, support either format. Subscribed calendars are read only. You can read events from subscribed calendars on iPod touch, but can’t edit them or create new events. You also can’t accept invitations from CalDAV accounts.
Subscribe to a CalDAV or .ics calendar: 1 In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” then tap Add Account.
2 Choose Other, then choose either Add CalDAV Account or Add Subscribed Calendar.
3 Enter your account information, then tap Next to verify the account.
4 Tap Save. Apple provides links to a number of free iCal calendars—for national holidays or sports events, for example—that you may want to subscribe to. The calendars are automatically added to iCal on your desktop when you download them. You can then sync them to iPod touch as described in “Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars” on page 75. Go to /www.apple.com/downloads/macosx/calendars. Chapter 7 Calendar
75
You can also subscribe to an iCal (or other .ics) calendar published on the web by tapping a link to the calendar you receive in an email message on iPod touch.
Adding Calendar Events to iPod touch
You can also enter and edit calendar events directly on iPod touch. Add an event: Tap
and enter event information, then tap Done.
You can enter any of the following: • Title • Location • Starting and ending times (or turn on All-day if it’s an all-day event) • Repeat times—none, or every day, week, two weeks, month, or year • Alert time—from five minutes to two days before the event
When you set an alert, the option to set a second alert appears. When an alert goes off, iPod touch displays a message. You can also set iPod touch to play a sound (see “Alerts” on page 78). Important: If you’re traveling, iPod touch may not alert you at the correct local time. To manually set the correct time, see “Date and Time” on page 121. • Notes
To select which calendar to add the event to, tap Calendar. Read-only calendars don’t appear in the list.
76
Edit an event
Tap the event, then tap Edit.
Delete an event
Tap the event, tap Edit, then scroll down and tap Delete Event.
Chapter 7 Calendar
Responding to Meeting Invitations
If you have a Microsoft Exchange account set up on iPod touch with Calendars enabled, you can receive and respond to meeting invitations from people in your organization. When you receive an invitation, the meeting appears in your calendar with a dotted line around it. The icon in the lower-right corner of the screen indicates the total number of new invitations you have, as does the Calendar icon on the Home screen. To receive and respond to meeting invitations, iPod touch must join a Wi-Fi network that is connected to the Internet.
Number of meeting invitations
Respond to an invitation in Calendar: 1 Tap a meeting invitation in the calendar, or tap an invitation.
to display the Event screen and tap
• Tap “Invitation from” to get contact information for the meeting organizer. Tap the
email address to send a message to the organizer.
Chapter 7 Calendar
77
• Tap Attendees to see the other people invited to the meeting. Tap a name to see
an attendee’s contact information. Tap the email address to send a message to the attendee. • Tap Alert to set iPod touch to sound an alert before the meeting. • Tap Add Comments to add comments in the email response to the meeting
organizer. You comments will also appear in your Info screen for the meeting. Notes are made by the meeting organizer.
2 Tap Accept, Maybe, or Decline. When you accept, tentatively accept, or decline the invitation, a response email that includes any comments you added is sent to the organizer. If you accept or tentatively accept the meeting, you can change your response later. Tap Add Comments if you want to change your comments. Exchange meeting invitations are also sent in an email message, which lets you open the meeting’s Info screen from Mail. Open a meeting invitation in an email message: Tap the invitation.
Alerts Set calendar alerts: In Settings, choose General > Sounds, then turn Calendar Alerts on. If Calendar Alerts is off when an event is about to occur, iPod touch displays a message but makes no sound. Sound alerts for invitations: In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendar.” Under Calendars, tap New Invitation Alert to turn it on.
78
Chapter 7 Calendar
Photos
8
About Photos
iPod touch lets you carry photos and videos with you, so you can share them with your family, friends, and associates. You can sync photos and videos (Mac only) from your computer, and use photos as wallpaper. You can also send photos and videos in email messages, and upload photos to MobileMe galleries.
Syncing Photos and Videos with Your Computer
iTunes can sync your photos and videos (Mac only) with the following applications: • Mac: iPhoto 4.0.3 or later, or Aperture • PC: Adobe Photoshop Elements 3.0 or later
See “Syncing with iTunes” on page 9. iPod touch supports H.264 and MPEG-4 video formats, with AAC audio. If you are having trouble syncing a video to iPod touch, you might be able to use iTunes to create an iPod touch version of the video.
Create an iPod touch version of a video: 1 Copy the video to your iTunes library.
2 In iTunes, select Movies in the Library list and select the video you want to sync.
3 Choose Advanced > “Create iPod or iPhone Version.” For additional information, go to support.apple.com/kb/HT1211.
Viewing Photos and Videos
Photos and videos (Mac only) synced from your computer’s photo application or saved from an email message can be viewed in Photos. 79
View photos and videos: 1 In Photos, tap a photo album.
2 Tap a thumbnail to see the photo or video in full screen. Show or hide the controls: Tap the full-screen photo or video to show the controls. Tap again to hide the controls.
Play a video: Tap
in the center of the screen.
To replay a video, tap to show the controls.
at the bottom of the screen. If you don’t see , tap the screen
View a photo or video in landscape orientation: Rotate iPod touch sideways. The photo or video reorients automatically and, if it’s in landscape format, expands to fit the screen.
Zoom in on part of a photo: Double-tap where you want to zoom in. Double-tap again to zoom out. You can also pinch to zoom in or out.
80
Chapter 8 Photos
View video in full screen, or fit video to screen: Double tap the screen to scale the video to fill the screen. Double-tap again to fit the video to the screen. Pan around a photo: Drag the photo. See the next or previous photo or video: Flick left or right. Or tap the screen to show the controls, then tap or .
Slideshows
You can view photo albums as slideshows, complete with background music. View a photo album as a slideshow: Tap an album, then tap . Videos play automatically when they appear during the slideshow. Stop a slideshow: Tap the screen. Set slideshow settings: In Settings, choose Photos and set the following options: • To set the length of time each slide is shown, tap Play Each Slide For and choose a time. • To set transition effects when moving from photo to photo, tap Transition and choose a
transition type. • To set whether slideshows repeat, turn Repeat on or off. • To set whether photos and videos are shown in random order, turn Shuffle on or off.
Play music during a slideshow: In iPod, play a song, then choose Photos from the Home screen and start a slideshow.
Sharing Photos and Videos
You can send photos and videos in email messages, and add photos to MobileMe galleries. You can also copy and paste photos and videos, save photos and videos from email messages to Photos, and save images from webpages to Photos.
Sending a Photo or Video in an Email Message Send a photo: Choose a photo and tap Chapter 8 Photos
, then tap Email Photo. 81
If you don’t see
, tap the screen to show the controls.
Paste a video in an email message: 1 Touch and hold a video until the Copy command appears.
2 Tap Copy.
3 Go to Mail and create a new message.
4 Tap to place an insertion point where you want to place the video, then tap the insertion point to display the edit commands.
5 Tap Paste. If necessary, iPod touch may compress the photo.
Copying and Pasting Photos and Videos You can copy a photo or video from Photos and paste it to an email message. Some third-party applications may also support copying and pasting photos and videos. Copy a photo or video: Hold your finger on the screen until the Copy button appears, then tap Copy. Paste a photo or video: Tap to place an insertion point where you want to place the photo or video, then tap the insertion point and tap Paste.
Adding a Photo to a MobileMe Gallery If you have a MobileMe account, you can add photos directly from iPod touch to a gallery you’ve created. You can also add photos to someone else’s MobileMe gallery if that person has enabled email contributions. Before you can add photos to a gallery in your MobileMe account, you must: • Set up your MobileMe account on iPod touch • Publish a MobileMe gallery, and allow adding photos via email or iPod touch • Join a Wi-Fi network that’s connected to the Internet
For more information about creating a gallery and adding photos to it, see MobileMe Help. Add a photo to your gallery: Choose a photo and tap , then tap “Send to MobileMe.” Enter a title and description, if you like, then select the album to add the photo to and tap Publish. If you don’t see
, tap the screen to show the controls.
iPod touch tells you when the photo has been published, and gives you options to view it on MobileMe or email a link to a friend. Adding a photo to someone else’s gallery: Choose a photo and tap “Email Photo.” Enter the album’s email address, then click Send.
82
Chapter 8 Photos
, then tap
Saving Photos and Videos from Email Messages and Webpages Save a photo in an email message to your Saved Photos album: Tap the photo, then tap Save Image. If the photo hasn’t been downloaded yet, tap the download notice first. Save a video in an email message to your Saved Photos album: Touch and hold the attachment, then tap Save Video. If the video hasn’t been downloaded yet, tap the download notice first. Save a photo on a webpage to your Saved Photos album: Touch and hold the photo, then tap Save Image. You can download the photos and videos in your Saved Photos album to your computer’s photo application by connecting iPod touch to your computer.
Assigning a Photo to a Contact You can assign a photo to a contact.
Assign a photo to a contact: 1 Choose any photo on iPod touch and tap
2 Tap “Assign to Contact” and choose a contact.
3 Position and size the photo until it looks the way you want.
.
Drag the photo to pan, and pinch to zoom in or out.
4 Tap Set Photo. You can also assign a photo to a contact in Contacts by tapping Edit and then tapping the picture icon.
Wallpaper
You see a wallpaper background picture as you unlock iPod touch.
Set a photo as wallpaper: 1 Choose any photo and tap
, then tap Use As Wallpaper.
2 Drag the photo to pan, or pinch the photo to zoom in or out, until it looks the way you want.
3 Tap Set Wallpaper. You can also choose from several wallpaper pictures included with iPod touch by choosing Settings > Wallpaper > Wallpaper from the Home screen.
Chapter 8 Photos
83
Contacts
9
Adding Contacts
You can add contacts to iPod touch in the following ways: • In iTunes, sync contacts from Google or Yahoo!, or sync with applications on your computer (see “Syncing” on page 9) • Set up MobileMe or Microsoft Exchange accounts on iPod touch, with Contacts
enabled (see “Setting Up Accounts” on page 13) • Install a profile that sets up an Exchange account, with Contacts enabled (see
“Installing Configuration Profiles” on page 15) • Set up an LDAP account on iPod touch • Enter contacts directly on iPod touch
The number of contacts you can add is limited only by the amount of memory on iPod touch.
Set up an LDAP account: 1 In Settings, tap “Mail Contacts, Calendars,” then tap Add Account.
2 Tap Other, then tap Add LDAP Account.
3 Enter your LDAP account information and tap Next to verify the account.
4 Tap Save. When you set up an LDAP account, you can view and search for contacts on your company or organization’s LDAP server. The server appears as a new group in Contacts. Since LDAP contacts aren’t downloaded to iPod touch, you must have an Internet connection to view them. Check with your system administrator for specific account settings and other requirements (such as VPN).
84
Searching Contacts
You can search first, last, and company names in your contacts on iPod touch. If you have a Microsoft Exchange account set up on iPod touch, you may also be able to search your enterprise Global Address List (GAL) for contacts in your organization. If you have an LDAP account set up on iPod touch, you can search contacts on your organization’s LDAP server. When you enter search information, contacts with matching information appear immediately as you start to type. Search contacts: In Contacts, tap the search field at the top of any list of contacts and enter a first, last, or company name. (To scroll quickly to the top of the list, tap the status bar.) Search a GAL: Tap Groups, tap Directories at the bottom of the list, then enter a first, last, or company name. You can’t edit GAL contacts or save them to iPod touch. Search an LDAP server: Tap Groups, tap the LDAP server name, then enter a first, last, or company name. You can’t edit LDAP contacts or save them to iPod touch.
Managing Contacts on iPod touch Add a contact on iPod touch: Tap Contacts and tap . Delete a contact
In Contacts, choose a contact, than tap Edit. Scroll down and tap Delete Contact.
Add a contact from the keypad
. Tap Tap Keypad, enter a number, then tap Create New Contact and enter information, or tap “Add to Existing Contact” and choose a contact.
Edit contact information
In Contacts, choose a contact, then tap Edit. To add an item, tap . To delete an item, tap .
Enter a pause in a number
Tap , then tap Pause. Pauses appear as commas when the number is saved.
Assign a photo to a contact: 1 Tap Contacts and choose a contact.
2 Tap Edit and tap Add Photo, or tap the existing photo.
3 Tap Choose Photo and choose a photo.
4 Drag and scale the photo as desired.
5 Tap Set Photo.
Chapter 9 Contacts
85
YouTube
10
Finding and Viewing Videos
YouTube features short videos submitted by people from around the world. To use some features on iPod touch, you need to sign in to a YouTube account when prompted. For information about requirements and how to get a YouTube account, go to www.youtube.com. Note: YouTube isn’t available in all languages and locations. To use YouTube, iPod touch must join a Wi-Fi network that is connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 35. Browse videos: Tap Featured, Most Viewed, or Favorites. Or tap More to browse by Most Recent, Top Rated, History, Subscriptions, or Playlists. • Featured: Videos reviewed and featured by YouTube staff. • Most Viewed: Videos most seen by YouTube viewers. Tap All for all-time most viewed
videos, or Today or This Week for most-viewed videos of the day or week. • Favorites: Videos you’ve added to Favorites. When you sign in to a YouTube account,
account favorites appear and any existing favorites can be synced to your account. • Most Recent: Videos most recently submitted to YouTube. • Top Rated: Videos most highly rated by YouTube viewers. To rate videos, go to
www.youtube.com. • History: Videos you’ve viewed most recently. • Subscriptions: Videos from YouTube accounts to which you’ve subscribed. You must
be signed in to a YouTube account to use this feature. • Playlists: Videos you’ve added to playlists. You must be signed in to a YouTube
account to use this feature.
86
Search for a video: 1 Tap Search, then tap the YouTube search field.
2 Type a word or phrase that describes what you’re looking for, then tap Search. YouTube shows results based on video titles, descriptions, tags, and user names. Listed videos show title, rating, number of views, length, and the account name that posted the video. Play a video: Tap the video. The video begins to download to iPod touch and a progress bar appears. When enough of the video has downloaded, it begins to play. You can also tap to start the video.
Controlling Video Playback
When a video starts playing, the controls disappear so they don’t obscure the video. Show or hide the video controls: Tap the screen. Playhead
Download progress
Scrubber bar Scale Play/Pause Next/ Fast-forward Email Volume
Bookmark
Previous/rewind
Play or pause a video
Tap or . You can also press the center button on the iPod touch headset (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset.
Adjust the volume
Drag the volume slider, or use the volume buttons on the side of iPod touch. You can also use the volume buttons on the iPod touch headset (only on Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more).
Start a video over
Tap
Skip to the next or previous video in a list
Tap Tap
Chapter 10 YouTube
. twice to skip to the previous video. to skip to the next video.
87
Rewind or fast-forward
Touch and hold
or
.
Skip to any point in a video
Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar.
Stop watching a video before it finishes playing Tap Done, or press the Home
button.
Toggle between scaling a video to fill the screen Double-tap the video. You can also tap or fit to the screen make the video fill the screen, or tap it fit the screen. Add a video to Favorites using video controls
Start playing a video and tap
.
Email a link to the video using video controls
Start playing a video and tap
.
to to make
Managing Videos Tap
88
next to a video to see related videos and more controls for managing videos.
Add the video to Favorites
Tap “Add to Favorites.”
Add the video to a playlist
Tap “Add to Playlist,” then select an existing playlist or tap to create a new playlist.
Email a link to the video
Tap Share Video.
Browse and view related videos
Tap a video in the list of related videos to view, next to a video for more information. or tap
Chapter 10 YouTube
Getting More Information
Tap next to the video to show the video’s comments, description, date added, and other information.
Rate the video or add a comment
On the More Info screen, tap “Rate, Comment, or Flag,” then choose “Rate or Comment.” You must be signed in to a YouTube account to use this feature.
See more videos from this account
On the More Info screen, tap More Videos.
Subscribe to this YouTube account
On the More Info screen, tap More Videos, then tap “Subscribe to” at the bottom of the video list. You must be signed in to a YouTube account to use this feature.
Using YouTube Account Features
If you have a YouTube account, you can access account features such as subscriptions, comments and ratings, and playlists. To create a YouTube account, go to www.youtube.com. Show favorites you’ve added to your account: In Favorites, tap Sign In, then enter your username and password to see your account favorites. Any existing favorites you’ve added to iPod touch can be merged with your account favorites when you sign in. Delete a favorite: In Favorites, tap Edit, tap
next to a video, then tap Delete.
Show subscriptions you’ve added to your account: In Subscriptions, tap Sign In, then enter your username and password to see your account subscriptions. Tap an account in the list to see all videos for that account.
Chapter 10 YouTube
89
Unsubscribe from a YouTube account: In Subscriptions, tap an account in the list, then tap Unsubscribe. View playlists: In Playlists, tap a playlist to see the list of videos you’ve added. Tap any video in the playlist to begin playing videos from that point in the playlist. Edit a playlist: In Playlists, tap Edit, then do one of the following: • To delete the entire playlist, tap • To create a new playlist, tap
Add a video to a playlist: Tap a playlist.
next to a playlist, then tap Delete.
, then enter a name for the playlist. next to a video, then tap “Add to Playlist” and choose
Delete a video from a playlist: 1 In Playlists, tap a playlist, then tap Edit.
2 Tap
next to a playlist, then tap Delete.
Changing the Browse Buttons
You can replace the Featured, Most Viewed, Bookmarks, and Search buttons at the bottom of the screen with ones you use more frequently. For example, if you watch top rated videos often but don’t watch many featured videos, you could replace the Featured button with Top Rated. Change the browse buttons: Tap More and tap Edit, then drag a button to the bottom of the screen, over the button you want to replace.
You can drag the buttons at the bottom of the screen left or right to rearrange them. When you finish, tap Done. When you’re browsing for videos, tap More to access the browse buttons that aren’t visible. 90
Chapter 10 YouTube
Stocks
11
Viewing Stock Quotes
Stocks lets you see the latest available quotes for your selected stocks, funds, and indexes. To use Stocks, iPod touch must join a Wi-Fi network that is connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 35. Quotes are updated every time you open Stocks when connected to the Internet. Quotes may be delayed by up to 20 minutes or more depending upon the reporting service.
Add a stock, fund, or index to the stock reader: 1 Tap , then tap .
2 Enter a symbol, company name, fund name, or index, then tap Search.
3 Select an item from the search results and tap Done. View charts in landscape orientation: Rotate iPod touch sideways. Flick left or right to view the other charts in your stock reader. Show the progress of a stock, fund, or index over time: Tap the stock, fund, or index in your list, then tap 1d, 1w, 1m, 3m, 6m, 1y, or 2y. The chart adjusts to show progress over one day, one week, one month, three months, six months, one year, or two years.
91
When you’re viewing a chart in landscape orientation, you can touch the chart to display the value for a specific point in time.
Use two fingers to see the change in value over a specific period of time.
Delete a stock: Tap
and tap
Change the order of the list: Tap place in the list.
next to a stock, then tap Delete. . Then drag
next to a stock or index to a new
Switch the display to percentage change, price change, or market capitalization: Tap any of the values along the right side of the screen. Tap again to switch to another view. Or tap and tap %, Price, or Mkt Cap, then tap Done.
Getting More Information See the summary, chart, or news page about a stock, fund, or index: Select the stock, fund, or index in your list, then flick the pages underneath the stock reader to view the summary, chart, or recent news page. On the news page, you can scroll up and down to read headlines, or tap a headline to view the article in Safari. See more information at Yahoo.com: Select the stock, fund, or index in your list, then tap .
92
Chapter 11 Stocks
Maps
12
Finding and Viewing Locations WARNING: For important information about driving and navigating safely, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/ipodtouch. Maps provides street maps, satellite photos, a hybrid view, and street views of locations in many of the world’s countries. You can get detailed driving, public transit, or walking directions and traffic information. Find your current (approximate) location, and use your current location to get driving directions to or from another place. To use Maps, iPod touch must join a Wi-Fi network that is connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 35. Important: Maps, directions, and location-based applications provided by Apple depend on data collected and services provided by third parties. These data services are subject to change and may not be available in all geographic areas, resulting in maps, directions, or location-based information that may be unavailable, inaccurate, or incomplete. Compare the information provided on iPod touch to your surroundings and defer to posted signs to resolve any discrepancies. In order to provide your location, data is collected in a form that doesn’t personally identify you. If you don’t want such data collected, don’t use the feature. Not using this feature won’t impact the non–location-based functionality of your iPod touch.
Find a location and see a map: 1 Tap the search field to bring up the keyboard.
2 Type an address, intersection, area, landmark, bookmark, contact, or zip code.
3 Tap Search.
93
A pin marks the location. Tap the pin to see the name or description of the location.
Tap to get information about the location, get directions, add the location to your bookmarks or contacts list, or email a link to Google Maps.
Locations can include places of interest added by Google My Maps users (“Usercreated content”), and sponsored links that appear as special icons (for example, Zoom in to a part of a map
Pinch the map with two fingers. Or double-tap the part you want to zoom in on. Double-tap again to zoom in even closer.
Zoom out
Pinch the map. Or tap the map with two fingers. Tap with two fingers again to zoom out further.
Pan or scroll to another part of the map
Drag up, down, left, or right.
Find your current location: Tap
94
).
Chapter 12 Maps
.
Your current (approximate) location is indicated by a blue marker. If your location can’t be determined precisely, a blue circle also appears around the marker. The size of the circle depends on how precisely your location can be determined—the smaller the circle, the greater the precision. If you drag the map and tap approximate location.
again, iPod touch centers the map back to your
iPod touch uses Location Services to determine your location. Location Services uses available information from local Wi-Fi networks (if you have Wi-Fi turned on). This feature isn’t available in all areas. If Location Services is turned off, you’ll be prompted to turn it on. You can’t find your current location if Location Services is turned off. See “Location Services” on page 118. To conserve battery life, turn Location Services off when you’re not using it. In Settings, choose General > Location Services. Get information about your current location: Tap the blue marker, then tap . iPod touch displays the address of your current location, if available. You can use this information to: • Get directions • Add the location to contacts • Send the address via email • Bookmark the location
Use the dropped pin: Tap
, then tap Drop Pin.
A pin drops down on the map, which you can then drag to any location you choose.
Replace the pin: Tap , then tap Replace Pin. iPod touch drops the pin in the area you’re currently viewing.
Chapter 12 Maps
95
See a satellite or hybrid view: Tap , then tap Satellite or Hybrid to see just a satellite view or a combined street map and satellite view.
To return to map view, tap Map. See the Google Street View of a location: Tap . Flick left or right to pan through the 360° panoramic view. (The inset shows your current view.) Tap an arrow to move down the street.
Tap to return to map view
To return to map view, tap the map inset in the lower-right corner. Street View isn’t available in all areas.
96
Chapter 12 Maps
See the location of someone’s address in your contacts list
in the search field, then tap Contacts Tap and choose a contact. To locate an address in this way, the contact must include at least one address. If the contact has more than one address, choose the one you want to locate. You can also find the location of an address by tapping the address directly in Contacts.
Add a location to your contacts list
Find a location, tap the pin that points to it, tap next to the name or description, tap “Add to Contacts,” then tap “Create New Contact” or “Add to Existing Contact.”
Email a link to a Google Maps location
Find a location, tap the pin that points to it, tap next to the name or description, then tap Share Location and tap Email.
Bookmarking Locations
You can bookmark locations that you want to find again later. Bookmark a location: Find a location, tap the pin that points to it, tap next to the name or description, then tap “Add to Bookmarks” at the bottom of the Info screen. See a bookmarked location or recently viewed location: Tap then tap Bookmarks or Recents.
in the search field,
Getting Directions
You can get step-by-step directions for driving, taking public transit, or walking to a destination.
Get directions: 1 Tap Directions. 2 Enter starting and ending locations in the Start and End fields. By default, iPod touch starts with your current approximate location (if available). Tap in either field to choose a location in Bookmarks (including your current approximate location and the dropped pin, if available), Recents, or Contacts. For example, if a friend’s address is in your contacts list, you can tap Contacts and tap your friend’s name instead of having to type the address. To reverse the directions, tap
.
3 Tap Route (if you entered locations manually), then select driving ( ), public transit ( ), or walking ( ) directions. The travel options available depend on the route.
Chapter 12 Maps
97
4 Do one of the following: • To view directions one step at a time, tap Start, then tap
trip. Tap
to see the next leg of the
to go back.
• To view all the directions in a list, tap
, then tap List. Tap any item in the list to see a map showing that leg of the trip. Tap Route Overview to return to the overview screen.
If you’re driving or walking, the approximate distance and travel time appear at the top of the screen. If traffic data is available, the driving time is adjusted accordingly. If you’re taking public transit, the overview screen shows each leg of the trip and the mode of transportation, including where you need to walk. The top of the screen shows the time of the bus or train at the first stop, the estimated arrival time, and the total fare. Tap to set your departure or arrival time, and to choose a schedule for the trip. Tap the icon at a stop to see the departure time for that bus or train, and to get a link to the transit provider’s website or contact info. When you tap Start and step through the route, detailed information about each leg of the trip appears at the top of the screen. You can also get directions by finding a location on the map, tapping the pin that points to it, tapping , then tapping Directions To Here or Directions From Here. Switch start and end points, for reverse directions: Tap If you don’t see
, tap List, then tap Edit.
See recently viewed directions: Tap
98
Chapter 12 Maps
.
in the search field, then tap Recents.
Showing Traffic Conditions
When available, you can show highway traffic conditions on the map. Show or hide traffic conditions: Tap
, then tap Show Traffic or Hide Traffic.
Highways are color-coded according to the flow of traffic:
Red = less than 25 miles per hour Gray = no data currently available Yellow = 25–50 miles per hour Green = more than 50 miles per hour
If you don’t see color-coded highways, you may need to zoom out to a level where you can see major roads, or traffic conditions may not be available for that area.
Finding and Contacting Businesses
Find businesses in an area: 1 Find a location—for example, a city and state or country, or a street address—or scroll to a location on a map.
2 Type the kind of business in the text field and tap Search. Pins appear for matching locations. For example, if you locate your city and then type “movies” and tap Search, pins mark movie theatres in your city. Tap the pin that marks a business to see its name or description. Find businesses without finding the location first: Type things like: • restaurants san francisco ca • apple inc new york
Chapter 12 Maps
99
Contact a business or get directions: Tap the pin that marks a business, then tap next to the name. From there, you can do the following: • Tap an email address to send email to, or a web address to visit. • For directions, tap Directions To Here or Directions From Here. • To add the business to your contacts list, scroll down and tap “Create New Contact”
or “Add to Existing Contact.” • Share the location of the business by email
See a list of the businesses found in the search: From the Map screen, tap List. Tap a business to see its location. Or tap
next to a business to see its information.
Visit website Get directions Tap
100
to show contact info
Chapter 12 Maps
13
Weather
Viewing Weather Summaries
Tap Weather from the Home screen to get the current temperature and six-day forecast for one or more cities around the world. To use Weather, iPod touch must join a Wi-Fi network that is connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 35. Today’s high and low
Current conditions Current temperature
Six-day forecast
Add and delete cities
Number of cities stored
If the weather board is light blue, it’s daytime in that city—between 6:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. If the board is dark purple, it’s nighttime—between 6:00 p.m. and 6:00 a.m.
101
Add a city: 1 Tap , then tap .
2 Enter a city name or zip code, then tap Search.
3 Choose a city in the search list. Switch to another city: Flick left or right, or tap to the left or right of the row of dots. The number of dots below the weather board shows how many cities are stored. Reorder cities: Tap
, then drag
Delete a city: Tap
and tap
next to a city to a new place in the list. next to a city, then tap Delete.
Display temperature in Fahrenheit or Celsius: Tap
, then tap °F or °C.
Getting More Weather Information
You can see a more detailed weather report, news and websites related to the city, and more. See information about a city at Yahoo.com: Tap
102
Chapter 13 Weather
.
14
Voice Memos
Recording Voice Memos
Voice Memos lets you use iPod touch as a portable recording device (not available on first-generation iPod touch). Important: To use Voice Memos on iPod touch, you must connect the Apple Earphones with Remote and Mic (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) or a compatible accessory with microphone (such as Apple-branded earbuds or authorized third-party accessories marked with the Apple “Made for iPod” logo). You can adjust the recording level by moving the microphone closer to or further away from what you’re recording. For better recording quality, the loudest level on the level meter should be between –3dB and 0 dB.
Audio level meter
Go to voice memos
Record button
103
Record a voice memo: 1 Tap to start recording. You can also press the center button on a compatible threebutton headset with mic. 2 Tap to pause or to stop recording. You can also press the center button on a compatible three-button headset with mic to stop recording. You can record in either mono or stereo depending upon the external microphone you use. When you start a voice recording, iPod touch makes a shutter sound. To use other applications while recording your voice memo, you can lock iPod touch or press the Home button. Play back a voice memo you just recorded: Tap .
Listening to Voice Memos
Playhead Scrubber bar
Play a voice memo you’ve previously recorded: 1 Tap . Memos are listed in chronological order, with the most recent memo first.
2 Tap a memo, then tap . Tap to pause, then tap
again to resume playback.
Skip to any point in a memo: Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Listen through the built-in speaker: Tap Speaker.
Managing Voice Memos Delete a voice memo: Tap a memo in the list, then tap Delete.
104
Chapter 14 Voice Memos
See more information: Tap next to the memo. The Info screen displays information about the length, recording time and date, and provides additional editing and sharing functions.
Add a label to a memo: On the Info screen tap , then select a label in the list on the Label screen. To create a custom label, choose Custom at the bottom of the list, then type a name for the label.
Trimming Voice Memos
You can trim the beginning or ending of a voice memo to eliminate unwanted pauses or noise.
Trim a voice memo: 1 On the Voice Memos screen, tap
2 Tap Trim Memo.
3 Using the time markers as a guide, drag the edges of the audio region to adjust the beginning and end of the voice memo. To preview your edit, tap .
Chapter 14 Voice Memos
next to the memo you want to trim.
105
4 Tap Trim Voice Memo. Important: Edits you make to voice memos can’t be undone.
Sharing Voice Memos
You can share your voice memos as attachments in email messages.
Share a voice memo: 1 On the Voice Memos screen or Info screen, tap Share.
2 Choose Email Voice Memo to open a new message in Mail with the memo attached. A message appears if the file you’re trying to send is too large.
Syncing Voice Memos
iTunes automatically syncs voice memos to your iTunes library when you connect iPod touch to your computer. This lets you listen to voice memos on your computer and provides a backup if you delete them from iPod touch. Voice memos are synced to the Voice Memos playlist. iTunes creates the playlist if it doesn’t exist. When you sync voice memos to iTunes, they remain in the Voice Memos application until you delete them. If you delete a voice memo on iPod touch, it isn’t deleted from the Voice Memos playlist in iTunes. However, if you delete a voice memo from iTunes, it is deleted from iPod touch the next time you sync with iTunes. You can sync the iTunes Voice Memos playlist to the Music application on iPod touch using the Music pane in iTunes.
106
Sync the Voice Memos playlist to iPod touch: 1 Connect iPod touch to your computer.
2 In iTunes, select iPod touch in the sidebar.
3 Select the Music tab.
4 Select the “Include voice memos” checkbox and click Apply.
Chapter 14 Voice Memos
15
Notes
Writing and Reading Notes
Notes are listed in the order of the last modified date, with the most recently modified note at the top. You can see the first few words of each note in the list. Rotate iPod touch to view notes in landscape orientation and type using a larger keyboard. Add a note: Tap , then type your note and tap Done. Read a note: Tap the note. Tap
or
to see the next or previous note.
Edit a note: Tap anywhere on the note to bring up the keyboard. Delete a note: Tap the note, then tap .
Searching Notes
You can search the text of notes.
107
Search for notes: 1 Drag the note list down or tap the status bar to expose the search window.
2 Enter text in the search field. Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more of the results.
Emailing Notes Email a note: Tap the note, then tap . To email a note, iPod touch must be set up for email. See “Setting Up Email Accounts” on page 66.
Syncing Notes
You can set up iTunes to automatically sync your notes with email applications such as Mac OS X Mail (requires Mac OS X version 10.5.7 or later) or Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC. See “Syncing with iTunes” on page 9.
108
Chapter 15 Notes
16
Clock
World Clocks
You can add clocks to show the time in other major cities and time zones around the world. View clocks: Tap World Clock. If the clock face is white, it’s daytime in that city. If the clock face is black, it’s nighttime. If you have more than four clocks, flick to scroll through them.
Add a clock: 1 Tap World Clock.
2 Tap , then type the name of a city. Cities matching what you’ve typed appear below.
3 Tap a city to add a clock for that city. If you don’t see the city you’re looking for, try a major city in the same time zone. Delete a clock: Tap World Clock and tap Edit. Then tap Delete.
next to a clock and tap
Rearrange clocks: Tap World Clock and tap Edit. Then drag place in the list.
next to a clock to a new
109
Alarms
You can set multiple alarms. Set each alarm to repeat on days you specify, or to sound only once.
Set an alarm: 1 Tap Alarm and tap .
2 Adjust any of the following settings: • To set the alarm to repeat on certain days, tap Repeat and choose the days. • To choose the ringtone that sounds when the alarm goes off, tap Sound. • To set whether the alarm gives you the option to hit snooze, turn Snooze on or off.
If Snooze is on and you tap Snooze when the alarm sounds, the alarm stops and then sounds again in ten minutes. • To give the alarm a description, tap Label. iPod touch displays the label when the
alarm sounds. If at least one alarm is set and turned on, top of the screen.
appears in the iPod touch status bar at the
Turn an alarm on or off: Tap Alarm and turn any alarm on or off. If an alarm is turned off, it won’t sound again unless you turn it back on. If an alarm is set to sound only once, it turns off automatically after it sounds. You can turn it on again to reenable it. Change settings for an alarm: Tap Alarm and tap Edit, then tap you want to change. Delete an alarm: Tap Alarm and tap Edit, then tap Delete.
next to the alarm
next to the alarm and tap
Stopwatch
Use the stopwatch to time an event: 1 Tap Stopwatch.
2 Tap Start to start the stopwatch. • To record lap times, tap Lap after each lap. • To pause the stopwatch, tap Stop. Tap Start to resume. • To reset the stopwatch, tap Reset when the stopwatch is pause.
If you start the stopwatch and go to another iPod touch application, the stopwatch continues running in the background.
110
Chapter 16 Clock
Timer Set the timer: Tap Timer, then flick to set the number of hours and minutes. Tap Start to start the timer. Choose the sound: Tap When Timer Ends. Set a sleep timer: Set the timer, then tap When Timer Ends and choose Sleep iPod. When you set a sleep timer, iPod touch stops playing music or video when the timer ends. If you start the timer and then switch to another iPod touch application, the timer continues running.
Chapter 16 Clock
111
Calculator
17
Using the Calculator
Tap numbers and functions in Calculator just as you would with a standard calculator. When you tap the add, subtract, multiply, or divide button, a white ring appears around the button to let you know the operation to be carried out. Rotate iPod touch to get an expanded scientific calculator.
Standard Memory Functions • C: Tap to clear the displayed number. • MC: Tap to clear the memory. • M+: Tap to add the displayed number to the number in memory. If no number is in
memory, tap to store the displayed number in memory. • M-: Tap to subtract the displayed number from the number in memory. • MR: Tap to replace the displayed number with the number in memory. If the button
has a white ring around it, there is a number stored in memory. The stored number remains in memory when you switch between the standard and scientific calculators.
112
Scientific Calculator Keys
Rotate iPod touch to landscape orientation to display the scientific calculator.
2nd
Changes the trigonometric buttons (sin, cos, tan, sinh, cosh, and tanh) to their inverse functions (sin-1, cos-1, tan-1, sinh-1, cosh-1, and tanh-1). It also changes ln to log2, and ex to 2x. Tap 2nd again to return the buttons to their original functions.
(
Opens a parenthetical expression. Expressions can be nested.
)
Closes a parenthetical expression.
%
Calculates percentages, adds markups, and subtracts discounts. To calculate a percentage, use it with the multiplication (x) key. For example, to calculate 8% of 500, enter 500 x 8 % = which returns 40. To add a markup or subtract a discount, use it with the plus (+) or minus (–) key. For example, to compute the total cost of a $500 item with an 8% sales tax, enter 500 + 8 % = which returns 540.
1/x
Returns the reciprocal of a value in decimal format.
x2
Squares a value.
x3
Cubes a value.
yx
Tap between values to raise the first value to the power of the second value. For example, to compute 34, enter 3 yx 4 = which returns 81.
x!
Calculates the factorial of a value.
√
Calculates the square root of a value.
x
Use between values to calculate the x root of y. For example to compute 4√81, enter 81 x√y 4 = which returns 3.
√y
Chapter 17 Calculator
113
log
Returns the log base 10 of a value.
sin
Calculates the sine of a value.
sin-1
Calculates the arc sine of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.)
cos
Calculates the cosine of a value.
cos
Calculates the arc cosine of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.)
tan
Calculates the tangent of a value.
tan-1
Calculates the arc tangent of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.)
ln
Calculates the natural log of a value.
log2
Calculates the log base 2. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.)
sinh
Calculates the hyperbolic sine of a value.
sinh
Calculates the inverse hyperbolic sine of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.)
-1
-1
cosh
Calculates the hyperbolic cosine of a value.
cosh
Calculates the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.)
-1
tanh
Calculates the hyperbolic tangent of a value.
tanh
Calculates the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.)
ex
Tap after entering a value to raise the constant “e” (2.718281828459045...) to the power of that value.
2x
Calculates 2 to the power of the displayed value. For example, 10 2x = 1024. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.)
Rad
Changes the mode to express trigonometric functions in radians.
Deg
Changes the mode to express trigonometric functions in degrees.
π
Enters the value of π (3.141592653589793...).
EE
An operator that multiplies the currently displayed value by 10 to the power of the next value you enter.
Rand
Returns a random number between 0 and 1.
-1
114
Chapter 17 Calculator
Settings
18
Settings allows you to customize iPod touch applications, set the date and time, configure your network connection, and enter other preferences for iPod touch.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi settings determine whether iPod touch uses local Wi-Fi networks to connect to the Internet. Turn Wi-Fi on or off: Choose Wi-Fi and turn Wi-Fi on or off. Join a Wi-Fi network: Choose Wi-Fi, wait a moment as iPod touch detects networks in range, then select a network. If necessary, enter a password and tap Join. (Networks that require a password appear with a lock icon.) Once you’ve joined a Wi-Fi network manually, iPod touch automatically joins it whenever the network is in range. If more than one previously used network is in range, iPod touch joins the one last used. When iPod touch is joined to a Wi-Fi network, the Wi-Fi icon in the status bar at the top of the screen shows signal strength. The more bars you see, the stronger the signal. Set iPod touch to ask if you want to join a new network: Choose Wi-Fi and turn “Ask to Join Networks” on or off. When you’re trying to access the Internet, by using Safari or Mail for example, and you aren’t in range of a Wi-Fi network you‘ve previously used, this option tells iPod touch to look for another network. iPod touch displays a list of all available Wi-Fi networks that you can choose from. (Networks that require a password appear with a lock icon.) If “Ask to Join Networks” is turned off, you must manually join a network to connect to the Internet when a previously used network isn’t available. Forget a network, so iPod touch doesn’t join it automatically: Choose Wi-Fi and tap next to a network you’ve joined before. Then tap “Forget this Network.”
115
Join a closed Wi-Fi network: To join a Wi-Fi network that isn’t shown in the list of scanned networks, choose Wi-Fi > Other, then enter the network name. If the network requires a password, tap Security, tap the type of security the network uses, and enter the password. You must already know the network name, password, and security type to connect to a closed network. Some Wi-Fi networks may require you to enter or adjust additional settings, such as a client ID or static IP address. Ask the network administrator which settings to use. Adjust settings to connect to a Wi-Fi network: Choose Wi-Fi, then tap network.
next to a
VPN
This setting appears when you have VPN configured on iPod touch, allowing you to turn VPN on or off. See “Network” on page 117.
Notifications
This setting appears when you’ve installed an application from the App Store that uses the Apple Push Notification service. Push notifications are used by applications to alert you of new information, even when the application isn’t running. Notifications differ depending upon the application, but may include text or sound alerts, and a numbered badge on the application’s icon on the Home screen. You can turn notifications off if you don’t want to be notified or want to conserve battery life. Turn all notifications on or off: Tap Notifications and turn notifications on or off. Turn sounds, alerts, or badges on or off for an application: Tap Notifications, then choose an application from the list and choose the types of notification you want to turn on or off.
Brightness
Screen brightness affects battery life. Dim the screen to extend the time before you need to recharge iPod touch, or use Auto-Brightness. Adjust the screen brightness: Choose Brightness and drag the slider. Set whether iPod touch adjusts screen brightness automatically: Choose Brightness and turn Auto-Brightness on or off. If Auto-Brightness is on, iPod touch adjusts the screen brightness for current light conditions using the built-in ambient light sensor.
116
Chapter 18 Settings
General
The General settings include date and time, security, network, and other settings that affect more than one application. This is also where you can find information about your iPod touch, and reset iPod touch to its original state.
About Choose General > About to get information about iPod touch, including: • Number of songs, videos, and photos • Total storage capacity • Space available • Software version • Serial and model numbers • Wi-Fi and Bluetooth addresses • Legal information • Regulatory information
Wallpaper You see a wallpaper background picture when you unlock iPod touch. You can select one of the images that came with iPod touch, or use a photo you’ve synced to iPod touch from your computer. Set wallpaper: Choose Wallpaper and choose a picture.
Sounds Adjust alerts volume: Choose General > Sounds and drag the slider. Or, if no song or video is playing use the volume buttons on the side of iPod touch. Note: On the first-generation iPod touch, choose General > Sounds and select whether you want sound effects to play over the internal speaker, through the headphones, or both. Set alert and effects sounds: Choose General > Sounds and turn items on or off. You can set iPod touch to play a sound whenever you: • Get an email message • Send an email message • Have an appointment that you’ve set up to alert you • Lock iPod touch • Type using the keyboard
Network Use the Network settings to configure a VPN (virtual private network) connection, or access Wi-Fi settings.
Chapter 18 Settings
117
Add a new VPN configuration: Choose General > Network > VPN > Add VPN Configuration. VPNs used within organizations allow you to communicate private information securely over a non-private network. You may need to configure VPN, for example, to access your work email on iPod touch. iPod touch can connect to VPNs that use the L2TP, PPTP, or Cisco IPSec protocols. Ask your network administrator which settings to use. In most cases, if you’ve set up VPN on your computer, you can use the same VPN settings for iPod touch. Once you’ve entered VPN settings, a VPN switch appears in the Settings menu that you can use to turn VPN on or off. VPN may also be automatically set up by a configuration profile. See “Installing Configuration Profiles” on page 15. Change a VPN configuration: Choose General > Network > VPN and tap the configuration you want to update. Turn VPN on or off: Tap Settings and turn VPN on or off. Delete a VPN configuration: Choose General > Network > VPN, tap the blue arrow to the right of the configuration name, and tap Delete VPN at the bottom of the configuration screen.
Bluetooth iPod touch can connect wirelessly to Bluetooth headphone devices for music listening (not available on first-generation iPod touch). See “Bluetooth Headphones” on page 34. Turn Bluetooth on or off: Choose General > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth on or off.
Location Services Location Services allows applications such as Maps to gather and use data indicating your location. Location Services doesn’t correlate the data it collects with your personally identifiable information. Your approximate location is determined using available information from local Wi-Fi networks (if you have Wi-Fi turned on). You can turn Location Services off if you don’t want to use this feature. If you turn Location Services off, you’ll be prompted to turn it on again the next time an application tries to use this feature. Turn Location Services on or off: Choose General > Location Services and turn location services on or off. To conserve battery life, turn Location Services off when you’re not using it.
Auto-Lock Locking iPod touch turns off the display to save your battery and to prevent unintended operation of iPod touch.
118
Chapter 18 Settings
Set the amount of time before iPod touch locks: Choose General > Auto-Lock and choose a time.
Passcode Lock By default, iPod touch doesn’t require you to enter a passcode to unlock it. Set a passcode: Choose General > Passcode Lock and enter a 4-digit passcode, then enter the passcode again to verify it. iPod touch then requires you to enter the passcode to unlock it or to display the passcode lock settings. Turn passcode lock off: Choose General > Passcode Lock, enter your passcode, and tap Turn Passcode Off, then enter your passcode again. Change the passcode: Choose General > Passcode Lock, enter your passcode, and tap Change Passcode. Enter your passcode again, then enter and reenter your new passcode. If you forget your passcode, you must restore the iPod touch software. See “Updating and Restoring iPod touch Software” on page 158. Set how long before your passcode is required: Choose General > Passcode Lock and enter your passcode. Tap Require Passcode, then select how long iPod touch can be idle before you need to enter a passcode to unlock it. Erase data after ten failed passcode attempts: Choose General > Passcode Lock, enter your passcode, and tap Erase Data to turn it on. After ten failed passcode attempts, your settings are reset to their defaults and all your information and media is erased: • On Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more: by removing the encryption key to the data
(which is encrypted using 256-bit AES encryption) • On Fall 2009 models with less than 32 GB, and models prior to Fall 2009: by overwriting
the data Important: You can’t use iPod touch while data is being overwritten. This can take up to four hours or more, depending on the model and storage capacity of your iPod touch. (On Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more, the removal of the encryption key is immediate.)
Restrictions You can set restrictions for the use of some applications and for iPod content on iPod touch. For example, parents can restrict explicit music from being seen on playlists, or turn off YouTube access entirely.
Turn on restrictions: 1 Choose General > Restrictions, then tap Enable Restrictions.
2 Enter a four-digit passcode.
3 Reenter the passcode.
Chapter 18 Settings
119
Turn off restrictions: Choose General > Restrictions, then enter the passcode. Tap Disable Restrictions, then reenter the passcode. If you forget your passcode, you must restore your iPod touch software from iTunes. See “Updating and Restoring iPod touch Software” on page 158. Set application restrictions: Set the restrictions you want by tapping individual controls on or off. By default, all controls are on (not restricted). Tap an item to turn it off and restrict its use. Safari is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. You cannot use Safari to browse the web or access web clips. Other third-party applications may allow web browsing even if Safari is disabled. YouTube is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. The iTunes Store is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. You cannot preview, purchase, or download content. The App Store is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. You cannot install applications on iPod touch. Location data isn’t provided to applications.
Restrict purchases within applications: Turn In-App Purchases off. When enabled, this feature allows you to purchase additional content or features within applications downloaded from the App Store. Set content restrictions: Tap Ratings For, then select a country from the list. You can then set restrictions using that country’s ratings system for the following categories of content: • Music & Podcasts • Movies • TV Shows • Apps
In the United States for example, to allow only movies rated PG or below, tap Movies, then select PG from the list. Note: Not all countries have rating systems.
Home Choose General > Home to set preferences for double-clicking the Home button and searching categories on the Spotlight page. You can set iPod touch so that doubleclicking the Home button goes to the Home screen, Search, or iPod.
120
Chapter 18 Settings
Set whether double-clicking the Home button shows iPod controls: Turn on iPod Controls to display iPod controls when you’re playing music and double-click the Home button. This feature works even when the display is turned off or iPod touch is locked. Set what categories appear in search results: Tap Search Results. All search categories in the list are selected by default. Tap an item to deselect it. Set the order of search result categories: Tap Search Results, then drag search category to a new place in the list.
next to a
Date and Time These settings apply to the time shown in the status bar at the top of the screen, and in world clocks and calendars. Set whether iPod touch shows 24-hour time or 12-hour time: Choose General > Date & Time and turn 24-Hour Time on or off. (Not available in all countries.) Set the date and time: Choose General > Date & Time. Tap Time Zone and enter the name of a major city in your time zone. Tap the “Date & Time” return button, then tap “Set Date & Time” and enter the date and time.
Keyboard Turn Auto-Correction on or off: Choose General > Keyboard and turn Auto-Correction on or off. By default, if the default keyboard for the language you select has a dictionary, iPod touch automatically suggests corrections or completed words as you type. Turn Auto-Capitalization on or off: Choose General > Keyboard and turn AutoCapitalization on or off. By default, iPod touch automatically capitalizes words after you type sentence-ending punctuation or a return character. Set whether caps lock is enabled: Choose General > Keyboard and turn Enable Caps Lock on or off. If caps lock is enabled and you double-tap the Shift key on the keyboard, all letters you type are uppercase. The Shift key turns blue when caps lock is on. Turn the “.” shortcut on or off: Choose General > Keyboard and turn “.” Shortcut on or off. The “.” shortcut lets you double-tap the space bar to enter a period followed by a space when you’re typing. It’s on by default. Turn international keyboards on or off: Choose General > Keyboards > International Keyboards and turn on the keyboards you want. If more than one keyboard is turned on, tap to switch keyboards when you’re typing. When you tap the symbol, the name of the newly active keyboard appears briefly. See “International Keyboards” on page 30.
Chapter 18 Settings
121
International Use International settings to set the language for iPod touch, turn keyboards for different languages on or off, and set the date, time, and telephone number formats for your region. Set the language for iPod touch: Choose General > International > Language, choose the language you want to use, then tap Done. Set the Voice Control language for iPod touch: Choose General > International > Voice Control, then choose the language you want to use (available only on Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more). Turn international keyboards on or off: Choose General > International > Keyboards, and turn on the keyboards you want. If more than one keyboard is turned on, tap to switch keyboards when you’re typing. When you tap the symbol, the name of the newly active keyboard appears briefly. See “International Keyboards” on page 30. Set date, time, and telephone number formats: Choose General > International > Region Format, and choose your region. The Region Format also determines the language used for the days and months that appear in native iPod touch applications.
Accessibility To turn on accessibility features (available only on Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more), choose Accessibility and choose the features you want. See Chapter 21, “Accessibility,” on page 139.
Resetting iPod touch Reset all settings: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset All Settings. All your preferences and settings are reset. Information, such as your contacts and calendars, and media, such as your songs and videos, aren’t deleted. Erase all content and settings: Connect iPod touch to your computer or a power adapter. Choose General > Reset and tap “Erase All Content and Settings.” This resets all settings to their defaults and erases all your information and media: • On Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more: by removing the encryption key to the data
(which is encrypted using 256-bit AES encryption) • On Fall 2009 models with less than 32 GB, and models prior to Fall 2009: by overwriting
the data Important: You can’t use iPod touch while data is being overwritten. This can take up to four hours or more, depending on the model and storage capacity of your iPod touch. (On Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more, the removal of the encryption key is immediate.)
122
Chapter 18 Settings
Reset network settings: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset Network Settings. When you reset network settings, your list of previously used networks and VPN settings not installed by a configuration profile are removed. Wi-Fi is turned off and then back on, disconnecting you from any network you’re on. The Wi-Fi and “Ask to Join Networks” settings are left turned on. To remove VPN settings installed by a configuration profile, choose Settings > General > Profile, then select the profile and tap Remove. Reset the keyboard dictionary: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset Keyboard Dictionary. You add words to the keyboard dictionary by rejecting words iPod touch suggests as you type. Tap a word to reject the correction and add the word to the keyboard dictionary. Resetting the keyboard dictionary erases all words you’ve added. Reset the Home screen layout: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset Home Screen Layout. Reset the location warnings: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset Location Warnings. Location warnings are the requests made by applications (such as Maps) to use Location Services with those applications. iPod touch stops presenting the warning for an application the second time you tap OK. Tap Reset Location Warnings to resume the warnings.
Music
The Music settings apply to songs, podcasts, and audiobooks. Turn Shake to Shuffle on or off: Choose Music, then turn Shake to Shuffle on or off. When Shake to Shuffle is on, you can shake iPod touch to turn shuffle on and immediately change the currently playing song. Set iTunes to play songs at the same sound level: In iTunes, choose iTunes > Preferences if you’re using a Mac, or Edit > Preferences if you’re using a PC, then click Playback and select Sound Check. Set iPod touch to use the iTunes volume settings (Sound Check): Choose Music and turn Sound Check on. Use the equalizer to customize the sound on iPod touch: Choose Music > EQ and choose a setting. Set a volume limit for music and videos: Choose Music > Volume Limit and drag the slider to adjust the maximum volume. Tap Lock Volume Limit to assign a code to prevent the setting from being changed.
Chapter 18 Settings
123
WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/ipodtouch.
Video
Video settings apply to video content, including rented movies. You can set where to resume playing videos that you previously started, turn closed captioning on or off, and set up iPod touch to play videos on your TV. Set where to resume playing: Choose Video > Start Playing, then select whether you want videos that you previously started watching to resume playing from the beginning or where you left off. Turn closed captioning on or off: Choose Video and turn Closed Captioning on or off.
TV Out Use these settings to set up how iPod touch plays videos on your TV. For more information about using iPod touch to play videos on your TV, see “Watching Videos on a TV” on page 53. Turn widescreen on or off: Choose Video and turn Widescreen on or off. Set TV signal to NTSC or PAL: Choose Video > TV Signal and select NTSC or PAL. NTSC and PAL are TV broadcast standards. iPod touch displays NTSC 480p/PAL 576p when attached to a TV using a component cable, or NTSC 480i/PAL 576i using a composite cable. Your TV might use either of these, depending on where you bought it. If you’re not sure which to use, check the documentation that came with your TV.
Photos
Use Photos settings to specify how slideshows display your photos. Set the length of time each slide is shown: Choose Photos > Play Each Slide For and select the length of time. Set a transition effect: Choose Photos > Transition and select a transition effect. Set whether to repeat slideshows: Choose Photos and turn Repeat on or off. Set photos to appear randomly or in order: Choose Photos and turn Shuffle on or off.
124
Chapter 18 Settings
Store
Use Store settings to change or create an iTunes Store account. By default, the iTunes account you’re signed in to when you sync iPod touch with your computer appears in Store settings. You can change accounts on iPod touch to purchase music or applications from another account. If you don’t have an iTunes account, you can create one in Store settings. Go to www.apple.com/legal/itunes/ww/ for iTunes Store terms and conditions. Sign in to an account: Choose Store and tap Sign in, then enter your user name and password. View your iTunes Store account information: Choose Store and tap View Account, then type your password and follow the onscreen instructions. Sign in to a different account: Choose Store and tap Sign out, then tap Sign in and enter your username and password. Create a new account: Choose Store and tap Create New Account, then follow the onscreen instructions.
Mail, Contacts, Calendars
Use Mail, Contacts, Calendars settings to set up and customize accounts for iPod touch: • Microsoft Exchange • MobileMe • Google email • Yahoo! Mail • AOL • Other POP and IMAP mail systems • LDAP accounts for Contacts • CalDAV or iCalendar (.ics) accounts for Calendars
Accounts The Accounts section lets you set up accounts on iPod touch. The specific settings that appear depend on the type of account you’re setting up. Your service provider or system administrator should be able to provide the information you need to enter. For more information, see: • “Setting Up Accounts” on page 13 • “Adding Contacts” on page 84 • “Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars” on page 75
Change an account’s settings: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” choose an account, then make the changes you want.
Chapter 18 Settings
125
Changes you make to an account’s settings on iPod touch are not synced to your computer, so you can configure your accounts to work with iPod touch without affecting the account settings on your computer. Stop using an account: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” choose an account, then turn Account off. If an account is off, iPod touch doesn’t display the account and doesn’t send or check email from or sync other information with that account, until you turn it back on. Adjust advanced settings: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” choose an account, then do one of the following: • To set whether drafts, sent messages, and deleted messages are stored on iPod touch or
remotely on your email server (IMAP accounts only), tap Advanced and choose Drafts Mailbox, Sent Mailbox, or Deleted Mailbox. If you store messages on iPod touch, you can see them even when iPod touch isn’t connected to the Internet. • To set how long before messages are removed permanently from Mail on iPod touch, tap
Advanced and tap Remove, then choose a time: Never, or after one day, one week, or one month. • To adjust email server settings, tap Host Name, User Name, or Password under
Incoming Mail Server or Outgoing Mail Server. Ask your network administrator or Internet service provider for the correct settings. • To adjust SSL and password settings, tap Advanced. Ask your network administrator or
Internet service provider for the correct settings. Delete an account from iPod touch: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” choose an account, then scroll down and tap Delete Account. Deleting an account means you can no longer access the account with your iPod touch. All email and the contacts, calendar, and bookmark information synced with the account are removed from iPod touch. However, deleting an account doesn’t remove the account or its associated information from your computer.
Fetch New Data This setting lets you turn Push on or off for MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, Yahoo! Mail, and any other push accounts you’ve configured on iPod touch. Push accounts automatically deliver new information to iPod touch when new information appears on the server (some delays may occur). To fetch or sync pushed data, iPod touch must join a Wi-Fi network that is connected to the Internet. You might want to turn Push off to suspend delivery of email and other information, or to conserve battery life. When Push is off, and with accounts that don’t support push, data can still be fetched—that is, iPod touch can check with the server and see if new information is available. Use the Fetch New Data setting to determine how often data is requested. For optimal battery life, don’t fetch too frequently.
126
Chapter 18 Settings
Turn Push on: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Fetch New Data, then tap to turn Push on. Set the interval to fetch data: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Fetch New Data, then choose how often you want to fetch data for all accounts. To conserve battery life, fetch less frequently. Setting Push to OFF or setting Fetch to Manually in the Fetch New Data screen overrides individual account settings.
Mail The Mail settings, except where noted, apply to all accounts you’ve set up on iPod touch. To turn alerts sounds for new or sent mail on or off, use the General > Sounds settings. Set the number of messages shown on iPod touch: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Show, then choose a setting. Choose to see the most recent 25, 50, 75, 100, or 200 messages. To download additional messages when you’re in Mail, scroll to the bottom of your inbox and tap Load More Messages. Note: For Microsoft Exchange accounts, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” and choose the Exchange account. Tap “Mail days to sync” and choose the number of days of mail you want to sync with the server. Set how many lines of each message are previewed in the message list: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Preview, then choose a setting. You can choose to see up to five lines of each message. That way, you can scan a list of messages in a mailbox and get an idea of what each message is about. Set a minimum font size for messages: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Minimum Font Size, then choose Small, Medium, Large, Extra Large, or Giant. Set whether iPod touch shows To and Cc labels in message lists: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” then turn Show To/Cc Label on or off. If Show To/Cc Label is on, To or Cc next to each message in a list indicates whether the message was sent directly to you or you received a copy. Set whether iPod touch confirms that you want to delete a message: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” and turn Ask Before Deleting on or off. If Ask Before Deleting is on, to delete a message you must tap , then confirm by tapping Delete. Set whether iPod touch automatically loads remote images: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” and turn Load Remote Images on or off. If Load Remote Images is off, you can load images manually when reading a message.
Chapter 18 Settings
127
Set whether iPod touch sends you a copy of every message you send: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” then turn Always Bcc Myself on or off. Set the default email account: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Default Account, then choose an account. This setting determines which of your accounts a message is sent from when you create a message from another iPod touch application, such as sending a photo from Photos or tapping the email address of a business in Maps. To send the message from a different account, tap the From field in the message and choose another account. Add a signature to your messages: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Signature, then type a signature. You can set iPod touch to add a signature—your favorite quote, or your name, title, and phone number, for example—to the bottom of every message you send.
Contacts Set how contacts are sorted: Choose “Mail Contacts, Calendars,” then under Contacts tap Sort Order and do one of the following: • To sort by first name first, tap First, Last. • To sort by last name first, tap Last, First.
Set how contacts are displayed: Choose “Mail Contacts, Calendars,” then under Contacts tap Display Order and do one of the following: • To show first name first, tap First, Last. • To show last name first, tap Last, First.
Calendar Set alerts to sound when your receive meeting invitation: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” and under Calendar tap “New Invitation Alerts” to turn it on. Set how far back in the past to show your calendar events on iPod touch: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Sync, then choose a period of time. Turn on Calendar time zone support: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Time Zone Support, then turn Time Zone Support on. Select a time zone for calendars by tapping Time Zone and entering the name of a major city. When Time Zone Support is on, Calendar displays event dates and times in the time zone of the city you selected. When Time Zone Support is off, Calendar displays events in the time zone of your current location as determined by the network time. Important: If you’re traveling, iPod touch may not display events or sound alerts at the correct local time. To manually set the correct time, see “Date and Time” on page 121.
128
Chapter 18 Settings
Safari
Safari settings let you select your Internet search engine, set security options, and for developers, turn on debugging.
General You can use Google or Yahoo! to perform Internet searches. Select a search engine: Choose Safari > Search Engine and select the search engine you want to use. You can set Safari to automatically fill out web forms using contact information, names and passwords you previously entered, or both. Enable AutoFill: Choose Safari > AutoFill, then do one of the following: • To use information from contacts, turn Use Contact Info on, then choose My Info and
select the contact you want to use. Safari uses information from Contacts to fill in contact fields on web forms. • To use information from names and passwords, turn Names & Passwords on.
When this feature is on, Safari remembers names and passwords of websites you visit and automatically fills in the information when you revisit the website. • To remove all AutoFill information, tap Clear All.
Security By default, Safari is set to show features of the web, such as some movies, animation, and web applications. You may wish to change security settings to help protect iPod touch from possible security risks on the Internet. Change security settings: Choose Safari, then do one of the following: • To set whether you’re warned when visiting potentially fraudulent websites, turn Fraud
Warning on or off. Fraud warning protects you from potentially fraudulent Internet sites. When you visit a suspicious site, Safari warns you about its suspect nature and doesn’t load the page. • To enable or disable JavaScript, turn JavaScript on or off.
JavaScript lets web programmers control elements of the page—for example, a page that uses JavaScript might display the current date and time or cause a linked page to appear in a new pop-up page. • To enable or disable plug-ins, turn Plug-ins on or off. Plug-ins allow Safari to play some
types of audio and video files and to display Microsoft Word files and Microsoft Excel documents. • To block or allow pop-ups, turn Block Pop-ups on or off. Blocking pop-ups stops only
pop-ups that appear when you close a page or open a page by typing its address. It doesn’t block pop-ups that open when you tap a link. Chapter 18 Settings
129
• To set whether Safari accepts cookies, tap Accept Cookies and choose Never, “From
visited,” or Always. A cookie is a piece of information that a website puts on iPod touch so the website can remember you when you visit again. That way, webpages can be customized for you based on information you may have provided. Some pages won’t work correctly unless iPod touch is set to accept cookies. • To clear the history of webpages you’ve visited, tap Clear History. • To clear all cookies from Safari, tap Clear Cookies. • To clear the browser cache, tap Clear Cache.
The browser cache stores the content of pages so the pages open faster the next time you visit them. If a page you open doesn’t show new content, clearing the cache may help.
Developer The debug console can help you resolve webpage errors. If it’s turned on, the console appears automatically when a webpage error occurs. Turn the debug console on or off: Choose Safari > Developer, and turn Debug Console on or off.
Nike + iPod
Use Nike + iPod settings to activate and adjust settings for the Nike + iPod application (not available on first-generation iPod touch). See Chapter 20, “Nike + iPod,” on page 137.
130
Chapter 18 Settings
iTunes Store
19
About the iTunes Store
You can search for, browse, preview, purchase, and download music, audiobooks, TV shows, movies, and music videos from the iTunes Store directly to iPod touch. You can listen to audio or watch video podcasts from the iTunes Store, either by streaming them from the Internet or by downloading them directly to iPod touch. Note: The iTunes Store is not available in all regions, and iTunes Store content may vary across regions. To access the iTunes Store, iPod touch must join a Wi-Fi network that’s connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 35. To purchase songs or write reviews, you need an iTunes Store account. By default, iPod touch gets your iTunes Store account settings from iTunes. If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, or if you want to make purchases from another iTunes Store account, go to Settings > Store. See “Store” on page 125. You don’t need an iTunes Store account to play or download podcasts.
131
Finding Music, Videos, and More Browse content: Tap Music, Videos, or Podcasts. Or tap More to browse by Audiobooks, iTunes U, or Downloads. Choose a sorting method at the top of the screen to browse by lists such as Featured, Top Tens, or Genres.
Search for content: Tap Search, tap the search field and enter one or more words, then tap Search. Search results are grouped by category, such as Movies, Albums, or Podcasts.
Tap an item in a list to see more details on its Info screen. You can read reviews, write your own review, or email a link about the item to a friend. Depending on the item, you can also buy, download, or rent it. Note: If you join a Starbucks Wi-Fi network in a select Starbucks location (available in the U.S. only), the Starbucks icon appears at the bottom of the screen. You can preview and purchase the currently playing and other songs from featured Starbucks Collections. 132
Chapter 19 iTunes Store
Purchasing Music or Audiobooks
When you find a song, album, or audiobook you like in the iTunes Store, you can purchase and download it to iPod touch. You can preview an item before you purchase it to make sure it’s what you want. Preview a song or audiobook: Tap the item.
Purchase and download a song, album, or audiobook: 1 Tap the price, then tap Buy Now.
2 Sign in to your account as requested, then tap OK. If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, tap Create New Account to set one up. Your purchase is charged to your iTunes Store account. For additional purchases made within the next fifteen minutes, you don’t have to enter your password again. An alert appears if you’ve previously purchased one or more songs from an album. Tap Buy if you want to purchase the entire album including the songs you’ve already purchased, or tap Cancel if you want to purchase any remaining songs individually. Some albums include bonus content, which is downloaded to your iTunes library on your computer. Not all bonus content is downloaded directly to iPod touch. Once you purchase an item it begins downloading and appears in the Downloads screen. See “Checking Download Status” on page 135. Purchased songs are added to a Purchased playlist on iPod touch. If you delete the Purchased playlist, iTunes creates a new one when you buy an item from the iTunes Store. You can redeem iTunes Store gift cards, gift certificates, or other promotional codes to make purchases. When you’re signed in to your account, your remaining store credit appears with your account information at the bottom of most iTunes Store screens. Enter a redemption code: Tap Music, then tap Redeem at the bottom of the screen and follow the onscreen instructions.
Purchasing or Renting Videos
When you find a movie, TV show, or music video you like in the iTunes Store, you can purchase and download it to iPod touch. You can purchase movies and TV shows in standard (480p) or high definition (720p) format. When you purchase a high-definition video on iPod touch, a standard definition version compatible with iPod and iPhone immediately downloads for viewing. The high definition version appears in iTunes on your computer in the Downloads queue. You must be signed in to your iTunes Store account on your computer to view and download items from the Downloads queue.
Chapter 19 iTunes Store
133
Rented movies are available in standard definition only (not available in all regions). See “Watching Rented Movies” on page 53. Preview a video: Tap Preview.
Purchase or rent a video: 1 Tap Buy or Rent.
2 Sign in to your account as requested, then tap OK. If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, tap Create New Account to set one up. Your purchase is charged to your iTunes Store account. For additional purchases made within the next fifteen minutes, you don’t have to enter your password again. Once you purchase an item it begins downloading and appears in the Downloads screen. Rented movies won’t begin playing until the download completes. See “Checking Download Status” on page 135. Purchased videos are added to a Purchased playlist on iPod touch. If you delete the Purchased playlist, iTunes creates a new one the next time you buy an item from the iTunes Store. You can redeem iTunes Store gift cards, gift certificates, or other promotional codes to make purchases. When you’re signed in to your account, your remaining store credit appears with your account information at the bottom of most iTunes Store screens. Enter a redemption code: Tap Music, then tap Redeem at the bottom of the screen and follow the onscreen instructions.
Streaming or Downloading Podcasts
You can listen to audio podcasts or watch video podcasts streamed over the Internet from the iTunes Store. You can also download audio and video podcasts to iPod touch. Podcasts you download to iPod touch are synced to your iTunes library when you connect iPod touch to your computer. Tap Podcasts to browse podcasts in the iTunes Store. To see a list of episodes, tap a podcast. Video podcasts are indicated by the icon. Stream a podcast: Tap the podcast title. Download a podcast: Tap the Free button, then tap Download. Downloaded podcasts appear in the Podcasts list in Music. Listen to or watch a podcast you’ve downloaded: In Music, tap Podcasts at the bottom of the screen (you may need to tap More first), then tap the podcast. Video podcasts also appear in your list of videos. Get more episodes of the podcast you’ve downloaded: In the Podcasts list in Music, tap the podcast, then tap Get More Episodes.
134
Chapter 19 iTunes Store
Delete a podcast: In the Podcasts list in Music, swipe left or right over the podcast, then tap Delete.
Checking Download Status
You can check the Downloads screen to see the status of in-progress and scheduled downloads, including purchases you’ve pre-ordered. See the status of items being downloaded: Tap Downloads. To pause a download, tap . If a download is interrupted, iPod touch starts the download again the next time it has an Internet connection. Or, if you open iTunes on your computer, iTunes completes the download to your iTunes library (if your computer is connected to the Internet and signed in to the same iTunes account). See the status of pre-ordered items: Tap Downloads. Pre-ordered items appear in a list until the date the item is released. Tap the item for release date information. Once the item is available for download, a download icon appears next to the download. Download a pre-ordered item: Tap the item, then tap
.
Pre-ordered items don’t download automatically when they’re released. Return to the Downloads screen to begin the download.
Syncing Purchased Content
iTunes automatically syncs everything you’ve downloaded or purchased on iPod touch to your iTunes library when you connect iPod touch to your computer. This lets you access the downloads on your computer and provides a backup if you delete purchased content from iPod touch. Purchased content is synced to the “Purchased on” playlist. iTunes creates the playlist if it doesn’t exist. iTunes also copies your purchases to the Purchased playlist that iTunes uses for purchases you make on your computer, if that playlist exists and is set to sync with iPod touch. Downloaded podcasts are synced to the Podcast list in your iTunes library.
Changing the Browse Buttons
You can replace the Music, Podcasts, Videos, and Search buttons at the bottom of the screen with ones you use more frequently. For example, if you download audiobooks often but don’t watch many videos, you could replace the Videos button with Audiobooks.
Chapter 19 iTunes Store
135
Change the browse buttons: Tap More and tap Edit, then drag a button to the bottom of the screen, over the button you want to replace.
You can drag the buttons at the bottom of the screen left or right to rearrange them. When you finish, tap Done. When you’re browsing, tap More to access the browse buttons that aren’t visible.
Viewing Account Information
To view your iTunes Store account information on iPod touch, tap your account (at the bottom of most iTunes Store screens). Or go to Settings > Store and tap View Account. You must be signed in to view your account information. See “Store” on page 125.
Verifying Purchases
You can use iTunes on your computer to verify that all the music, videos, applications, and other items you bought from the iTunes Store or App Store are in your iTunes library. You might want to do this if a download was interrupted.
Verify your purchases: 1 Make sure your computer is connected to the Internet.
2 In iTunes, choose Store > Check for Available Downloads.
3 Enter your iTunes Store account ID and password, then click Check. Purchases not yet on your computer are downloaded. The Purchased playlist displays your purchases. However, because you can add or remove items in this list, it might not be accurate. To see all of your purchases, sign in to your account, choose Store > View My Account, and click Purchase History.
136
Chapter 19 iTunes Store
Nike + iPod
20
Activating Nike + iPod
When activated in Settings, the Nike + iPod application appears on the Home screen (not available on first-generation iPod touch). With a Nike + iPod Sensor (sold separately), the Nike + iPod application provides audible feedback on your speed, distance, time elapsed, and calories burned during a running or walking workout. When iPod touch is connected to iTunes on your computer, you can send your workout information to Nikeplus.com, where you can track your progress, set goals, and participate in challenges.
See the Nike + iPod documentation for information about activating and using Nike + iPod. Turn Nike + iPod on or off: In Settings, choose Nike + iPod and turn Nike + iPod on or off. When Nike + iPod is turned on, its icon appears on the Home screen.
137
Additional Nike + iPod Settings
In Settings, choose Nike + iPod to activate and adjust settings for the Nike + iPod application. Choose a PowerSong: Choose PowerSong and select a song from your music library. Turn spoken feedback on or off: Choose Spoken Feedback and select a male or female voice to accompany your workout, or Off to turn off spoken feedback. Set a distance preference: Choose Distance, then select Miles or Kilometers to measure your workout distance. Set your weight: Choose Weight, then flick to enter your weight. Set the screen orientation: Choose Lock Screen, then select a screen orientation preference. Set up the Nike + iPod Sensor: Choose Sensor, then follow the onscreen instructions to set up your sensor (sold separately). You can use a Nike+ compatible remote (sold separately) to control Nike + iPod wirelessly. Before using a remote for the first time, you must set it up on iPod touch. Set up the Nike + iPod remote: Choose Remote, then follow the onscreen instructions to set up your remote (third-party product sold separately).
138
Chapter 20 Nike + iPod
Accessibility
21
Accessibility Features
In addition to the many features that make iPod touch easy to use for everyone, accessibility features (available only on Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) are designed to make it easier for users with visual, auditory, or other physical disabilities to use iPod touch. These accessibility features include: • VoiceOver • Zoom • White on Black • Mono Audio • Speak Auto-text
With the exception of VoiceOver, these accessibility features work with all iPod touch applications, including third-party applications you download from the App Store. VoiceOver works with all applications that come preinstalled on iPod touch. In addition, third-party developers can use the iPod touch Accessibility API to make their applications accessible for VoiceOver users. For more information about the accessibility features of iPod touch, go to www.apple.com/accessibility. Each accessibility feature can be turned on or off in the Accessibility settings on iPod touch. You can also turn accessibility features on or off in iTunes when iPod touch is connected to your computer.
Turn accessibility features on or off in iTunes: 1 Connect iPod touch to your computer.
2 In iTunes, select iPod touch in the sidebar.
3 In the Summary pane, click Configure Universal Access in the Options section.
139
4 Select the accessibility features that you want to use and click OK.
VoiceOver
VoiceOver describes aloud what appears onscreen, so that you can use iPod touch without seeing it. VoiceOver speaks in the language specified in International settings, which may be influenced by the Region Locale setting. Note: VoiceOver isn’t available in all languages. VoiceOver tells you about each element on the screen as it’s selected. When an element is selected, it’s enclosed by a black rectangle (for the benefit of those who can see the screen) and VoiceOver speaks the name or describes the item. The enclosing rectangle is referred to as the VoiceOver cursor. If text is selected, VoiceOver reads the text. If a control (such as a button or switch) is selected and Speak Hints is turned on, VoiceOver may tell you the action of the item or provide instructions for you—for example, “double-tap to open.” When you go to a new screen, VoiceOver plays a sound and automatically selects and speaks the first element of the screen (typically, the item in the upper-left corner). VoiceOver also lets you know when the display changes to landscape or portrait, and when the screen is locked or unlocked.
Setting Up VoiceOver Important: VoiceOver changes the gestures used to control iPod touch. Once VoiceOver is turned on, you have to use VoiceOver gestures to operate iPod touch— even to turn VoiceOver off again to resume standard operation. Turn VoiceOver on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver and tap the VoiceOver On/Off switch. You can also set Triple-click Home to turn VoiceOver on or off. See “Triple-click Home” on page 148. Note: You cannot use VoiceOver and Zoom at the same time. 140
Chapter 21 Accessibility
Turn spoken hints on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver, and tap the Speak Hints On/Off switch. Spoken hints are turned on by default. Set the VoiceOver speaking rate: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver, and adjust the Speaking Rate slider. You can choose what kind of feedback you get when you type. You can set VoiceOver to speak characters, words, both, or nothing. If you choose to hear both characters and words, VoiceOver speaks each character as you type it, then speaks the whole word when you finish it by entering a space or punctuation. Choose typing feedback: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Typing Feedback, then choose Characters, Words, Characters and Words, or Nothing. Change the language spoken by VoiceOver: In Settings, choose General > International > Language, then select a language and tap OK. Some languages may be influenced by the Region Local setting. In Settings, choose General > International > Region Format and select the format. Note: VoiceOver isn’t available in all languages. Practice gestures: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Practice Gestures, then tap Practice VoiceOver Gestures. Practice the gestures described in “VoiceOver Gestures,” below. When you’re finished practicing, tap Done.
VoiceOver Gestures When VoiceOver is turned on, the standard touchscreen gestures have different effects. These and some additional gestures allow you to move around the screen and to control the individual elements when they’re selected. VoiceOver gestures include using two and three fingers to tap or flick. For best results when using two- and threefinger gestures, relax and let your fingers touch the screen with some space between your fingers. You can use standard gestures when VoiceOver is turned on, by double-tapping and holding your finger on the screen. A series of tones indicates that normal gestures are in force. They remain in effect until you lift your finger. Then VoiceOver gestures resume. You can use many different techniques to enter VoiceOver gestures. For example, you can enter a two-finger tap using two fingers from one hand, or one finger from each hand. You can also use your thumbs. Try different techniques to discover which works best for you. If your gestures don’t work, try quicker movements, especially for double-tap and flicking gestures. To flick, try quickly brushing the screen with your finger or fingers. You can practice VoiceOver gestures in Settings: choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Practice Gestures and tap the Practice VoiceOver Gestures button.
Chapter 21 Accessibility
141
Here’s a summary of key VoiceOver gestures: Navigate and Read • Tap: Speak item. • Flick right or left: Select the next or previous item. • Flick up or down: Depends on the Rotor Control setting. See “Rotor Control” on
page 142. • Two-finger tap: Stop speaking the current item. • Two-finger flick up: Read all from top of screen. • Two-finger flick down: Read all from current position. • Three-finger flick up or down: Scroll one page at a time. • Three-finger flick right or left: Go to the next or previous page (such as the Home
screen, Stocks, or Safari). • Three-finger tap: Speak the scroll status (which page or rows are visible).
Select and Activate • Double-tap: Activate selected item. • Touch an item with one finger, tap the screen with another finger (“split-tapping”):
Activate item. • Double-tap and hold (1 second) + standard gesture: Use a standard gesture.
The double-tap and hold gesture tells iPod touch to interpret the subsequent gesture as standard. For example, you can double-tap and hold, then without lifting your finger, drag your finger to slide a switch. • Two-finger double tap: Play or pause in iPod, YouTube, Voice Memos, or Photos. Start
or pause recording in Voice Memos. Start or stop the stopwatch. • Three-finger double tap: Mute or unmute VoiceOver. • Three-finger triple tap: Turn the display on or off.
Do single-finger flicking gestures quickly, to distinguish them from dragging gestures.
Rotor Control The rotor control is an invisible dial that you can use to change the results of up and down flick gestures when VoiceOver is turned on. Operate the rotor: Rotate two fingers on the iPod touch screen to “turn” the dial to choose between options.
142
Chapter 21 Accessibility
The effect of the rotor depends on what you’re doing. For example, if you’re reading text in an email you received, you can use the rotor to switch between hearing text spoken word-by-word or character-by-character when you flick up or down. If you’re browsing a webpage, use the rotor to choose whether you hear text word-by-word or character-by-character, hear just the headers, hear just the links (all of them, visited links, or links not yet visited), hear form elements, or hear descriptions of images. In other words, you can use the rotor setting to hear all the text, or to jump from one element to another of a certain type, such as headers or links. Rotor options depend on the context of what you’re doing. Reading text • Select and hear text character-by-character • Select and hear text word-by-word
Browsing a webpage • Select and hear text character-by-character • Select and hear text word-by-word • Select and hear headers • Select and hear links • Select and hear form controls • Select and hear visited links • Select and hear links not visited • Select and hear images • Select and hear static text • Zoom in or out
Entering text • Move insertion point and hear text character-by-character • Move insertion point and text word-by-word • Text editing functions • Auto-text
Using a control (such as the spinner for setting the time in Clock) • Select and hear value character-by-character • Select and hear value word-by-word • Adjust the value of the control object
Chapter 21 Accessibility
143
Using VoiceOver Select items on the screen: Drag your finger over the screen. VoiceOver identifies each element as you touch it. You can also move systematically from one element to the next by flicking left or right with a single finger. Elements are selected from leftto-right, top-to-bottom. Flick right to go to the next element, or flick left to go to the previous element. “Tap” a selected item when VoiceOver is turned on: Double-tap anywhere on the screen. Speak the text of an element, character by character or word by word: With the element selected, flick up or down with one finger. Flick down to read the next character, or flick up to read the previous character. Twist the rotor control to read word by word. Adjust a slider: With a single finger, flick up to increase the setting or down to decrease the setting. VoiceOver announces the setting as you adjust it. Scroll a list or area of the screen: Flick up or down with three fingers. Flick down to page down through the list, or flick up to page up through the list. When paging through a list, VoiceOver speaks the range of items displayed (for example, “showing rows 5 through 10”). You can also scroll continuously through a list, instead of paging through it. Doubletap and hold. When you hear a series of tones, you can move your finger up or down to scroll the list. Continuous scrolling stops when you lift your finger. Use a list index: Some lists have an alphabetical index along the right side. The index cannot be selected by flicking between elements; you must touch the index directly to select it. With the index selected, flick up or down to move along the index. You can also double-tap, then slide your finger up or down. Unlock iPod touch: Select the Unlock switch, then double-tap the screen. Rearrange the Home screen: On the Home screen select the icon you want to move. Double-tap and hold, then drag the icon. VoiceOver speaks the row and column position as your drag the icon. Release the icon when it’s in the location you want. You can drag additional icons. Drag an item to the left or right edge of the screen to move it to another page of the Home screen. When you’re finished rearranging the icons, press the Home button.
144
Chapter 21 Accessibility
Mute VoiceOver
Double-tap with three fingers. Double-tap again with three fingers to turn speaking back on. To turn off only VoiceOver sounds, set the Ring/ Silent switch to Silent.
Stop speaking an item
Tap once with two fingers. Tap again with two fingers to resume speaking. Speaking automatically resumes when you select another item.
Turn off the display while you use VoiceOver
Triple-tap with three fingers. Triple-tap again with three fingers to turn on the display again.
Speak entire screen from the top
Flick up with two fingers.
Speak from current item to bottom of screen
Flick down with two fingers.
Status information about iPod touch can be heard by touching the top of the screen. This can include the time, battery life, Wi-Fi signal strength, and more.
Entering and Editing Text When you select a text field with VoiceOver, you can use the onscreen keyboard to enter text. You can use the editing features of iPod touch to cut, copy, or paste in the text field. Note: Safari doesn’t support copying webpage content. The editing features work only in editable text fields.
Enter text: 1 Use VoiceOver to select an editable text field, then double tap to display the insertion point and bring up the onscreen keyboard. If the field already contains text, the insertion point is placed at the beginning or at the end of the text. Double-tap again to place the insertion point at the opposite end. VoiceOver tells you the position of the insertion point. The insertion point and onscreen keyboard may appear automatically when you select a text field. VoiceOver announces when you’re in editing mode.
2 To type, select a key on the keyboard by flicking left or right, then double-tap to enter the character. Or drag you finger around the keyboard to select a key, and, while holding the key with one finger, tap the screen with another finger to enter the character. VoiceOver speaks the key when it’s selected, and again when it’s entered. To enter an accented character, double-tap and hold until you hear a sound that indicates the alternate characters have appeared, then drag left or right to select and hear the choices. Release your finger to enter the current selection.
Chapter 21 Accessibility
145
Move the insertion point: Flick up or down to move the insertion point forward or backward in the text. VoiceOver makes a sound when the insertion point moves, and speaks the character that the insertion point moved across. Use the rotor to choose whether you want to move the insertion point by character or by word. Select text: Use the rotor to choose edit. Flick up or down to choose between the Select and Select All functions, then double tap. If you chose Select, the word closest to the insertion point is selected when you double-tap. If you chose Select All, the entire text is selected. Pinch to increase or decrease the selection. Cut, Copy, or Paste: Make sure the rotor is set to edit. With text selected, flick up or down to choose Cut, Copy, or Paste, then double-tap. Undo: Shake iPod touch, flick left or right to choose the action to undo, then doubletap.
Using Maps With VoiceOver, you can zoom in or out, select pins, and get information about locations. Zoom in or out: Use the rotor to choose zoom mode, then flick up or down to zoom in or out. Select a pin: Touch a pin, or flick left or right to move from one item to another. Get information about a location: With a pin selected, double-tap to display the information flag. Flick left or right to select the flag, then double-tap to display the information page.
Editing Voice Memos You can use VoiceOver gestures to trim Voice Memo recordings. Trim a voice memo: On the Voice Memos screen, select the button to the right of the memo you want to trim, then double-tap. Then select Trim Memo and double-tap. Select the beginning or end of the trim tool. Flick up to drag to the right, or flick down to drag to the left. VoiceOver announces the amount of time the current position will trim from the recording. To execute the trim, select Trim Voice Memo and double-tap.
Zoom
Many iPod touch applications let you zoom in and out specific elements. For example, you can double-tap or use the pinch gesture to expand webpage columns in Safari. Zoom is a special accessibility feature that lets you magnify the entire screen of any application you’re using to help you see what’s on the display. Turn Zoom on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > Zoom and tap the Zoom On/Off switch.
146
Chapter 21 Accessibility
Note: You cannot use VoiceOver and Zoom at the same time. Zoom in or out: Double-tap the screen with three fingers. By default, the screen is magnified by 200 percent. If you manually change the magnification (by using the tap-and-drag gesture, described below), iPod touch automatically returns to that magnification when you zoom in by double-tapping with three fingers. Increase magnification: With three fingers, tap and drag toward the top of the screen (to increase magnification) or toward the bottom of the screen (to decrease magnification). The tap-and-drag gesture is similar to a double-tap, except you don’t lift your fingers on the second tap—instead, drag your fingers on the screen. Once you start dragging, you can drag with a single finger. Move around the screen: When zoomed in, drag or flick the screen with three fingers. Once you start dragging, you can drag with a single finger so that you can see more of the screen. Hold a single finger near the edge of the display to pan to that side of the screen image. Move your finger closer to the edge to pan more quickly. When you open a new screen, Zoom always goes to the top-middle of the screen.
White on Black
Use White on Black to invert the colors on the iPod touch display, which may make it easier to read the screen. The screen looks like a photographic negative when White on Black is turned on. Invert the screen’s colors: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility and tap the “White on Black” switch.
Mono Audio
Mono Audio combines the sound of the left and right channels into a mono signal played on both sides. This enables users with hearing impairment in one ear to hear the entire sound signal with the other ear. Turn Mono Audio on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility and tap the Mono Audio switch.
Speak Auto-text
Speak Auto-text speaks the text corrections and suggestions iPod touch makes when you’re typing. Turn Speak Auto-text on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility and tap the Speak Auto-text switch. Speak Auto-text also works with VoiceOver or Zoom.
Chapter 21 Accessibility
147
Triple-click Home
Triple-click Home provides an easy way to turn some of the Accessibility features on or off when you press the Home button quickly three times. You can set Triple-click Home to turn VoiceOver on or off, turn White on Black on or off, or present the options to: • Turn VoiceOver on or off • Turn Zoom on or off • Turn White on Black on or off
Triple-click Home is turned off by default. Set the Triple-click Home function: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > Triple-click Home and choose the function you want.
Closed Captioning and Other Helpful Features
Many features available on all models of iPod touch help make iPod touch accessible to all users, including those with visual or auditory impairments.
Closed Captioning You can turn on closed captioning for videos in iPod settings. See “Video” on page 124.
Voice Control Voice Control (available only on Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) lets you control iPod music playback by using voice commands. See “Using Voice Control with iPod” on page 46.
Widescreen Keyboards Several applications let you rotate iPod touch when you’re typing so that you can use a larger keyboard: • Mail • Safari • Notes • Contacts
Instant Messaging (IM) Chat The App Store features many Internet Messaging (IM) applications such as AIM, BeejiveIM, ICQ, and Yahoo! Messenger that are optimized for iPod touch.
Minimum Font Size for Mail Messages To increase readability, set a minimum font size for Mail message text to Large, Extra Large, or Giant. See “Mail” on page 127.
148
Chapter 21 Accessibility
Universal Access in Mac OS X Take advantage of the Universal Access features in Mac OS X when you use iTunes to sync information and content from your iTunes library to iPod touch. In the Finder, choose Help > Mac Help, then search for “universal access.” For more information about iPod touch and Mac OS X accessibility features, go to www.apple.com/accessibility.
Chapter 21 Accessibility
149
A
Apple iPod touch Support Site
Comprehensive support information is available online at www.apple.com/support/ ipodtouch.
General Low-Battery Image Appears iPod touch is low on power and needs to charge for up to ten minutes before you can use it. For information about charging iPod touch, see “Charging the Battery” on page 36.
or
iPod touch Doesn’t Respond • iPod touch may be low on power. Connect iPod touch to your computer or to its
power adapter to charge. See “Charging the Battery” on page 36. • Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of iPod touch for a few seconds until
a red slider appears, and then press and hold the Home button until the application you were using quits. • If that doesn’t work, turn iPod touch off, then turn it on again. Press and hold the
Sleep/Wake button on top of iPod touch for a few seconds until a red slider appears, and then drag the slider. Then press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears.
150
Appendix
Troubleshooting
• If that doesn’t work, reset iPod touch. Press and hold both the Sleep/Wake button
and the Home
button for at least ten seconds, until the Apple logo appears.
iPod touch Still Doesn’t Respond After Reset • Reset iPod touch settings. From the Home screen choose Settings > General > Reset
> Reset All Settings. All your preferences are reset, but your data and media aren’t deleted. • If that doesn’t work, erase all content on iPod touch. See “Resetting iPod touch” on
page 122. • If that doesn’t work, restore the iPod touch software. See “Updating and Restoring
iPod touch Software” on page 158.
“This accessory is not supported by iPod touch” Appears The accessory you attached may not work with iPod touch. Make sure the dock connector is free of debris.
Connect-to-iTunes Screen Appears iPod touch needs to be registered with iTunes. Connect iPod touch to your computer and open iTunes if it doesn’t open automatically.
iTunes and Syncing iPod touch Doesn’t Appear in iTunes • The iPod touch battery might need to be recharged. For information about charging
iPod touch, see “Charging the Battery” on page 36. • Disconnect other USB devices from your computer and connect iPod touch to a
different USB 2.0 port on your computer (not on your keyboard). • Restart your computer and reconnect iPod touch to your computer. • Download and install (or reinstall) the latest version of iTunes from
www.apple.com/itunes.
Syncing Doesn’t Work • The iPod touch battery might need to be recharged. For information about charging
iPod touch, see “Charging the Battery” on page 36. • Disconnect other USB devices from your computer and connect iPod touch to a
different USB 2.0 port on your computer (not on your keyboard). • Restart your computer and reconnect iPod touch to your computer. • For push accounts, make sure iPod touch is joined to a Wi-Fi network that is
connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 35.
Appendix A Troubleshooting
151
• Download and install (or reinstall) the latest version of iTunes from
www.apple.com/itunes.
Contacts, Calendars, or Bookmarks Don’t Sync • Download and install (or reinstall) the latest version of iTunes from
www.apple.com/itunes. • For push accounts, make sure iPod touch is joined to a Wi-Fi network that is
connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 35.
Yahoo! or Google Contacts Doesn’t Sync iTunes may not be able to connect with Yahoo! or Google. Make sure iPod touch is joined to a Wi-Fi network that is connected to the Internet. Make sure your computer is connected to the Internet, and that you’ve entered the correct ID and password in iTunes. Connect iPod touch to your computer, click the Info tab in iTunes, click Configure in the Contacts section, then enter your current ID and password.
Yahoo! Address Book Still Has Contacts Deleted From iPod touch Yahoo! Address Book doesn’t allow contacts containing a Messenger ID to be deleted through syncing. To delete a contact containing a Messenger ID, log in to your Yahoo! account online and delete the contact using Yahoo! Address Book.
Sound, Music, and Video No Sound • Unplug and reconnect the headset. Make sure the connector is pushed in all
the way. • Make sure the volume isn’t turned down all the way. • Music on iPod touch might be paused. Try pressing the center button on the
iPod touch headset (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset to resume playback. Or from the Home screen, tap Music, tap Now Playing, then tap . • Check to see if a volume limit is set. From the Home screen choose Settings > iPod
> Volume Limit. For more information, see “Music” on page 123. • Make sure you’re using the latest version of iTunes (go to www.apple.com/itunes). • If you’re using the optional dock’s line out port, make sure your external speakers or
stereo are turned on and working properly.
152
Appendix A Troubleshooting
Song, Video, or Other Items Won’t Play The song may have been encoded in a format that iPod touch doesn’t support. The following audio file formats are supported by iPod touch. These include formats for audiobooks and podcasting: • AAC (M4A, M4B, M4P, up to 320 Kbps) • Apple Lossless (a high-quality compressed format) • MP3 (up to 320 Kbps) • MP3 Variable Bit Rate (VBR) • WAV • AA (audible.com spoken word, formats 2, 3, and 4) • AAX (audible.com spoken word, AudibleEnhanced format) • AIFF
The following video file formats are supported by iPod touch: • H.264 (Baseline Profile Level 3.0) • MPEG-4 (Simple Profile)
A song encoded using Apple Lossless format has full CD-quality sound, but takes up only about half as much space as a song encoded using AIFF or WAV format. The same song encoded in AAC or MP3 format takes up even less space. When you import music from a CD using iTunes, it’s converted to AAC format by default. Using iTunes for Windows, you can convert nonprotected WMA files to AAC or MP3 format. This can be useful if you have a library of music encoded in WMA format. iPod touch doesn’t support WMA, MPEG Layer 1, MPEG Layer 2 audio files, or audible. com format 1. If you have a song or video in your iTunes library that isn’t supported by iPod touch, you may be able to convert it to a format iPod touch supports. See iTunes Help for more information.
iTunes Stores iTunes Store Isn’t Available To use the iTunes Store, iPod touch must be connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 35. The iTunes Store isn’t available in all countries.
Can’t Purchase Content To use the iTunes Store or the App Store, iPod touch must join a Wi-Fi network that is connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 35.
Appendix A Troubleshooting
153
To purchase content from the iTunes Store or App Store, you must have an iTunes Store account. Open iTunes on your computer and choose Store > Create Account. You can also set up an account on iPod touch. See “Viewing Account Information” on page 136. Note: The iTunes Store is available only in some countries.
Safari, Mail, and Contacts Can’t Send Email If iPod touch is unable to send email, try the following: • In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” and select the account you’re trying to use. Tap Account Info, then tap SMTP under Outgoing Mail Server. You can set up additional SMTP servers, or select one from another mail account on iPod touch. Contact your Internet service provider for configuration information. • Set up your email account directly on iPod touch instead of syncing it from iTunes.
In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” tap Add Account and enter your account information. If iPod touch is unable to locate your service provider’s settings when you enter your email address, go to www.apple.com/support and search for HT1277 to get additional help in setting up your account. • Turn iPod touch off, then turn it on again. Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button
on top of iPod touch for a few seconds until a red slider appears, and then drag the slider. Then press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. For additional troubleshooting information, go to www.apple.com/support and search for TS1426. If you still can’t send email, you can call an Apple Expert (not available in all countries). Go to www.apple.com/support/expert for information. If Apple Expert is not available in your country, get a free GMail, Yahoo!, or AOL account and try forwarding your mail to that account.
Can’t Receive Email If iPod touch is unable to receive email, try the following: • If you’re using one or more computers to check the same email account, that may be creating a lock-out issue. For more information, go to www.apple.com/support and search for TS2621. • Set up your email account directly on iPod touch instead of syncing it from iTunes.
In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” tap Add Account and enter your account information. If iPod touch is unable to locate your service provider’s settings when you enter your email address, go to www.apple.com/support and search for HT1277 to get additional help in setting up your account.
154
Appendix A Troubleshooting
• Turn iPod touch off, then turn it on again. Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button
on top of iPod touch for a few seconds until a red slider appears, and then drag the slider. Then press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. • Turn off Wi-Fi so iPod touch is connecting to the Internet via the cellular data
network. In Settings, choose Wi-Fi and turn off Wi-Fi. For additional troubleshooting information, go to www.apple.com/support and search for TS1426. If you still can’t receive email, you can call an Apple Expert (not available in all countries). Go to www.apple.com/support/expert for information. If Apple Expert is not available in your country, get a free GMail, Yahoo!, or AOL account and try forwarding your mail to that account.
Email Attachment Won’t Open The file type may not be supported. iPod touch supports the following email attachment file formats: .doc
Microsoft Word
.docx
Microsoft Word (XML)
.htm
webpage
.html
webpage
.key
Keynote
.numbers
Numbers
.pages
Pages
.pdf
Preview, Adobe Acrobat
.ppt
Microsoft PowerPoint
.pptx
Microsoft PowerPoint (XML)
.rtf
Rich Text Format
.txt
text
.vcf
contact information
.xls
Microsoft Excel
.xlsx
Microsoft Excel (XML)
GAL Contacts Don’t Appear Make sure iPod touch is joined to a Wi-Fi network that is connected to the Internet. Check your Microsoft Exchange settings to make sure you’re on the right server. In Settings, tap “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” and choose an account to display its settings. If you’re trying to search for GAL contacts in Contacts, tap Groups and tap Directories at the bottom of the list.
Appendix A Troubleshooting
155
Backing Up iPod touch
iTunes creates backups of settings, downloaded applications and data, and other information on iPod touch. You can use a backup to restore these items to your iPod touch after a software restore or to transfer the information to another iPod touch. Backing up iPod touch or restoring from a backup is not the same as syncing content and other items (such as music, podcasts, photos, videos, and applications that you download via iTunes) with your iTunes library. Backups include settings, downloaded applications and data, and other information that resides on iPod touch. You can restore these items from a backup using iTunes, but you may also have to sync your iTunes library content again. Applications downloaded from the App Store are backed up the next time you sync with iTunes. Afterwards, only application data is backed up when you sync with iTunes.
Creating Backups Backups can be created in the following ways: • Once iPod touch has been configured to sync with a particular computer, iTunes automatically makes a backup of iPod touch on that computer when you sync. iTunes won’t automatically back up an iPod touch that isn’t configured to sync with that computer. If you’ve configured iPod touch to automatically sync with iTunes on a specific computer, iTunes will back up iPod touch every time you connect it to that computer. Automatic syncing is turned on by default. iTunes only makes one backup each time you connect, even if you sync multiple times before disconnecting. • If you choose to update the software on iPod touch, iTunes will back up iPod touch
automatically, even if it isn’t configured to sync with iTunes on that computer. • If you choose to restore the software on iPod touch, iTunes asks if you want to back
up iPod touch before restoring. If you use a Bluetooth headset or car kit with iPod touch and you restore settings, you must pair the Bluetooth device with iPod touch again to use it. For more information about backups, including the settings and information stored in a backup, go to www.apple.com/support and search for HT1766.
156
Appendix A Troubleshooting
Restoring from a Backup You can restore the settings, application data, and other information from a backup, or use this feature to transfer these items to another iPod touch.
Restore iPod touch from a backup: 1 Connect iPod touch to the computer you normally sync with.
2 In iTunes, Control-click iPod touch in the sidebar and choose “Restore from Backup” from the menu that appears.
3 Choose the backup that you want to restore from the pop-up menu, then click Restore. If your backup is encrypted, you’ll need to enter your password. After restoring from a backup, previous data is no longer accessible via the iPod touch user interface, but it isn’t erased from your iPod touch. For information about erasing all content and settings, see “Resetting iPod touch” on page 122. Important: Restoring iPod touch from a backup restores all data in the backup, including data for other applications. If you choose an old backup, restoring from it could replace the data for applications with data that is not current.
Removing a Backup You can remove a backup of iPod touch from the list of backups in iTunes. You may want to do this, for example, if a backup was created on someone else’s computer.
Remove a backup: 1 In iTunes, open iTunes Preferences. • Windows: Choose Edit > Preferences. • Mac: Choose iTunes > Preferences.
2 Click Devices (iPod touch does not need to be connected).
3 Select the backup you want to remove, then click Delete Backup.
4 Confirm you wish to remove the selected backup by clicking Delete Backup.
5 Click OK to close the iTunes Preferences Window.
Appendix A Troubleshooting
157
Updating and Restoring iPod touch Software
You can use iTunes to update or reinstall iPod touch software, restore default settings, and delete all data on iPod touch. • If you update, the iPod touch software is updated. Your downloaded applications, settings, and data aren’t affected. Note: In some cases, an update may also include restoring iPod touch. • If you restore, the latest version of iPod touch software is reinstalled, settings are
restored to their defaults, and data stored on iPod touch is deleted, including downloaded applications, songs, videos, contacts, photos, calendar information, and any other data. If you’ve backed up iPod touch with iTunes on your computer, you can restore data from the backup at the end of the restore process. Deleted data is no longer accessible via the iPod touch user interface, but isn’t erased from your iPod touch. For information about erasing all content and settings, see “Resetting iPod touch” on page 122.
Update or restore iPod touch: 1 Make sure you have an Internet connection and have installed the latest version of iTunes from www.apple.com/itunes.
2 Connect iPod touch to your computer.
3 Select iPod touch in the iTunes sidebar and click the Summary tab.
4 Click “Check for Update.” iTunes tells you if there’s a newer version of the iPod touch software available.
5 Click Update to install the latest version of the software. Or click Restore to restore. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the restore process. For more information about updating and restoring iPod touch software, go to www.apple.com/support and search for HT1414.
158
Appendix A Troubleshooting
Appendix
B
Other Resources
Safety, Software, and Service Information
The following table describes where to get more iPod touch-related safety, software, and service information. To learn about
Do this
Using iPod touch safely
See the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/ipodtouch for the latest safety and regulatory information.
iPod touch service and support, tips, forums, and Apple software downloads
Go to www.apple.com/support/ipodtouch.
The latest information about iPod touch
Go to www.apple.com/ipodtouch.
Using iTunes
Open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help. For an online iTunes tutorial (available in some areas only), go to www.apple.com/support/itunes.
MobileMe
Go to www.me.com.
Using iPhoto on Mac OS X
Open iPhoto and choose Help > iPhoto Help.
Using Address Book on Mac OS X
Open Address Book and choose Help > Address Book Help.
Using iCal on Mac OS X
Open iCal and choose Help > iCal Help.
Microsoft Outlook, Windows Address Book, Adobe Photoshop Album, and Adobe Photoshop Elements
See the documentation that came with those applications.
Obtaining warranty service
First follow the advice in this guide and online resources. Then go to www.apple.com/support or see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/ipodtouch.
Battery replacement service
Go to www.apple.com/support/ipod/service/ battery.
Using iPod touch in an enterprise environment
Go to www.apple.com/iphone/enterprise.
159
Viewing the User Guide on iPod touch
The iPod touch User Guide, optimized for viewing on iPod touch, is available at help. apple.com/ipodtouch. View the guide on iPod touch: In Safari, tap bookmark.
, then tap the iPod touch User Guide
Add an icon for the guide to the Home screen: When viewing the guide, tap , then tap “Add to Home Screen.” The iPod touch User Guide is available in many languages. View guide in a different language: Tap “Change Language” at the bottom of the screen on the main contents page, then choose the language you want.
Disposal and Recycling Information
Your iPod must be disposed of properly according to local laws and regulations. Because this product contains a battery, the product must be disposed of separately from household waste. When your iPod reaches its end of life, contact Apple or your local authorities to learn about recycling options. For information about Apple’s recycling program, go to: www.apple.com/environment/recycling Deutschland: Dieses Gerät enthält Batterien. Bitte nicht in den Hausmüll werfen. Entsorgen Sie dieses Gerätes am Ende seines Lebenszyklus entsprechend der maßgeblichen gesetzlichen Regelungen.
Nederlands: Gebruikte batterijen kunnen worden ingeleverd bij de chemokar of in een speciale batterijcontainer voor klein chemisch afval (kca) worden gedeponeerd. Türkiye: EEE yönetmeliğine (Elektrikli ve Elektronik Eşyalarda Bazı Zararlı Maddelerin Kullanımının Sınırlandırılmasına Dair Yönetmelik) uygundur. Taiwan: Battery Replacement: The rechargeable battery in iPod touch should be replaced only by an authorized service provider. For battery replacement services, go to: www.apple.com/support/ipod/service/battery
160
Appendix B Other Resources
European Union—Disposal Information: This symbol means that according to local laws and regulations your product should be disposed of separately from household waste. When this product reaches its end of life, take it to a collection point designated by local authorities. Some collection points accept products for free. The separate collection and recycling of your product at the time of disposal will help conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment.
Apple and the Environment
At Apple, we recognize our responsibility to minimize the environmental impacts of our operations and products. For more information go to: www.apple.com/environment
Appendix B Other Resources
161
12-hour time 121 24-hour time 121
A
accessibility features 139 Mono Audio 147 setting up iPod touch using VoiceOver 8 settings 122 Speak Auto-text 147 Triple-click Home 148 VoiceOver 140 White on Black 147 Zoom 146 accounts 13, 125 “push” 15, 126 adjusting brightness 116 Adobe Photoshop 79 Adobe Photoshop Elements 11 alarms deleting 110 setting 110 status icon 18 turning on or off 110 album covers 47 album tracks 48 alerts adjusting volume 23, 117 calendar 78 turning on or off 117 alternate audio language 52 anti-phishing. See Safari fraud warning App Store about 60 browsing 60 deleting applications 64 Genius 61 store account 60, 125 syncing 9 syncing purchased content 65 updating applications 65 verifying purchases 136 applications 19
162
Index
Index
deleting 64 attachments email 69 audio alternate language 52 mono 147 audio file formats, supported 153 audiobooks syncing 9 Auto-Brightness 116 AutoFill 58, 129 auto-lock, setting time for 119 AV cables 53
B
backing up iPod touch 11 backups creating 156 removing 157 restoring from 157 battery charging 36 low on power 37, 150 maximizing life 37 replacing 37, 159 status icon 18 Bluetooth headphones 34 headset 22, 33, 34, 43, 44, 46, 47, 51, 52, 87, 104, 152, 156 pairing headphones 34 status icon 18 turning on or off 118 unpairing device 35 bookmarking map locations 97 webpages 58 YouTube videos 88 bookmarks, syncing 9, 12, 59 brightness adjusting 116 setting to adjust automatically 116 browser cache, clearing 130
browsing album covers 47 App Store 60 iTunes Music Store 132 YouTube videos 86 businesses, finding 99 buttons, changing 54
C
cable, Dock Connector to USB 8, 18 cache, clearing browser 130 Calculator 112 scientific 113 Calendar about 73 searching 75 views 74 See also events calendars, syncing 9, 12, 73 caps lock, enabling 121 Cc 127, 128 charging battery 36 cleaning iPod touch 38 Clock 109 clocks, adding 109 closed captioning, turning on or off 124 component AV cable 53 composite AV cable 53 computer requirements 7 configuration profiles 15 connecting to Internet 35 contacts adding and editing 85 adding from Maps 97 assigning photo to 83 GAL (Global Address List) 66, 85, 155 LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) 85 seeing location of 97 send info by email 67 setting how displayed 128 setting how sorted 128 syncing 9, 10, 12, 84 Yahoo! Address Book 12 controls, using 24 converting videos 42 converting unprotected WMA files 153 cookies 130 copying images 82 text 29 Cover Flow 47 current approximate location 97 cutting and pasting text 29
Index
D
data, erasing 14, 38, 119, 122 date and time, setting 121 date format 122 debug console 130 deleting alarms 110 all content and settings 38, 122 applications from the App Store 64 clocks 109 contacts 85 email account 126 email messages 71 notes 107 playlists 50 removing 157 songs from a playlist 50 videos 53 YouTube playlists 90 YouTube videos from a playlist 90 developer settings 130 directions, getting 97 disconnecting iPod touch from computer 16 display freezes 151 Dock Connector 103 Dock Connector to USB cable 8, 18 downloading applications 63 podcasts 134
E
editing text 29 effects sounds, turning on or off 117 email accounts syncing 9, 10 enterprise, using iPod touch 159 equalizer 123 erasing data 14, 38, 119, 122 events, calendar 76 Exchange. See Microsoft Exchange
F
Fetch New Data 126 file formats, supported 69, 153, 155 Find My iPod touch 14, 38 force quit an application 39 formats date, time, and telephone number 122 forwarding messages 67
G
GAL (Global Address List) 66, 85, 155 Genius Mixes 42, 49 Genius playlists 45, 48
163
Genius, App Store 61 gestures, VoiceOver 141 getting help 159 getting started 7 Google search engine 129 Google Contacts 12, 152 searching the web 58 grab points 29
H
headset about 34 center button 22, 33, 34, 43, 44, 46, 47, 51, 52, 87, 104, 152 using with Voice Memos 103 headset button. See mic button help, getting 159 Home screen 19, 24 adding web clips 59 customizing 21 hybrid view 96
I
iCal 12, 159 icons applications 19 status 18 See also buttons images copying 82 pasting 82 IMAP accounts 66 searching email 71 installing applications from the App Store 63 configuration profiles 15 international keyboards 30, 121, 122 Internet, connecting to 35 iPhoto 11, 159 iPod changing browse buttons 54 converting videos for iPod touch 42 deleting videos 53 Genius Mixes 49 Genius playlists 48 headset controls 34 on-the-go playlists 50, 90 playing songs using Voice Control 46 repeating or shuffling songs 45 searching 48, 52 Shake to Shuffle 42, 123 sleep timer 54 iTunes Store about 131
164
Index
account 7, 60, 125, 131, 133 browsing 132 checking download status 135 purchasing songs and albums 133 streaming or downloading podcasts 134 syncing purchased content 135 verifying purchases 136 iTunes U syncing 9, 11, 40 iTunes getting help 159 iPod touch doesn’t appear in 151 settings panes 10
K
keyboards international 30, 122 typing on 27
L
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) 85 links in email 69 on webpages 56 location. See Maps Location Services 118 location warnings 123 locking iPod touch 18, 22, 23 lyrics, displaying 44
M
Mac system requirements 7 Mail account setup 66, 125 attachments 69, 155 Cc 127, 128 checking for new messages 67, 71 deleting email account 126 deleting messages 71 forwarding messages 67 links 69 load additional messages 68 marking messages as unread 70 organizing email 72 password settings 126 problems opening an attachment 155 reading messages 68 replying to messages 67 resizing text column 68 saving drafts 67 searching 71 seeing recipients 70 sending messages 66 sending photos 67 sending videos 67
sending webpage addresses 57 sending YouTube video links 88 settings 125, 126 share contact information 67 signatures 128 storing email on iPod touch or server 126 syncing email account settings 9, 10 Yahoo! email account 15 zooming in a message 68 Maps adding location to a contact 97 bookmarking location 97 current approximate location 95, 97 dropped pin 95 finding businesses 99 finding location 93 getting directions 97 hybrid view 96 satellite view 96 seeing location of a contact 97 share location 97 traffic conditions 99 zooming 94 mic button 34 microphone about 34 microphone, external 103 Microsoft Excel 129 Microsoft Exchange 13, 19, 20, 66, 84 push accounts 15 searching email 71 setting up account 13 syncing 13, 73 Microsoft Internet Explorer 12, 58 Microsoft Outlook 12 Microsoft Word 129 MMS 81 MobileMe 13, 19, 20, 84 getting help 159 push accounts 15 searching email 71 security features 14, 38 sending photos to a gallery 82 setting up account 13 syncing 59, 73 model number 117 Mono Audio 147 movies rented 11, 53 syncing 9 music lyrics 44 managing manually 11 previewing 133 purchasing 133 searching 48
Index
settings 123 syncing 9, 11, 40 music videos syncing 9
N
navigating. See panning, scrolling Network activity status icon 18 Nike + iPod settings 130, 138 Notes 107 searching 107 syncing 9 NTSC 124
O
on-the-go playlists 50 orientation, changing 55 Outlook Express. See Windows Address Book Outlook. See Microsoft Outlook overview, iPod touch applications 19
P
pairing with Bluetooth headphones 34 PAL 124 panning maps 94 webpages 56 parental controls. See Restrictions passcode 119 pasting images 82 text 29 pausing songs and videos 34 PC system requirements 7 photo albums 81 photos, syncing 9 Photos assigning photos to contacts 83 emailing photos 81 playing music during slideshow 81 sending in email messages 67 settings 81, 124 syncing 11, 79 using photos as wallpaper 83 viewing slideshows 81 zooming photos 80 playlists, making 50 plug-ins 129 podcasts downloading 134 streaming 134 syncing 9, 11, 40 pop-ups 129
165
power, low 37 previewing music 133 videos 134 problems. See troubleshooting purchased content syncing 65, 135 purchasing applications 60 iTunes content 41 music 131, 133 videos 133 push accounts 15, 126
R
reading email 68 rechargeable batteries 37 removing backups 157 rented movies 53 renting movies 11 videos 133 repeating 45 replacing battery 37, 159 replying to messages 67 requirements for using iPod touch 7 reset iPod touch 39 resizing webpage columns 56 restarting 39 restoring iPod touch software 158 restoring settings and information 157 restrictions, setting 119 rotor control 142
S
Safari AutoFill 58, 129 bookmarking webpages 58 clearing cache 130 cookies 130 Debug Console 130 developer settings 130 fraud warning 129 Home screen web clips 59 navigating 56 opening webpages 55, 57 plug-ins 129 pop-ups 129 reloading webpages 56 resizing columns to fit screen 56 saving images to your Photo Library 57 searching the web 58 security 129 sending webpage addresses in email 57 settings 129
166
Index
stopping webpages from loading 56 syncing bookmarks 9, 12 typing in text fields 57 zooming webpages 56 satellite view 96 screen 116 setting to adjust automatically 116 using 24 screen reader 8 scrolling about 24 maps 94 webpages 56 search engine 129 searching App Store 60 calendars 75 global 32 iTunes Music Store 132 Mail messages 71 music 48 notes 107 videos 52 searching the web 58 searching YouTube videos 87 security erase data after ten failed passcode attempts 119 features 37 Find My iPod touch 14, 38 setting passcode for iPod touch 119 web 129 selecting text 29 sending email 66 photos from Photos 81 serial number, finding 117 service and support information 159 settings accessibility 122 accounts 125 alarms 110 alerts 78 auto-capitalization 121 auto-correction 28, 121 auto-lock 118 Bluetooth 118 brightness 116 Calendar 78 date and time 121 developer 130 email server 126 Fetch New Data 126 international 122 language 122 location services 118 Mail, Contacts, Calendars 125
Mail 125 music 123 Nike + iPod 130, 138 notifications 116 passcode lock 119 Photos 81, 124 resetting 122 restrictions 119 Safari 58, 129 screen brightness 116 security 129 Shake to Shuffle 123 slideshow 81 sound 78 Store 125 temperature 102 TV out 124 video 124 VoiceOver 139 VPN 118 wallpaper 83, 117 Shake to Shuffle 42, 123 sharing photos in email messages 67 videos in email messages 67 shuffling songs 45 signatures, email 128 sleep timer 54 slideshows 81 settings 124 software getting help 159 updating and restoring 158 version 117 sound adjusting alerts volume 117 adjusting volume 23 no sound 152 setting limit 123 Sound Check 123 sound effects 23 sounds adjusting volume 34 calendar alert 78 turning on or off 117 Speak Auto-text 147 SSL 126 Starbucks, browsing and purchasing music 132 status icons 18 stock information, Yahoo! 92 Stocks, adding and deleting quotes 91 stopwatch, using 110 storage capacity 117 Store, settings 125 streaming podcasts 134 subtitles 52
Index
surfing the web 55 syncing calendars 73 Google Contacts 12, 152 iTunes library contents 9 Microsoft Exchange 13, 73 MobileMe 13, 73 photos 79 preventing 13 purchased songs 135 “Sync in progress” message 16 webpage bookmarks 59 Yahoo! Address Book 152 syncing voice memos 106 system requirements 7
T
telephone number format 122 text cutting or copying 29 pasting 29 typing 27 Text typing in webpages 57 time format 122 time zone support 75, 128 time, setting 121 timer setting 111 sleep 111 touchscreen, using 24 traffic conditions, checking 99 transfer settings and information 156 transferring purchased content 42, 135 transferring purchased content 65 transferring settings and information 157 transition effects, setting 124 Triple-click Home setting 148 troubleshooting backing up 156 can’t open an attachment 155 can’t purchase music or applications 154 display freezes 150 GAL contacts don’t appear 155 iPod touch doesn’t appear in iTunes 151 iPod touch doesn’t respond 150 iPod touch doesn’t turn on 150 no sound 152 problems playing songs or other content 153 restarting 39 software update and restore 158 turning iPod touch on or off 22 TV shows syncing 9, 11 TV shows, syncing 9
167
TV signal settings 124 typing keyboard 27 in webpage text fields 57
U
undoing edits 29 unlocking iPod touch 23 unpairing Bluetooth device 35 unread messages, marking 70 unsupported audio file formats 153 updating iPod touch software 158 USB cable 8, 18 port 8
V
video settings 124 videos alternate audio language 52 converting for iPod touch 42 deleting 53 previewing 134 purchasing 133 searching 52 sending in email messages 67 subtitles 52 syncing 11, 40 watching on a TV 53 See also iPod, Music, YouTube virtual private network. See VPN Voice Control playing songs 33, 46 using with headset 34 Voice Memos emailing 106 recording 103 syncing 106 trimming 105 VoiceOver about 140 entering and editing text 145 gestures 141 rotor control 142 setting up iPod touch using 8 volume adjusting 23, 34 adjusting for alerts 117 setting limit 123 VPN accessing networks using 36 configuring 118 set up by configuration profile 15 turning on or off 118
168
Index
W
waking iPod touch 23 wallpaper choosing 117 settings 83 using photo as 83 warranty service 159 watching videos on a TV 53 weather information, Yahoo! 102 Weather adding cities 102 deleting cities 102 temperature settings 102 viewing 101 web. See Safari web clips, adding to Home screen 59 webpages bookmarking 58 syncing 9, 12 White on Black 147 Wi-Fi forgetting a network 115 joining networks 35, 115 status icon 18 turning on or off 115 Windows Address Book 12 Windows XP 7 WMA files, converting 153 “Works with iPod touch” logo 103 World Clock 109
Y
Yahoo! Address Book 12, 152 search engine 129 search using 58 searching using 58 stock information 92 weather information 102 YouTube bookmarking videos 88 browsing videos 86 emailing links 88 playing videos 87 searching for videos 87
Z
Zoom (Accessibility feature) 146 zooming email messages 68 maps 94 photos 80 webpages 56
K Apple Inc. © 2009 Apple Inc. All rights reserved. Apple, the Apple logo, Cover Flow, iCal, iPhoto, iPod, iTunes, Keynote, Mac, Macintosh, Mac OS, Numbers, Pages, Safari, and Spotlight are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Apple Inc. is under license. Adobe and Photoshop are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the U.S. and/or other countries.
Finder, iPhone, Multi-Touch, and Shuffle are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Other company and product names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective companies.
iTunes Store is a service mark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Mention of third-party products is for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation. Apple assumes no responsibility with regard to the performance or use of these products. All understandings, agreements, or warranties, if any, take place directly between the vendors and the prospective users. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Apple is not responsible for printing or clerical errors.
App Store and MobileMe are service marks of Apple Inc. The Nike + iPod Sport Kit is covered by one or more of U.S. patent numbers 6,018,705, 6,052,654, 6,493,652, 6,298,314, 6,611,789, 6,876,947, and 6,882,955, either alone or when used in combination with a Nike + iPod enabled iPod media player.
019-1594/2009-09
Contents
2
7 7 7 8 8 9 13 15 16
Chapter 1: Getting Started
17 17 19 22 24 27 32 33 34 34 35 36 37 38 39
Chapter 2: Basics
40 40 42 50 54 54
Chapter 3: Music and Video
Viewing the User Guide on iPod touch What You Need Registering iPod touch Setting Up iPod touch Using VoiceOver Syncing Mail, Contacts, and Calendar Accounts Installing Configuration Profiles Disconnecting iPod touch from Your Computer iPod touch at a Glance Home Screen Buttons Touchscreen Onscreen Keyboard Searching Voice Control Stereo Headset Bluetooth Headphones Connecting to the Internet Battery Security Features Cleaning iPod touch Restarting and Resetting iPod touch Getting Music, Video, and More Music and Other Audio Videos Setting a Sleep Timer Changing the Browse Buttons
55 55 58 58 59
Chapter 4: Safari
60 60 60 62 63 64 64 65 65
Chapter 5: App Store
66 66 66 67 71 71
Chapter 6: Mail
73 73 73 74 75 75 76 77 78
Chapter 7: Calendar
79 79 79 79 81 81 83 83
Chapter 8: Photos
84 84
Chapter 9: Contacts
Viewing Webpages Searching the Web Bookmarks Web Clips About the App Store Browsing and Searching Info Screen Downloading Applications Deleting Applications Writing Reviews Updating Applications Syncing Purchased Applications Setting Up Email Accounts Sending Email Checking and Reading Email Searching Email Organizing Email About Calendar Syncing Calendars Viewing Your Calendar Searching Calendars Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars Adding Calendar Events to iPod touch Responding to Meeting Invitations Alerts About Photos Syncing Photos and Videos with Your Computer Viewing Photos and Videos Slideshows Sharing Photos and Videos Assigning a Photo to a Contact Wallpaper Adding Contacts Contents
3
85 85
Searching Contacts Managing Contacts on iPod touch
86 86 87 88 89 89 90
Chapter 10: YouTube
91 91 92
Chapter 11: Stocks
93 93 97 97 99 99
Chapter 12: Maps
Finding and Viewing Videos Controlling Video Playback Managing Videos Getting More Information Using YouTube Account Features Changing the Browse Buttons Viewing Stock Quotes Getting More Information Finding and Viewing Locations Bookmarking Locations Getting Directions Showing Traffic Conditions Finding and Contacting Businesses
101 Chapter 13: Weather 101 Viewing Weather Summaries 102 Getting More Weather Information 103 103 104 104 105 106 106
Chapter 14: Voice Memos
107 107 107 108 108
Chapter 15: Notes
Recording Voice Memos Listening to Voice Memos Managing Voice Memos Trimming Voice Memos Sharing Voice Memos Syncing Voice Memos Writing and Reading Notes Searching Notes Emailing Notes Syncing Notes
109 Chapter 16: Clock 109 World Clocks 110 Alarms 110 Stopwatch
4
Contents
111 Timer 112 Chapter 17: Calculator 112 Using the Calculator 112 Standard Memory Functions 113 Scientific Calculator Keys 115 115 116 116 116 117 123 124 124 125 125 129 130
Chapter 18: Settings
131 131 132 133 133 134 135 135 135 136 136
Chapter 19: iTunes Store
Wi-Fi VPN Notifications Brightness General Music Video Photos Store Mail, Contacts, Calendars Safari Nike + iPod About the iTunes Store Finding Music, Videos, and More Purchasing Music or Audiobooks Purchasing or Renting Videos Streaming or Downloading Podcasts Checking Download Status Syncing Purchased Content Changing the Browse Buttons Viewing Account Information Verifying Purchases
137 Chapter 20: Nike + iPod 137 Activating Nike + iPod 138 Additional Nike + iPod Settings 139 139 140 146 147 147 147
Chapter 21: Accessibility Accessibility Features VoiceOver Zoom White on Black Mono Audio Speak Auto-text Contents
5
148 Triple-click Home 148 Closed Captioning and Other Helpful Features
6
150 150 150 151 152 153 154 156 158
Appendix A: Troubleshooting
159 159 160 160 161
Appendix B: Other Resources
162
Index
Apple iPod touch Support Site General iTunes and Syncing Sound, Music, and Video iTunes Stores Safari, Mail, and Contacts Backing Up iPod touch Updating and Restoring iPod touch Software Safety, Software, and Service Information Viewing the User Guide on iPod touch Disposal and Recycling Information Apple and the Environment
Contents
1
Getting Started
·
WARNING: To avoid injury, read all operating instructions in this guide and safety information in the iPod touch Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/ipodtouch before using iPod touch.
Viewing the User Guide on iPod touch
The iPod touch User Guide, optimized for viewing on iPod touch, is available at help. apple.com/ipodtouch. View the guide on iPod touch: In Safari, tap bookmark.
, then tap the iPod touch User Guide
Add an icon for the guide to the Home screen: When viewing the guide, tap , then tap “Add to Home Screen.” The iPod touch User Guide is available in many languages. View the guide in a different language: Tap “Change Language” at the bottom of the screen on the main contents page, then choose the language you want.
What You Need
To use iPod touch, you need: • A Mac or a PC with a USB 2.0 port and one of the following operating systems: • Mac OS X version 10.4.11 or later; version 10.5.7 or later is required for
syncing Notes • Windows XP Home or Professional with Service Pack 3 or later • Windows Vista Home Premium, Business, Enterprise, or Ultimate edition • Display resolution on your computer set to 1024 x 768 or higher • iTunes 9 or later, available at www.itunes.com/download • QuickTime 7.6.2 or later • An iTunes Store account (for purchases from the iTunes Store or App Store) • An Internet connection for your computer (broadband recommended)
7
Registering iPod touch
Before you can use any of the iPod touch features, you must use iTunes to set up iPod touch. You can also register iPod touch and create an iTunes Store account (not available in some countries) if you don’t already have one.
Register iPod touch: 1 Download and install the latest version of iTunes from www.itunes.com/download.
2 Connect iPod touch to a USB 2.0 port on your Mac or PC using the cable that came with iPod touch.
3 Follow the onscreen instructions in iTunes to register iPod touch and sync iPod touch with music, video, and other content from your iTunes library, and with your contacts, calendars, and bookmarks on your computer.
Setting Up iPod touch Using VoiceOver
If you’re visually impaired, VoiceOver (available only on Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) can help you set up iPod touch without a sighted assistant. VoiceOver describes aloud what appears on the screen, so you can use iPod touch without seeing it. When you connect iPod touch to your computer, iTunes detects whether you’re using a compatible screen reader on your computer, such as VoiceOver on a Mac or GW Micro Window-Eyes on a PC, and automatically enables VoiceOver on iPod touch. A sighted user can also enable VoiceOver on iPod touch for you, using Accessibility settings. See “Using VoiceOver” on page 144. Note: VoiceOver isn’t available in all languages.
8
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Syncing About Syncing With iPod touch, it’s easy to have instant access to your music, video, downloaded applications, and other iTunes library content. iTunes can sync all this information to iPod touch, and your contacts, calendars, and your browser bookmarks as well. iTunes lets you specify the information and content on your computer that you want to sync with iPod touch. By default, iTunes syncs automatically with iPod touch whenever you connect iPod touch to your computer.
Syncing with iTunes You can set iTunes to sync any or all of the following: • Music and audiobooks • Movies • TV Shows • Games and applications downloaded from the iTunes Store • Music videos • Podcasts • iTunes U collections • Photos and videos (in your computer’s photo application or folder) • Contacts—names, phone numbers, addresses, email addresses, and more • Calendars—appointments and events • Notes (requires Mac OS X version 10.5.7 or later on a Mac, or Microsoft Outlook 2003
or 2007 on a PC) • Email account settings • Webpage bookmarks
You can adjust sync settings whenever iPod touch is connected to your computer. Music, audiobooks, podcasts, iTunes U collections, videos, and applications can be synced from your iTunes library. If you don’t already have content in iTunes, the iTunes Store (available in some countries) makes it easy to preview and download content to iTunes. You can also add music to your iTunes library from your CDs. To learn about iTunes and the iTunes Store, open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help. Contacts, calendars, notes, and webpage bookmarks are synced with applications on your computer, as described in the following section. Contacts and calendars are synced both ways between your computer and iPod touch. New entries or changes you make on iPod touch are synced to your computer, and vice versa. Notes and webpage bookmarks are also synced both ways. Photos and videos (Mac only) can be synced from an application or from a folder. Chapter 1 Getting Started
9
Email account settings are synced only from your computer’s email application to iPod touch. This allows you to customize your email accounts on iPod touch without affecting email account settings on your computer. Note: You can also set up email accounts directly on iPod touch. See “Mail, Contacts, and Calendar Accounts.” Purchases you make on iPod touch in the iTunes Store or the App Store are synced back to your iTunes library. You can also purchase or download content and applications directly from the iTunes Store on your computer, and then sync them to iPod touch. You can set iPod touch to sync with only a portion of what’s on your computer. For example, you might want to sync only certain music playlists, or only unwatched video podcasts. Important: You should be logged in to your own computer user account before connecting iPod touch.
Set up iTunes syncing: 1 Connect iPod touch to your computer, and open iTunes (if it doesn’t open automatically).
2 In iTunes, select iPod touch in the sidebar.
3 Configure the sync settings in each of the settings panes. See the following section for descriptions of the panes.
4 Click Apply in the lower-right corner of the screen. By default, “Open iTunes when this iPod is connected” is selected.
iPod touch Settings Panes in iTunes The following sections provide an overview of each of the iPod touch settings panes. For more information, open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help.
10
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Summary Pane Select “Open iTunes when this iPod is connected” to have iTunes open and sync iPod touch automatically whenever you connect it to your computer. Deselect this option if you want to sync only by clicking the Sync button in iTunes. For more information about preventing automatic syncing, see “Preventing Automatic Syncing” on page 13. Select “Sync only checked songs and videos” if you want iTunes to skip unchecked items in your iTunes library when syncing. Select “Manually manage music and videos” to turn off automatic syncing in the Music and Video settings panes. See “Manually Managing Content” on page 41. Select “Encrypt iPod backup” if you want to encrypt the information stored on your computer when iTunes makes a backup. Encrypted backups are indicated by a padlock icon, and a password is required to restore the information to iPod touch. See “Backing Up iPod touch” on page 156. Click Configure Universal Access to turn on Accessibility features (available only on Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more). See Chapter 21, “Accessibility,” on page 139. Applications Pane Use the Applications pane to specify which App Store applications to sync on iPod touch, or to arrange your Home screen (requires iTunes 9 or later). Any applications downloaded directly to iPod touch are automatically backed up to your iTunes library when you sync. If you manually delete an application on iPod touch, you can reinstall it from this pane as long as it was previously synced. Music, Movies, TV Shows, Podcasts, and iTunes U Panes Use these panes to specify the media you want to sync. You can sync all music, movies, TV shows, podcasts, and iTunes U collections, or select the content you want on iPod touch. If you want to watch rented movies on iPod touch, transfer them to iPod touch using the Movies pane in iTunes. If there’s not enough room on iPod touch for all the media you’ve specified, iTunes can create a special playlist and set it to sync with iPod touch. Note: The iTunes U pane appears only in iTunes 9 or later. In earlier versions of iTunes, iTunes U content appeared in the Podcasts pane. Photos Pane You can sync photos and videos (Mac only, iTunes 9 required) with iPhoto 4.0.3 or later, or Aperture on a Mac; or with Adobe Photoshop Elements 3.0 or later on a PC. You can also sync photos and videos in any folder on your computer that contains images.
Chapter 1 Getting Started
11
Info Pane The Info pane lets you configure the sync settings for your contacts, calendars, email accounts, and web browser. • Contacts You can sync contacts with applications such as Mac OS X Address Book, Yahoo! Address Book, and Google Contacts on a Mac, or with Yahoo! Address Book, Google Contacts, Windows Address Book (Outlook Express), Windows Vista Contacts, or Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC. (On a Mac, you can sync contacts with multiple applications. On a PC, you can sync contacts with only one application at a time.) If you sync with Yahoo! Address Book, you only need to click Configure to enter your new login information when you change your Yahoo! ID or password after you’ve set up syncing. • Calendars
You can sync calendars from applications such as iCal on a Mac, or from Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC. (On a Mac, you can sync calendars with multiple applications. On a PC, you can sync calendars with only one application at a time.) • Web Browser
You can sync bookmarks from Safari on a Mac, or from Safari or Microsoft Internet Explorer on a PC. • Notes
Sync notes in the Notes application on iPod touch with notes in Mail on a Mac or with Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC. (On a Mac, you must have Mac OS version 10.5.7 or later installed to sync notes.) • Mail Accounts
You can sync email account settings from Mail on a Mac, and from Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 or Outlook Express on a PC. Account settings are only transferred from your computer to iPod touch. Changes you make to an email account on iPod touch don’t affect the account on your computer. Note: The password for your Yahoo! email account isn’t saved on your computer, so it can’t be synced and must be entered on iPod touch. In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” tap your Yahoo! account, and enter the password. • Advanced
These options let you replace the information on iPod touch with the information on your computer during the next sync.
12
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Preventing Automatic Syncing You can prevent iPod touch from syncing automatically when you connect iPod touch to a computer other than the one you usually sync with. Turn off automatic syncing for iPod touch: Connect iPod touch to your computer. In iTunes, select iPod touch in the sidebar, then click the Summary tab. Deselect “Open iTunes when this iPod is connected.” You can still sync by clicking the Sync button. Prevent automatic syncing for all iPhones and iPods: In iTunes choose iTunes > Preferences (on a Mac) or Edit > Preferences (on a PC), click Devices, and select “Disable automatic syncing for all iPhones and iPods.” If this checkbox is selected, iPod touch won’t sync automatically, even if “Open iTunes when this iPod is connected” is selected in the Summary pane. Prevent automatic syncing one time, without changing settings: Open iTunes, connect iPod touch to your computer, then press and hold Command-Option (on a Mac) or Shift-Control (on a PC) until you see iPod touch appear in the sidebar. Sync manually: In iTunes, select iPod touch in the sidebar, then click Sync in the bottom-right corner of the window. Or, if you’ve changed any sync settings, click Apply.
Mail, Contacts, and Calendar Accounts
iPod touch works with MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, and many of the most popular email systems.
Setting Up Accounts MobileMe and Microsoft Exchange provide not only email, but contact and calendar information that can be synced to iPod touch automatically, over the air. MobileMe can also sync your bookmarks on iPod touch with Safari on a Mac, or with Safari or Microsoft Internet Explorer on a PC. You set up MobileMe, Exchange, and other email accounts directly on iPod touch. iPod touch uses the Exchange ActiveSync protocol to sync email, calendars, and contacts with the following versions of Microsoft Exchange: • Exchange Server 2003 Service Pack 2 • Exchange Server 2007 Service Pack 1
For many popular email accounts, iPod touch automatically enters most of the settings for you. If you don’t already have an email account, you can get a free account online at www.yahoo.com, www.google.com, or www.aol.com. You can also try MobileMe, free for 60 days. Go to www.me.com.
Chapter 1 Getting Started
13
Set up an account on iPod touch: 1 From the iPod touch Home screen, tap Settings.
2 Tap “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” then tap Add Account.
3 Tap an account type: • Microsoft Exchange • MobileMe • Google email • Yahoo! Mail • AOL • Other
4 Enter your account information and tap Save. Your service provider or system administrator can provide the account settings you need. Exchange accounts: Enter your complete email address, domain (optional), user name, password, and a description. The description can be whatever you like. iPod touch supports Microsoft’s Autodiscovery service, which uses your user name and password to determine the address of the Exchange server. If the server’s address can’t be determined, you’re asked to enter it. (Enter the complete address in the Server field.) Once you connect to the Exchange server, you may be prompted to change your passcode to match the policies set on the server.
5 If you’re setting up a MobileMe or Microsoft Exchange account, tap the items you want to use on iPod touch—mail, contacts, calendars, and bookmarks (MobileMe only). MobileMe includes the Find My iPod touch feature that helps you locate iPod touch if it’s been lost or stolen, and remotely lock, set a passcode, or erase the information on iPod touch if necessary. See “Security Features” on page 37. If you enable Find My iPod touch for your MobileMe account, make sure that Push is turned on for Fetch New Data. In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Fetch New Data, and if Push is off, tap to turn it on. For Exchange accounts, you can set how many days of email you want to sync to iPod touch. If you already have contact or calendar information on iPod touch when you enable the account, iPod touch asks what you want to do with existing information on iPod touch. You can choose to merge the existing data into your MobileMe or Exchange account. If you don’t merge the data, you can choose to keep it in a separate account on iPod touch (the account is labeled “On My iPod touch”), or delete it. Existing bookmarks can only be merged or deleted.
14
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Similarly, when you disable contacts or calendars in an MobileMe or Exchange account, or if you delete an account, iPod touch asks if you want to keep information or delete it. You can add contacts using an LDAP account if your company or organization supports it. See “Adding Contacts” on page 84. You can subscribe to CalDAV or iCal (.ics) calendars. See “Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars” on page 75.
Push Accounts MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, and Yahoo! Mail are known as “push” accounts. When new information is available, such as the arrival of an email message, the information is automatically delivered (pushed) to iPod touch. (In contrast, “fetch” services require your email software to periodically check with your service provider to see if new messages have arrived, and then request them to be delivered.) MobileMe and Exchange also use push to sync your contacts, calendars, and bookmarks (MobileMe only) if you have those items selected in the account settings. Synced information is transferred automatically over your wireless connection; you don’t need to connect iPod touch to your computer to sync. iPod touch can receive pushed data over a Wi-Fi connection only when iPod touch is awake (the screen is on, or iPod touch is connected to your computer or a power adapter).
Installing Configuration Profiles
If you’re in an enterprise environment, you may be able to set up accounts and other items on iPod touch by installing a configuration profile. Configuration profiles provide a way for system administrators to quickly set up your iPod touch to work with the information systems at your company, school, or organization. For example, a configuration profile might set up your iPod touch to access the Microsoft Exchange servers at work, enabling iPod touch to access your Exchange email, calendars, and contacts. Configuration profiles can configure multiple settings on iPod touch all at once. For example, a configuration profile can set up your Microsoft Exchange account, VPN account, and certificates for secure access to your company’s network and information. A configuration profile may turn on the Passcode Lock, requiring you to create and enter a passcode for using iPod touch. Your system administrator may distribute configuration profiles by email or by putting them on a secure webpage. A system administrator may also install a configuration profile directly on iPod touch for you.
Chapter 1 Getting Started
15
Install a configuration profile: 1 Using iPod touch, open the email message or download the configuration profile from the website provided by your system administrator.
2 When the configuration profile opens, tap Install.
3 Enter passwords and other information as requested. Important: You may be asked to verify that the configuration profile is trusted. If in doubt, consult your system administrator before installing a configuration profile. Settings provided by a configuration profile cannot be altered. If you want to change these settings, you must first remove the configuration profile or install an updated configuration profile. Remove a profile: In Settings, choose General > Profile, then select the configuration profile and tap Remove. Removing a configuration profile deletes the settings and all other information installed by the configuration profile from iPod touch.
Disconnecting iPod touch from Your Computer
Unless iPod touch is syncing with your computer, you can disconnect it from your computer at any time. When iPod touch is syncing with your computer, iPod touch shows “Sync in progress.” If you disconnect iPod touch before it finishes syncing, some data may not get transferred. When iPod touch finishes syncing, iTunes shows “iPod touch sync is complete.” Cancel a sync: Drag the slider on iPod touch.
16
Chapter 1 Getting Started
2
Basics
iPod touch at a Glance Sleep/Wake button
Wi-Fi antenna
Status bar Volume buttons Application icons
Internal speaker
Touchscreen
Home button Dock connector
Headphones port
Your Home screen may look different, depending on the model of iPod touch you have and whether you have rearranged its icons.
iPod touch Included Accessories
Stereo headset
Dock Connector to USB Cable
17
Item
What you can do with it
Apple Earphones with Remote and Mic (Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) Apple Earphones (8 GB model)
Listen to music, audiobooks, podcasts, and videos. Use the built-in microphone to speak. Press the center button to play or pause a song, or press twice quickly to skip to the next track. Use the + and – buttons to adjust the volume (Apple Earphones with Remote and Mic included only with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more). Press and hold the center button to use Voice Control (available only on Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more).
Dock Connector to USB Cable
Use the cable to connect iPod touch to your computer to sync and charge, or to the USB power adapter (sold separately) to charge. The cable can be used with the optional dock or plugged directly into iPod touch.
Status Icons The icons in the status bar at the top of the screen give information about iPod touch: Status icon
18
What it means Wi-Fi
Shows that iPod touch is connected to the Internet over a Wi-Fi network. The more bars, the stronger the connection. See “Joining a Wi-Fi Network” on page 35.
Network activity
Shows network activity. Some third-party applications may also use this icon to indicate an active process.
VPN
Shows that you are connected to a network using VPN. See “Network” on page 117.
Lock
Shows that iPod touch is locked. See “Sleep/Wake Button.”
Play
Shows that a song, audiobook, or podcast is playing. See “Playing Songs” on page 42.
Alarm
Shows that an alarm is set. See “Alarms” on page 110.
Bluetooth
Blue or white icon: Bluetooth® (not available on first-generation iPod touch) is on and a device, such as a headset, is connected. Gray icon: Bluetooth is on, but no device is connected. No icon: Bluetooth is turned off.
Battery
Shows battery level or charging status. See “Charging the Battery” on page 36.
Chapter 2 Basics
Home Screen
Press the Home button at any time to go to the Home screen, which contains your iPod touch applications. Tap any application icon to get started.
iPod touch Applications The following applications are included with iPod touch: Listen to your songs, audiobooks, and podcasts. Create on-the-go playlists, or use Genius to create playlists for you. Listen to Genius Mixes of songs from your library. Music
Videos
Safari
App Store
Calendar
Photos
Watch purchased or rented movies, music videos, video podcasts, and TV shows on the go. Or connect iPod touch to your TV to watch on a larger screen (TV connection requires cable available for purchase separately). Browse websites over Wi-Fi. Rotate iPod touch sideways for widescreen viewing. Double-tap to zoom in or out—Safari automatically fits the webpage column to the iPod touch screen for easy reading. Open multiple pages. Sync bookmarks with Safari or Microsoft Internet Explorer on your computer. Add Safari web clips to the Home screen for fast access to favorite websites. Save images from websites to your Photo Library. Search the App Store for iPod touch applications you can purchase or download using your Wi-Fi connection. Read reviews or write your own reviews for your favorite apps. Download and install the applications on your Home screen. iPod touch works with MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, and many of the most popular email systems—including Yahoo! Mail, Google email, and AOL—as well as most industry-standard POP3 and IMAP email systems. View PDFs and other attachments within Mail. Save attached photos and graphics to your Photo Library. View and search your MobileMe, iCal, Microsoft Entourage, Microsoft Outlook, or Microsoft Exchange calendars. Enter events on iPod touch and they get synced back to the calendar on your computer. Subscribe to calendars. Set alerts to remind you of events, appointments, and deadlines. View photos and videos (only on Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) received in Mail messages, or synced from your computer’s photo application (video syncing on Macs only). View them in portrait or landscape mode. Zoom in on photos for a closer look. Watch a slideshow. Email photos and videos, or publish them to MobileMe galleries. Assign images to contacts, and use them as wallpaper.
Chapter 2 Basics
19
Contacts
YouTube
Stocks
Maps
Get contact information synced from MobileMe, Mac OS X Address Book, Yahoo! Address Book, Google Contacts, Windows Address Book (Outlook Express), Microsoft Outlook, or Microsoft Exchange. Search, add, change, or delete contacts, which get synced back to your computer. Play videos from YouTube’s online collection. Search for any video, or browse featured, most viewed, most recently updated, and top-rated videos. Set up and log in to your YouTube account—then rate videos, sync your favorites, show subscriptions, and more. Watch your favorite stocks, updated automatically from the Internet. View company news and current trading information, such as opening or average price, trading volume, or market capitalization. Rotate iPod touch to see detailed charts in landscape orientation. Drag your finger along the charts to track price points, or use two fingers to see a range between points. See a street map, satellite view, or hybrid view of locations around the world. Zoom in for a closer look, or check out the Google Street View. Find your current approximate location. Get detailed driving, public transit, or walking directions and see current highway traffic conditions. Find businesses in the area. Get current weather conditions and a six-day forecast. Add your favorite cities for a quick weather report anytime.
Weather
Voice Memos
Record voice memos on iPod touch. (Requires a compatible external microphone or headset with microphone. Not available on first-generation iPod touch.) Play them back on iPod touch or sync them with iTunes to listen to voice memos on your computer. Attach voice memos to email messages. Jot notes on the go—reminders, grocery lists, brilliant ideas. Send them in email.
Notes View the time in cities around the world—create clocks for your favorites. Set one or more alarms. Use the stopwatch, or set a countdown timer. Clock
20
Chapter 2 Basics
Add, subtract, multiply, and divide. Rotate iPod touch sideways to use expanded scientific functions. Calculator
Settings
iTunes
Adjust all iPod touch settings in one convenient place. Set your own volume limit for listening comfort. Set your wallpaper, screen brightness, and settings for network, mail, web, music, video, photos, and more. Set auto-lock and a passcode for security. Restrict access to explicit iTunes content and certain applications. Reset iPod touch. Search the iTunes Store for music, audiobooks, TV shows, music videos, and movies. Browse, preview, purchase, and download new releases, top items, and more. Rent movies to view on iPod touch. Stream and download podcasts. Read reviews or write your own reviews for your favorite store items.
When activated in Settings, Nike + iPod turns your iPod touch into a workout companion. Track your pace, time, and distance from one workout to the next and choose a song to power through your routine. (Requires select Nike shoes and a Nike + Nike + iPod iPod Sensor, sold separately. Not available on first-generation iPod touch.)
Note: Application functionality and availability may vary depending on the country or region where you purchase and use iPod touch.
Customizing the Home Screen You can customize the layout of icons on the Home screen—including the Dock icons along the bottom of the screen. If you want, arrange them over multiple Home screens.
Rearrange icons: 1 Touch and hold any Home screen icon until the icons begin to wiggle.
2 Arrange the icons by dragging them.
3 Press the Home
button to save your arrangement.
You can also add links to your favorite webpages on the Home screen. See “Web Clips” on page 59. You can also rearrange the Home screen icons and the order of the screens (in iTunes 9 or later) when iPod touch is connected to your computer. Select iPod touch in the iTunes sidebar, then click the Applications tab.
Chapter 2 Basics
21
Create additional Home screens: While arranging icons, drag an icon to the right edge of the screen until a new screen appears. You can flick to return to the original screen and drag more icons to the new screen.
You can create up to 11 screens. The number of dots above the Dock shows the number of screens you have, and indicates which screen you’re viewing. Switch to another Home screen: Flick left or right, or tap to the left or right of the row of dots. Go to the first Home screen: Press the Home
button.
Reset your Home screen to the default layout: Choose Settings > General > Reset and tap Reset Home Screen Layout.
Buttons
A few simple buttons make it easy to turn iPod touch on and off, and adjust the volume.
Sleep/Wake Button When you’re not using iPod touch you can lock it. When iPod touch is locked, nothing happens if you touch the screen. You can still listen to music and adjust the volume, and use the center button on your iPod touch headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) to play or pause a song. By default, if you don’t touch the screen for a minute, iPod touch locks automatically.
Sleep/Wake button
22
Chapter 2 Basics
Lock iPod touch
Press the Sleep/Wake button.
Unlock iPod touch
Press the Home button or the Sleep/Wake button, then drag the slider.
Turn iPod touch completely off
Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button for a few seconds until the red slider appears, then drag the slider.
Turn iPod touch on
Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears.
For information about changing how long before iPod touch locks, see “Auto-Lock” on page 118. For information about setting iPod touch to require a passcode to unlock it, see “Passcode Lock” on page 119.
Volume Buttons When you’re listening to songs, movies, or other media, the buttons on the side of iPod touch adjust the audio volume. Otherwise, the buttons control the volume for alerts and other sound effects. Note: Volume buttons aren’t included on the first-generation iPod touch. WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/ipodtouch. To adjust the volume, use the buttons on the side of iPod touch.
Volume up Volume down
To set a volume limit for music and videos on iPod touch, see “Music” on page 123.
Chapter 2 Basics
23
Touchscreen
The controls on the iPod touch touchscreen change dynamically depending on the task you’re performing.
Opening Applications Open an application: Tap an icon.
Close an application and return to the Home screen: Press the Home below the display.
button
Scrolling Drag up or down to scroll. On some screens such as webpages, you can also scroll side to side.
Dragging your finger to scroll won’t choose or activate anything on the screen.
24
Chapter 2 Basics
Flick to scroll quickly.
You can wait for the scrolling to come to a stop, or touch anywhere on the screen to stop it immediately. Touching the screen to stop scrolling won’t choose or activate anything. To quickly scroll to the top of a list, webpage, or email, just tap the status bar.
Lists Some lists have an index along the right side, which helps you navigate quickly. Find items in an indexed list: Tap a letter to jump to items starting with that letter. Drag your finger along the index to scroll quickly through the list.
Index
Choose an item: Tap an item in the list. Depending on the list, tapping an item can do different things—for example, it may open a new list, play a song, open an email, or show someone’s contact information. Return to a previous list: Tap the back button in the upper-left corner.
Chapter 2 Basics
25
Zooming In or Out When viewing photos, webpages, email, or maps, you can zoom in and out. Pinch your fingers together or apart. For photos and webpages, you can double-tap (tap twice quickly) to zoom in, then double-tap again to zoom out. For maps, double-tap to zoom in and tap once with two fingers to zoom out.
Viewing in Landscape Many iPod touch applications let you view the screen in either portrait or landscape orientation. Rotate iPod touch and the display rotates too, adjusting automatically to fit the new screen orientation.
You may prefer landscape for viewing webpages in Safari, or when entering text, for example. Webpages automatically scale to the wider screen in landscape, making the text and images larger. Similarly, the onscreen keyboard is larger in landscape, which may help increase your typing speed and accuracy. The following applications support both portrait and landscape orientation: • Music and Video • Mail • Safari • Notes • Contacts
26
Chapter 2 Basics
• Stocks • Photos • Calculator
Movies viewed in Video and YouTube appear only in landscape orientation. Street views in Maps also appear in landscape.
Onscreen Keyboard
Use the onscreen keyboard to enter text, such as contact information and web addresses.
Typing Depending on the application you’re using, the intelligent keyboard may automatically suggest corrections as you type to help prevent mistyped words.
Enter text: 1 Tap a text field, such as in a note or new contact, to bring up the keyboard.
2 Tap keys on the keyboard. Start by typing with just your index finger. As you get more proficient, you can type more quickly using two thumbs. As you type, each letter appears above your thumb or finger. If you touch the wrong key, you can slide your finger to the correct key. The letter isn’t entered until you release your finger from the key.
Chapter 2 Basics
27
Type uppercase
Tap the Shift key before tapping a letter. Or touch and hold the Shift key, then slide to a letter.
Quickly type a period and space
Double-tap the space bar. (You can turn this feature on or off in Settings > General > Keyboard.)
Turn caps lock on
key. The Shift key turns Double-tap the Shift blue, and all letters you type are uppercase. Tap the Shift key again to turn caps lock off. (You can turn this feature on or off in Settings > General > Keyboard.)
Show numbers, punctuation, or symbols
Tap the Number key. Tap the Symbol to see additional punctuation and symbols.
Type letters or symbols that aren’t on the keyboard
Touch and hold the related letter or symbol, then slide to choose a variation.
key
Dictionary For many languages, iPod touch has dictionaries to help you type. The appropriate dictionary is activated automatically when you select a supported keyboard. For a list of supported languages, see www.apple.com/ipodtouch/specs.html. iPod touch uses the active dictionary to suggest corrections or complete the word you’re typing. You don’t need to interrupt your typing to accept the suggested word.
Suggested word
Accept or reject dictionary suggestions: mm To reject the suggested word, finish typing the word as you want it, then tap the “x” to dismiss the suggestion before typing anything else. Each time you reject a suggestion for the same word, iPod touch becomes more likely to accept your word. mm To use the suggested word, type a space, punctuation mark, or return character. Turn Auto-Correction on or off: Choose General > Keyboard and turn Auto-Correction on or off. Auto-Correction is on by default. Note: If you’re entering Chinese or Japanese, tap one of the suggested alternatives.
28
Chapter 2 Basics
Editing An onscreen magnifying glass helps you position the insertion point for typing and editing text. You can select text to cut, copy, and paste. Position the insertion point: Touch and hold to bring up the magnifying glass, then drag to position the insertion point.
Select text: Tap the insertion point to display the selection buttons. Tap Select to select the adjacent word or tap Select All to select all text. When you’re typing, you can also double-tap to select a word. In read-only documents, such as webpages or email you’ve received, touch and hold to select a word. Drag the grab points to select more or less text.
Cut or copy text: Select text, then tap Cut or Copy.
Paste text: Tap the insertion point and tap Paste. The last text that you cut or copied is inserted. Or select text and tap Paste to replace the text. Undo the last edit: Shake iPod touch and tap Undo.
Chapter 2 Basics
29
International Keyboards iPod touch provides keyboards that allow you to enter text in many different languages, including languages that read from right to left. For a complete list of supported keyboards, go to www.apple.com/ipodtouch/specs.html.
Turn international keyboards on or off: 1 In Settings, choose General > International > Keyboards. 2 Turn on the keyboards you want. Languages with more than one keyboard, such as Japanese and Chinese, indicate the number of keyboards available. Tap to choose a keyboard for that language. Switch keyboards if more than one keyboard is turned on
Tap to switch keyboards. When you tap the symbol, the name of the newly activated keyboard appears briefly.
Type letters, numbers, or symbols that aren’t on Touch and hold the related letter, number, or the keyboard symbol, then slide to choose a variation. On the Hebrew and Thai keyboards, for example, you can choose native numbers by touching and holding the related Arabic number.
30
Enter Japanese Kana
Use the Kana keypad to select syllables. For more syllable options, tap the arrow key and select another syllable or word from the window.
Enter Japanese QWERTY
Use the QWERTY keyboard to input code for Japanese syllables. As you type, suggested syllables appear. Tap the syllable to choose it.
Chapter 2 Basics
Enter Korean
Use the 2-Set Korean keyboard to type Hangul letters. To type double consonants or compound vowels, touch and hold the letter, then slide to choose the double letter.
Enter Simplified or Traditional Chinese Pinyin
Use the QWERTY keyboard to enter Pinyin for Chinese characters. As you type, suggested Chinese characters appear. Tap a character to choose it, or continue entering Pinyin to see more character options.
Enter Traditional Chinese Zhuyin
Use the keyboard to enter Zhuyin letters. As you type, suggested Chinese characters appear. Tap a character to choose it, or continue entering Zhuyin to see more character options. After you type an initial letter, the keyboard changes to show more letters.
Enter handwritten Simplified or Traditional Chinese
Use the touchpad to enter Chinese characters with your finger. As you write character strokes, iPod touch recognizes them and shows matching characters in a list, with the closest match at the top. When you choose a character, its related characters appear in the list as additional choices. You can get some complex characters by entering two or more component characters. For example, enter 魚 (fish), then 巤 (bristle), to get 鱲 (partial name of Hong Kong International Airport), which appears in the character list with an arrow next to it. Tap the character to replace the characters you entered.
When Simplified or Traditional Chinese handwriting formats are turned on, you can enter Chinese characters with your finger, as shown:
Touchpad
Chapter 2 Basics
31
Searching
You can search many applications on iPod touch, including Mail, Calendar, Music, Video, Notes, and Contacts. You can search an individual application, or search all the applications at once using Spotlight.
Go to Spotlight: From the main page of the Home screen, flick left to right. If you’re on the main Home screen page, you can press the Home button to go to Spotlight. From the Spotlight page, press the Home button to return to the main Home screen page. You can also set iPod touch to go to Spotlight when you doubleclick the Home button. See “Home” on page 120. Search iPod touch: On the Spotlight page, enter text in the Search field. Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more of the results. Icons to the left of the search results let you know which application the results are from. Tap an item in the results list to open it. Application
What’s searched
Contacts
First, last, and company names
To, From, and Subject fields of all accounts (the text of messages isn’t searched)
Calendar
Event titles, invitees, and locations (notes aren’t searched)
Music and Video
Music (names of songs, artists, and albums) and the titles of podcasts, video, and audiobooks
Notes
Text of notes
Spotlight also searches the names of the native and installed applications on iPod touch, so if you have a lot of applications you may want to use Spotlight as a way to locate and open applications. Open applications from Spotlight: Enter the application name, then tap to open the application directly from the search results. Use the Search Results settings to choose which applications are searched and the order in which they’re searched. See “Home” on page 120.
32
Chapter 2 Basics
Voice Control
Voice Control (available only on Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) lets you control iPod music playback using voice commands. Note: Requires included headset or compatible accessory with microphone. Voice Control isn’t available in all languages.
Use Voice Control: Press and hold the Home button until the Voice Control screen appears and you hear a beep. You can also press and hold the center button on the iPod touch headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset). Use the following commands to play songs. Control music playback
Say “play” or “play music.” To pause, say “pause” or “pause music.” You can also say “next song” or “previous song.”
Play an album, artist, or playlist
Say “play,” then say “album,” “artist,” or “playlist” and the name.
Shuffle the current playlist
Say “shuffle.”
Find out more about the currently playing song Say “what’s playing,” “what song is this,” “who sings this song,” or “who is this song by.” Use Genius to play similar songs
Say “Genius,” “play more like this,” or “play more songs like this.”
Cancel Voice Control
Say “cancel” or “stop.”
For best results: • Speak clearly and naturally. • Say only iPod touch commands and names. Pause slightly between commands.
By default, Voice Control expects you to speak voice commands in the language that’s set for iPod touch (the General > International > Language setting). The Voice Control settings let you change the language for speaking voice commands. Some languages are available in different dialects or accents. Change language or country: In Settings, choose General > International > Voice Control and tap the language or country. Chapter 2 Basics
33
See“Using Voice Control with iPod” on page 46.
Stereo Headset
The headset included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more (shown here) features a microphone, volume buttons, and an integrated button that allows you to control audio and video playback.
Center button
Plug in the headset to listen to music or record a voice memo using the built-in microphone. Press the center button to control music playback, even when iPod touch is locked. You can also use the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset to control these functions. Pause a song or video
Press the center button once. Press again to resume playback.
Skip to the next song
Press the center button twice quickly.
Adjust the volume
Press the + or – button.
Use Voice Control
Press and hold the center button. See “Voice Control” on page 33.
Bluetooth Headphones
You can use iPod touch with Bluetooth stereo headphones for wireless listening (not available on first-generation iPod touch).
Pairing Headphones with iPod touch You must first pair your Bluetooth headphones with iPod touch before you can use them.
34
Pair Bluetooth headphones with iPod touch: 1 Follow the instructions that came with the headphones to make them discoverable.
2 In Settings, choose General > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth on.
3 Select the headphones and, if prompted, enter the passkey or PIN number. See the instructions about the passkey or PIN that came with your headphones.
Chapter 2 Basics
After you pair headphones with iPod touch, the product name and a Bluetooth audio icon appear on the screen when you are viewing audio or video playback controls. Tap to switch to a different audio output, such as the internal speaker.
Bluetooth Status The Bluetooth icon appears in the iPod touch status bar at the top of the screen: • (blue) or (white): Bluetooth is on and a device is connected to iPod touch. (The color depends on the current color of the status bar.) •
(gray): Bluetooth is on but no device is connected. If you’ve paired a device with iPod touch, it may be out of range or turned off.
• No Bluetooth icon: Bluetooth is turned off.
Unpairing a Bluetooth Device from iPod touch If you’ve paired iPod touch with one Bluetooth device and want to use another device instead, you must unpair the first device.
Unpair a Bluetooth device: 1 In Settings, choose General > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth on.
2 Choose the device and tap “Forget this Device.”
Connecting to the Internet
iPod touch connects to the Internet via Wi-Fi networks. iPod touch can join AirPort and other Wi-Fi networks at home, at work, or at Wi-Fi hotspots around the world. When joined to a Wi-Fi network that is connected to the Internet, iPod touch connects to the Internet automatically whenever you use Mail, Safari, YouTube, Stocks, Maps, Weather, the App Store, or the iTunes Store.
Joining a Wi-Fi Network The Wi-Fi settings let you turn on Wi-Fi and join Wi-Fi networks. Turn on Wi-Fi: Choose Settings > Wi-Fi and turn Wi-Fi on. Join a Wi-Fi network: Choose Settings > Wi-Fi, wait a moment as iPod touch detects networks in range, then select a network (fees may apply to join some Wi-Fi networks). If necessary, enter a password and tap Join (networks that require a password appear with a lock icon). Once you’ve joined a Wi-Fi network manually, iPod touch automatically connects to it whenever the network is in range. If more than one previously used network is in range, iPod touch joins the one last used. When iPod touch is connected to a Wi-Fi network, the Wi-Fi icon in the status bar at the top of the screen shows the connection strength. The more bars you see, the stronger the connection.
Chapter 2 Basics
35
For information about configuring Wi-Fi settings, see “Wi-Fi” on page 115.
VPN Access VPN (virtual private network) provides secure access over the Internet to private networks, such as the network at your company or school. Use Network settings to configure and turn on VPN. See “Network” on page 117. VPN can also be automatically set up by a configuration profile. See “Installing Configuration Profiles” on page 15. When VPN is set up by a configuration profile, iPod touch may turn on VPN automatically whenever it’s needed. Contact your system administrator for more information.
Battery
iPod touch has an internal rechargeable battery. The battery isn’t user accessible and should only be replaced by an authorized service provider.
Charging the Battery WARNING: For important safety information about charging iPod touch, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/ipodtouch. The battery icon in the upper-right corner shows the battery level or charging status.
Charging
Charged
Charge the battery and sync iPod touch: Connect iPod touch to your computer using the included Dock Connector to USB Cable.
Important: The iPod touch battery may drain instead of charge if iPod touch is connected to a computer that’s turned off or is in sleep or standby mode.
36
Chapter 2 Basics
If you charge the battery while syncing or using iPod touch, it may take longer to charge. You can also charge iPod touch using the Apple USB Power Adapter, available separately. Important: If iPod touch is very low on power, it may display one of the following images, indicating that iPod touch needs to charge for up to ten minutes before you can use it. If iPod touch is extremely low on power, the display may be blank for up to two minutes before one of the low-battery images appears.
or
Maximizing Battery Life iPod touch uses lithium-ion batteries. To learn more about how to maximize the lifespan and battery life of your iPod touch, go to www.apple.com/batteries.
Replacing the Battery Rechargeable batteries have a limited number of charge cycles and may eventually need to be replaced. The iPod touch battery isn’t user replaceable; it can only be replaced by an authorized service provider. For more information, go to www.apple.com/support/ipod/service/battery.
Security Features
Security features help protect the information on iPod touch from being accessed by others. You can set up a passcode that you must enter each time you turn on or wake up iPod touch. Set a passcode: Choose General > Passcode Lock and enter a 4-digit passcode, then enter the passcode again to verify it. iPod touch then requires you to enter the passcode to unlock it or to display the passcode lock settings. For addition information about using a passcode lock, see “Passcode Lock” on page 119.
Chapter 2 Basics
37
The Find My iPhone feature helps you locate iPod touch if it’s been lost or misplaced, and display a message on your iPod touch to help someone return it to you. It includes Remote Wipe, which lets you erase all your information on iPod touch in case you don’t recover it. The Remote Passcode Lock feature lets you remotely lock your iPod touch and create a new or replacement 4-digit passcode. Find My iPhone requires a MobileMe account. MobileMe is an online service, available by subscription. Go to www.apple.com/mobileme for more information. To enable this feature, turn on Find My iPod touch in your MobileMe account settings. See “Setting Up Accounts” on page 13. Find your iPod touch: Log in to your MobileMe account at www.me.com and go to the Find My iPhone pane. Follow the onscreen instructions to locate your device on a map and display a message on its screen along with an optional sound to help you find it. Remotely wipe information on your iPod touch: Log in to your MobileMe account at www.me.com, then go to the Find My iPhone pane. Click “Remote Wipe…,” and follow the onscreen instructions. A remote wipe is equivalent to the “Erase all content and settings” feature in Settings. It resets all settings to their defaults and erases all your information and media. See “Resetting iPod touch” on page 122. Remotely lock your iPod touch: Log in to your MobileMe account at www.me.com, then go to the Find My iPhone pane. Click Remote Passcode Lock, and follow the onscreen instructions.
Cleaning iPod touch
To clean iPod touch, unplug all cables and turn off iPod touch (press and hold the Sleep/ Wake button, then slide the onscreen slider). Then use a soft, slightly damp, lintfree cloth. Avoid getting moisture in openings. Don’t use window cleaners, household cleaners, aerosol sprays, solvents, alcohol, ammonia, or abrasives to clean iPod touch. For additional information about handling iPod touch, see the iPod touch Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/ipodtouch.
38
Chapter 2 Basics
Restarting and Resetting iPod touch
If something isn’t working right, try restarting, force quitting an application, or resetting iPod touch. Restart iPod touch: Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the red slider appears. Slide your finger across the slider to turn off iPod touch. To turn iPod touch back on, press and hold the Sleep/Wake until the Apple logo appears. If you can’t turn off iPod touch or if the problem continues, you may need to reset. A reset should be done only if turning iPod touch off and on doesn’t resolve the problem. Force quit an application: Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of iPod touch for a few seconds until a red slider appears, and then press and hold the Home button until the application quits. Reset iPod touch: Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button and the Home button at the same time for at least ten seconds, until the Apple logo appears. For more troubleshooting suggestions, see Appendix A, “Troubleshooting,” on page 150.
Chapter 2 Basics
39
Music and Video
3
iPod touch syncs with iTunes on your computer to get songs, videos, and other content you’ve collected in your iTunes library. For information about adding music and other media to your iTunes library, open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help.
Getting Music, Video, and More
To get music, video, and other content onto iPod touch, you can set up iTunes on your computer to automatically sync content in your library, or you can manually manage the media you put on iPod touch.
Syncing Content from iTunes You can transfer music, video, and more onto iPod touch by syncing content from iTunes. You can sync all of your media, or you can select specific songs, videos, podcasts, and iTunes U collections.
Set iTunes to sync iPod content automatically: 1 Connect iPod touch to your computer.
2 In iTunes, select iPod touch in the sidebar.
3 On the Music, Movies, TV Shows, Podcasts, and iTunes U tabs, select the content you want to sync to iPod touch. For example, you could set iTunes to sync selected music playlists and the three most recent episodes of your favorite video podcast.
4 Click Apply. Important: If you delete an item from iTunes, it will also be deleted from iPod touch the next time you sync. Only songs and videos encoded in formats that iPod touch supports are transferred to iPod touch. For information about which formats iPod touch supports, see “Song, Video, or Other Items Won’t Play” on page 153.
40
If there are more songs in your iTunes library than can fit on your iPod touch, iTunes offers to create a special playlist to sync with iPod touch. iTunes fills the playlist with random selections from your library. You can add or delete songs from the playlist and sync again. If you listen to part of a podcast or audiobook, your place in the story is included if you sync the content with iTunes. If you started listening to the story on iPod touch, you can pick up where you left off using iTunes on your computer—or vice versa. For more information about using iTunes to get music and other media onto your computer, see “What You Need” on page 7.
Manually Managing Content The manually managing feature lets you choose just the music, video, and podcasts you want to have on iPod touch.
Set up iPod touch for manually managing content: 1 Connect iPod touch to your computer.
2 In iTunes, select iPod touch in the sidebar.
3 Click the Summary tab and select “Manually manage music and videos.”
4 Click Apply. Add items to iPod touch: Drag a song, video, podcast, or playlist in your iTunes library to iPod touch (in the sidebar). Shift-click or Command-click (Mac) or Control-click (Windows) to select multiple items to add at the same time. iTunes syncs the content immediately. If you deselect “Manually manage music and videos,” the content you added manually is removed from iPod touch the next time iTunes syncs content. Remove items from iPod touch: With iPod touch connected to your computer, select the iPod touch icon in the iTunes sidebar. Click the disclosure triangle to the left of the icon to show the contents. Select a content area, such as Music or Movies, then select the items you want to delete and press the Delete key on the keyboard. Removing an item from iPod touch doesn’t delete it from your iTunes library.
Purchasing and Downloading Content from the iTunes Store You can use the iTunes Store on iPod touch to purchase and download songs, albums, TV shows, movies, music videos, and audiobooks directly to iPod touch. You can also stream and download audio and video podcasts, as well as iTunes U content. See “About the iTunes Store” on page 131.
Chapter 3 Music and Video
41
Transferring Purchased Content to Another Computer You can transfer content on iPod touch that was purchased using iTunes on one computer to an iTunes library on another authorized computer. The computer must be authorized to play content from your iTunes Store account. To authorize the computer, open iTunes on the computer and choose Store > Authorize Computer. Transfer purchased content: Connect iPod touch to the other computer. iTunes asks if you want to transfer purchased content.
Converting Videos for iPod touch You can add videos other than those purchased from the iTunes Store to iPod touch, such as videos you create in iMovie on a Mac, or videos you download from the Internet and then add to iTunes. If you try to add a video from iTunes to iPod touch and a message says the video can’t play on iPod touch, you can convert the video. Convert a video to work with iPod touch: Select the video in your iTunes library and choose Advanced > “Create iPod or iPhone Version.” Then add the converted video to iPod touch.
Music and Other Audio
The high-resolution Multi-Touch display makes listening to songs on iPod touch as much a visual experience as a musical one. You can scroll through your playlists, or use Cover Flow to browse through your album art. You can listen to audio from the internal speaker (not available on first-generation iPod touch), headphones attached to the headphones port, or Bluetooth stereo headphones paired wirelessly. When headphones are attached or paired, no sound comes out of the speaker. WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/ipodtouch.
Playing Songs Browse your collection: Tap Playlists, Artists, or Songs. Tap More to browse Albums, Audiobooks, Compilations, Composers, Genres, iTunes U, or Podcasts. Browse Genius Mixes: Tap Genius. If Genius doesn’t appear, you need to turn on Genius in iTunes 9 or later, and then sync iPod touch with iTunes. See “Using Genius on iPod touch” on page 48. Play a song: Tap the song. Shake to shuffle: Shake iPod touch to turn shuffle on and immediately change songs. Shake anytime to change to another song. 42
Chapter 3 Music and Video
You can turn the “Shake to Shuffle” feature on or off in Settings > Music (it’s on by default). See “Music” on page 123.
Controlling Song Playback When you play a song, the Now Playing screen appears. Back Track List
Play/Pause Next/Fast-forward
Previous/ Rewind
Volume
Pause a song
Tap , or press the center button on the iPod touch headset (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset.
Resume playback
Tap , or press the center button on the iPod touch headset (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset.
Raise or lower the volume
Drag the volume slider or use the buttons on the side of iPod touch. You can also use the volume buttons on the iPod touch headset (only on Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more).
Restart a song or a chapter in an audiobook or podcast
Tap
Chapter 3 Music and Video
.
43
Skip to the next song or chapter in an audiobook or podcast
Tap , or press the center button on the iPod touch headset (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset twice quickly.
Go to the previous song or chapter in an audiobook or podcast
twice, or press the center button on the Tap iPod touch headset (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset three times quickly.
Rewind or fast-forward
Touch and hold or . The longer you hold the control, the faster the song rewinds or fastforwards. On the iPod touch headset (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more), press the center button (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) twice quickly and hold to fast forward, or three times quickly and hold to rewind.
Return to the iPod browse lists
Tap , or swipe to the right over the album cover.
Return to the Now Playing screen
Tap Now Playing.
Display a song’s lyrics
Tap the album cover when playing a song. (Lyrics appear if you’ve added them to the song using the song’s Info window in iTunes.)
You can display playback controls at any time when you’re listening to music and using another application—or even when iPod touch is locked—by double-clicking the Home button. If you’re using an application, the playback controls appear on top of the application. After using the controls, you can close them or tap Music to go to the Now Playing screen. If iPod touch is locked, the controls appear onscreen, then disappear automatically after you finish using them.
Additional Song Controls From the Now Playing screen, tap the album cover. The repeat, Genius, and shuffle controls appear along with the scrubber bar. You can see elapsed time, remaining time, and the song number. The song’s lyrics also appear, if you’ve added them to the song in iTunes.
44
Chapter 3 Music and Video
The scrubber bar lets you skip to any point along the timeline. You can adjust the scrub rate from high-speed to fine by sliding your finger down as you drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Repeat
Genius
Scrubber bar
Shuffle
Playhead
Set iPod touch to repeat songs
Tap . Tap again to set iPod touch to repeat only the current song. = iPod touch is set to repeat all songs in the current album or list. = iPod touch is set to repeat the current song over and over. = iPod touch isn’t set to repeat songs.
Skip to any point in a song
Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Slide your finger down to adjust the scrub rate. The scrub rate becomes slower the farther down you slide your finger.
Make a Genius playlist
Tap , and the Genius playlist appears. See “Using Genius on iPod touch” on page 48.
Set iPod touch to shuffle songs
Tap . Tap again to set iPod touch to play songs in order. = iPod touch is set to shuffle songs. = iPod touch is set to play songs in order.
Shuffle the tracks in any playlist, album, or other Tap Shuffle at the top of the list. For example, to list of songs shuffle all the songs on iPod touch, choose Songs > Shuffle. Whether or not iPod touch is set to shuffle, if you tap Shuffle at the top of a list of songs, iPod touch plays the songs from that list in random order.
Podcast and Audiobook Controls From the Now Playing screen, tap the cover. The email, 30-second repeat, and playback speed controls appear along with the scrubber bar. You can see elapsed time, remaining time, and the episode or chapter number.
Chapter 3 Music and Video
45
The scrubber bar lets you skip to any point along the timeline. You can adjust the scrub rate from high-speed to fine by sliding your finger down as you drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Email
30-second repeat
Playback speed Scrubber bar
Playhead
Send an email link to this podcast
Tap
.
Skip to any point
Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Slide your finger down to adjust the scrub rate. The scrub rate becomes slower the farther down you slide your finger.
Play back the last 30 seconds
Tap
Set the playback speed
Tap
. . Tap again to change the speed. = Play at double speed. = Play at half speed. = Play at normal speed.
Using Voice Control with iPod You can use Voice Control (available only on Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) to control music playback on iPod touch. Note: Requires included headset or compatible accessory with microphone. Voice Control isn’t available in all languages. Use Voice Control: Press and hold the Home button until the Voice Control screen appears and you hear a beep. Then use the commands described below to play songs. You can also press and hold the center button on the iPod touch headset (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset to bring up Voice Control.
46
Control music playback
Say “play” or “play music.” To pause, say “pause” or “pause music.” You can also say “next song” or “previous song.”
Play an album, artist, or playlist
Say “play,” then say “album,” “artist,” or “playlist” and the name.
Shuffle the current playlist
Say “shuffle.”
Chapter 3 Music and Video
Find out more about the currently playing song Say “what’s playing,” “what song is this,” “who sings this song,” or “who is this song by.” Use Genius to play similar songs
Say “Genius,” “play more like this,” or “play more songs like this.”
Cancel Voice Control
Say “cancel” or “stop.”
Browsing Album Covers in Cover Flow When you’re browsing music, you can rotate iPod touch sideways to see your iTunes content in Cover Flow and browse your music by album artwork.
Browse album covers
Drag or flick left or right.
See the tracks on an album
Tap a cover or
Play any track
Tap the track. Drag up or down to scroll through the tracks.
Return to the cover
Tap the title bar. Or tap
Play or pause the current song
Tap or . You can also press the center button on the iPod touch headset (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset.
Chapter 3 Music and Video
.
again.
47
Viewing All Tracks on an Album See all the tracks on the album that contains the current song: From the Now Playing screen tap . Tap a track to play it. Tap the album cover thumbnail to return to the Now Playing screen. Rating bar Back to Now Playing screen
Album tracks
In track list view, you can assign ratings to songs. You can use ratings to create smart playlists in iTunes that dynamically update to include, for example, your highest rated songs. Rate a song: Drag your thumb across the rating bar to give the song zero to five stars.
Searching Music You can search the titles, artists, albums, and composers of songs, podcasts, and other content you’ve synced to iPod touch.
Search music: Enter text in the search field at the top of a song list, playlist, artist list, or other view of your iPod content. (Tap the status bar to scroll quickly to the top of a list and reveal the search field.) Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more of the results. You can also use Spotlight to search for music. See “Searching” on page 32.
Using Genius on iPod touch Genius finds songs in your iTunes library that go great together. A Genius playlist is a collection of songs that are picked for you to go with a song you choose from your library. A Genius Mix is a selection of songs of the same kind of music. Genius Mixes are recreated each time you listen to them, so they’re always new and fresh. You can create Genius playlists in iTunes and sync them to iPod touch. You can also create and save Genius playlists directly on iPod touch.
48
Chapter 3 Music and Video
Genius Mixes are created in iTunes. iTunes creates different mixes depending on the variety of music you have in your iTunes library. For example, you may have Genius Mixes that highlight R&B songs, or Alternative Rock songs. To use Genius on iPod touch, first turn on Genius in iTunes, then sync iPod touch with iTunes. Genius Mixes are synced automatically, unless you manually manage your music and choose which mixes you want to sync in iTunes. Genius is a free service, but requires an iTunes Store account. Genius Mixes require iTunes 9 or later. When you sync a Genius Mix, iTunes may select and sync songs from your library that you haven’t otherwise chosen to sync. Browse Genius Mixes: Tap Genius. The number of dots at the bottom of the screen shows the number of mixes you’ve synced from iTunes, and indicates which mix you’re viewing. Flick left or right to access your other mixes.
Play a Genius Mix: Tap the mix or tap .
Make a Genius playlist on iPod touch: 1 Tap Playlists and tap Genius. 2 Tap a song in the list. Genius creates a playlist with additional songs that go great with that song. You can also make a Genius playlist of songs that go great with the song you’re playing. From the Now Playing screen, tap the album cover to display additional controls, then tap . Save a Genius playlist: In the playlist, tap Save. The playlist is saved in Playlists with the title of the song you picked. You can make and save as many Genius playlists as you want. If you save a Genius playlist created on iPod touch, it syncs back to iTunes the next time you connect.
Chapter 3 Music and Video
49
Refresh a Genius playlist: In the playlist, tap Refresh. Refreshing a playlist creates a playlist of different songs that go great with the song you picked. You can refresh any Genius playlist, whether it was created in iTunes and synced to iPod touch, or created directly on iPod touch. Create a Genius playlist from a new song: In the playlist, tap New, then pick a new song. Delete a saved Genius playlist: In a playlist that you saved directly on iPod touch, tap Edit, then tap Delete Playlist. Once a Genius playlist is synced back to iTunes, you won’t be able to delete it directly from iPod touch. You can use iTunes to edit the playlist name, stop syncing, or delete the playlist.
Making On-The-Go Playlists
Make an on-the-go playlist: 1 Tap Playlists and tap On-The-Go.
2 Browse for songs using the buttons at the bottom of the screen. Tap any song or video to add it to the playlist. Tap Add All Songs at the top of any list of songs to add all the songs in the list.
3 When you finish, tap Done. When you make an on-the-go playlist and then sync iPod touch to your computer, the playlist is saved on iPod touch and in your iTunes library, then deleted from iPod touch. The first is saved as “On-The-Go 1,” the second as “On-The-Go 2,” and so on. To put a playlist back on iPod touch, select iPod touch in the iTunes sidebar, click the Music tab, and set the playlist to sync. Edit an on-the-go playlist: Tap Playlists, tap On-The-Go, tap Edit, then do one of the following: • To move a song higher or lower in the list, drag
next to the song.
• To delete a song from the playlist, tap
next to a song, then tap Delete. Deleting a song from the on-the-go playlist doesn’t delete it from iPod touch.
• To clear the entire playlist, tap Clear Playlist. • To add more songs, tap
Videos
.
With iPod touch, you can view video content such as movies, music videos, and video podcasts. If a video contains chapters, you can skip to the next or previous chapter, or bring up a list and start playing at any chapter that you choose. If a video provides alternate language features, you can choose an audio language or display subtitles.
50
Chapter 3 Music and Video
Playing Videos Play a video: Tap Videos and tap the video. Display playback controls: Tap the screen to show the controls. Tap again to hide them.
Controlling Video Playback Videos play in widescreen to take full advantage of the display. The scrubber bar lets you skip to any point along the timeline. You can adjust the scrub rate by sliding your finger down as you drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Scrubber bar
Playhead Scale
Play/Pause Next/Fastforward
Restart/Rewind
Volume
Lovers in Japan by Coldplay is available in the iTunes Store
Pause a video
Tap , or press the center button on the iPod touch headset (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset.
Resume playback
Tap , or press the center button on the iPod touch headset (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset.
Raise or lower the volume
Drag the volume slider. You can also use the volume buttons on the iPod touch headset (only on Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more).
Start a video over
Drag the playhead on the scrubber bar all the way to the left, or tap if the video doesn’t contain chapters.
Chapter 3 Music and Video
51
Skip to the next chapter (if available)
Tap , or press the center button on the iPod touch headset (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset twice quickly.
Go to the previous chapter (if available)
Tap , or press the center button on the iPod touch headset (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset three times quickly.
Start playing at a specific chapter (if available)
Tap
Rewind or fast-forward
Touch and hold
Skip to any point in a video
Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Slide your finger down to adjust the scrub rate. The scrub rate becomes slower the farther down you slide your finger.
, then choose a chapter from the list. or
.
Stop watching a video before it finishes playing Tap Done. Or press the Home Scale a video to fill the screen or fit to the screen
Tap to make the video fill the screen. Tap to make it fit the screen. You can also double-tap the video to toggle between fitting and filling the screen. When you scale a video to fill the screen, the sides or top may be cropped from view. When you scale it to fit the screen, you may see black bars on the sides or above and below the video.
Select an alternate audio language (if available) Tap list. Show or hide subtitles (if available)
button.
, then choose a language from the Audio
Tap , then choose a language, or Off, from the Subtitles list.
Searching Video You can search the titles of movies, TV shows, and video podcasts you’ve synced to iPod touch.
Search video: Enter text in the search field at the top of the list of videos. Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more of the results.
52
Chapter 3 Music and Video
Watching Rented Movies You can rent movies in standard (480p) definition from the iTunes Store and watch them on iPod touch. You can download rented movies directly to iPod touch, or transfer them from iTunes on your computer to iPod touch. You can also transfer rented movies back to iTunes from iPod touch. (Rented movies aren’t available in all regions.) The movie must be fully downloaded before you can start watching. You can pause a download and resume it later. Rented movies expire after a certain number of days, and once you start a movie you have a limited amount of time to finish watching it. The time remaining appears near a movie’s title. Movies are automatically deleted when they expire. Check the iTunes Store for the expiration time before renting a movie. Transfer rented movies to iPod touch: Connect iPod touch to your computer. Then select iPod touch in the iTunes sidebar, click Movies, and select the rented movies you want to transfer. Your computer must be connected to the Internet. View a rented movie: Choose Videos and select a movie.
Watching Videos on a TV You can connect iPod touch to your TV and watch your videos on the large screen. Use the Apple Component AV Cable, Apple Composite AV Cable, or other authorized iPod touch compatible cable. You can also use these cables with the Apple Universal Dock to connect iPod touch to your TV. (The Apple Universal Dock includes a remote that lets you control playback from a distance.) Apple cables and docks are available for purchase separately in many countries. Go to www.apple.com/ipodstore (not available in all countries).
Deleting Videos from iPod touch You can delete videos from iPod touch to save space. Delete a video: In the videos list, swipe left or right over the video, then tap Delete. When you delete a video (other than rented movies) from iPod touch, it isn’t deleted from your iTunes library and you can sync the video back to iPod touch later. If you don’t want to sync the video back to iPod touch, set iTunes to not sync the video. See “What You Need” on page 7. Important: If you delete a rented movie from iPod touch, it’s deleted permanently and cannot be transferred back to your computer.
Chapter 3 Music and Video
53
Setting a Sleep Timer
You can set iPod touch to stop playing music or videos after a period of time. Set a sleep timer: From the Home screen choose Clock > Timer, then flick to set the number of hours and minutes. Tap When Timer Ends and choose Sleep iPod, tap Set, then tap Start to start the timer. When the timer ends, iPod touch stops playing music or video, closes any other open application, and then locks itself.
Changing the Browse Buttons
You can replace the browse buttons at the bottom of the screen with buttons you use more frequently. For example, if you often listen to podcasts, you can replace the Songs button with Podcasts. Change the browse buttons: Tap More and tap Edit, then drag a button to the bottom of the screen, over the button you want to replace.
You can drag the buttons at the bottom of the screen left or right to rearrange them. Tap Done when you finish. Tap More at any time to access the buttons you replaced.
54
Chapter 3 Music and Video
Safari
4
Viewing Webpages
Safari lets you surf the web and view webpages on iPod touch in the same way as if you were on your computer. You can create bookmarks on iPod touch and sync bookmarks with your computer. Add web clips for quick access to your favorite sites directly from the Home screen. To use Safari, iPod touch must join a Wi-Fi network that is connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 35. You can view webpages in either portrait or landscape orientation. Rotate iPod touch and the webpage rotates too, automatically adjusting to fit the page.
Opening Webpages Open a webpage: Tap the address field (on the left side of the title bar), then type the web address and tap Go. If the address field isn’t visible, tap the status bar at the top of the screen to quickly scroll to the address field at the top of the webpage.
55
As you type, web addresses that start with those letters appear. These are bookmarked pages or recent pages you’ve opened. Tap an address to go to that page. Keep typing if you want to enter a web address that’s not in the list. Erase the text in the address field: Tap the address field, then tap
.
Zooming and Scrolling Zoom in or out: Double-tap a column on a webpage to expand the column. Doubletap again to zoom out.
You can also pinch to zoom in or out manually. Scroll around a webpage
Drag up, down, or sideways. When scrolling, you can touch and drag anywhere on the page without activating any links.
Scroll within a frame on a webpage
Use two fingers to scroll within a frame on a webpage. Use one finger to scroll the entire webpage.
Scroll quickly to the top of a webpage
Tap the status bar at the top of the iPod touch screen.
Navigating Webpages Links on webpages typically take you to another place on the web. Follow a link on a webpage: Tap the link. Links on iPod touch can also display a location in Maps or create a preaddressed Mail message. To return to Safari after a link opens another application, press the Home button and tap Safari.
56
See a link’s destination address
Touch and hold the link. The address pops up next to your finger. You can touch and hold an image to see if it has a link.
Stop a webpage from loading
Tap
.
Reload a webpage
Tap
.
Return to the previous or next page
Tap
or
Chapter 4 Safari
at the bottom of the screen.
Return to a recently viewed page
Tap and tap History. To clear the history list, tap Clear.
Send a webpage address via email
Tap
Save an image or photo to your Photo Library
Touch and hold the image, then tap Save Image.
and tap “Mail Link to this Page.”
Opening Multiple Pages You can have up to eight pages open at a time. Some links automatically open a new page instead of replacing the current one. The number inside the pages icon at the bottom of the screen shows how many pages are open. If there’s no number inside, just one page is open. For example: = one page is open = three pages are open Open a new page: Tap Go to another page: Tap
Close a page: Tap
and tap New Page. and flick left or right. Tap the page you want to view.
and tap
. You can’t close a page if it’s the only one open.
Entering Text and Filling Out Forms Some webpages have text fields and forms to fill out. You can set Safari to remember names and passwords of websites you visit and fill out text fields automatically with information from Contacts. See “Safari” on page 129.
Chapter 4 Safari
57
Bring up the keyboard
Tap inside a text field.
Move to another text field
Tap another text field, or tap the Next or Previous button.
Submit a form
Once you finish filling out a form, tap Go or Search. Most pages also have a link you can tap to submit the form.
Close the keyboard without submitting the form
Tap Done.
Enable AutoFill to help you fill out web forms: In Settings, choose Safari > AutoFill, then do one of the following: • To use information from contacts, turn Use Contact Info on, then choose My Info and
select the contact you want to use. Safari uses information from Contacts to fill in contact fields on web forms. • To use information from names and passwords, turn Names & Passwords on.
When this feature is on, Safari remembers names and passwords of websites you visit and automatically fills in the information when you revisit the website. • To remove all AutoFill information, tap Clear All.
Searching the Web
By default, Safari searches using Google. You can search using Yahoo!, instead.
Search the web: 1 Tap the search field (on the right side of the title bar).
2 Type a word or phrase that describes what you’re looking for, then tap Google.
3 Tap a link in the list of search results to open a webpage. Set Safari to search using Yahoo!: From the Home screen choose Settings > Safari > Search Engine, then choose Yahoo!.
Bookmarks
You can bookmark webpages you want to return to later. Bookmark a webpage: Open the page and tap . Then tap Add Bookmark. When you save a bookmark you can edit its title. By default, bookmarks are saved at the top level of Bookmarks. Tap Bookmarks to choose another folder. If you use Safari on a Mac, or Safari or Microsoft Internet Explorer on a PC, you can sync bookmarks with the web browser on your computer.
58
Chapter 4 Safari
Sync bookmarks with your computer: 1 Connect iPod touch to your computer.
2 In iTunes, select iPod touch in the sidebar.
3 Click the Info tab, select “Sync … bookmarks” under Web Browser, then click Apply. See “Syncing” on page 9. Sync bookmarks with MobileMe: In Settings on iPod touch, select Bookmarks in your MobileMe account. See “Setting Up Accounts” on page 13. Open a bookmarked webpage: Tap see the bookmarks inside.
, then choose a bookmark or tap a folder to
Edit a bookmark or bookmark folder: Tap , choose the folder that has the bookmark or folder you want to edit, then tap Edit. Then do one of the following: • To make a new folder, tap New Folder. • To delete a bookmark or folder, tap
, then tap Delete.
• To reposition a bookmark or folder, drag
.
• To edit the name or address, or to put it in a different folder, tap the bookmark or folder.
When you’re finished, tap Done.
Web Clips
Add web clips to the Home screen for fast access to your favorite webpages. Web clips appear as icons on the Home screen, and you can arrange your web clips along with the other icons. See “iPod touch Applications” on page 19. Add a web clip: Open the webpage and tap . Then tap “Add to Home Screen.” When you open a web clip, Safari automatically zooms and scrolls to the area of the webpage that was displayed when you saved the web clip. The displayed area is also used to create the icon for the web clip on your Home screen, unless the webpage comes with its own custom icon. When you add a web clip, you can edit its name. If the name is too long (more than about 10 characters), it may appear abbreviated on the Home screen. Web clips aren’t bookmarks, and aren’t synced by MobileMe or iTunes.
Delete a web clip: 1 Touch and hold any icon on the Home screen until the icons start to wiggle.
2 Tap
3 Tap Delete, then press the Home
in the corner of the web clip you want to delete.
Chapter 4 Safari
button to save your arrangement.
59
App Store
5
About the App Store
You can search for, browse, review, purchase, and download applications from the App Store directly to iPod touch. Applications you download and install from the App Store on iPod touch are backed up to your iTunes library the next time you sync iPod touch with your computer. You can also install applications you’ve purchased or downloaded through iTunes on your computer when you sync with iPod touch. Note: The App Store is not available in all regions. To use the App Store, iPod touch must join a Wi-Fi network that’s connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 35. You also need an iTunes Store account (not available in some countries) to download applications. By default, iPod touch gets your iTunes Store account settings from iTunes. If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, or if you want to make purchases from another iTunes Store account, go to Settings > Store. See “Store” on page 125.
Browsing and Searching
Browse the featured selections to see new, notable, or recommended applications, or browse Top 25 to see the most popular applications. If you’re looking for a specific application, use Search.
60
Browse applications: Tap Featured, Categories, or Top 25. Choose a category, or choose a sorting method at the top of the screen to browse by lists such as New, What’s Hot, Genius, Top Paid, or Top Free.
Browse using Genius: Tap Genius to see a list of recommended apps based on what’s already in your app collection. To turn Genius on, follow the onscreen instructions. Genius is a free service, but it requires an iTunes Store account. Search for applications: Tap Search, tap the search field and enter one or more words, then tap Search.
Chapter 5 App Store
61
Info Screen
Tap any application in a list to see more information, such as the application’s price, screenshots, ratings, and other information.
If you’ve already installed the application, “Installed” appears instead of the price on the Info screen. Email a link to the application’s Info page in iTunes: Tap “Tell a Friend” near the bottom of the Info screen.
View screenshots: Swipe left or right over a screenshot to view additional screenshot pages. Double-tap to zoom in. Get ratings and read reviews: Tap Ratings near the bottom of the Info screen. Report a problem: Tap “Report a Problem” near the bottom of the Info screen. Select a problem from the list or type optional comments, then tap Report.
62
Chapter 5 App Store
Downloading Applications
When you find an application you want in the App Store, you can purchase and download it to iPod touch. If the application is free, you can download it without charge after providing your iTunes account information. Once you download an application, it’s immediately installed on iPod touch.
Purchase and download an application: 1 Tap the price (or tap Free), then tap Buy Now.
2 Sign in to your account as requested, then tap OK. If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, tap Create New Account to set one up. Downloads for purchase are charged to your iTunes Store account. For additional downloads made within the next fifteen minutes, you don’t have to enter your password again. Some applications allow you to make purchases within the application. You can restrict in-app purchases in Settings. See “Restrictions” on page 119. Some applications use push notifications to alert you of new information, even when the application isn’t running. Notifications differ depending upon the application, but may include text or sound alerts, and a numbered badge on the application’s icon on the Home screen. See “Notifications” on page 116. You can redeem iTunes Store gift cards, gift certificates, or other promotional codes to make purchases. When you’re signed in to your account, your remaining store credit appears with your account information at the bottom of most App Store screens. Enter a redemption code: Tap Redeem near the bottom of the Featured screen, then follow the onscreen instructions. See the status of downloading applications: After you begin downloading an application, its icon appears on the Home screen and shows a progress indicator.
If a download is interrupted, iPod touch starts the download again the next time it has an Internet connection. Or, if you open iTunes on your computer, iTunes completes the download to your iTunes library (if your computer is connected to the Internet and signed in to the same iTunes account).
Chapter 5 App Store
63
Deleting Applications
You can delete applications you’ve installed from the App Store. If you delete an application, data associated with the application will no longer be available to iPod touch, unless you reinstall the application and restore its data from a backup. You can reinstall an application and restore its data as long as you backed up iPod touch with iTunes on your computer. (If you try to delete an application that hasn’t been backed up to your computer, an alert appears.) To retrieve the application data, you must restore iPod touch from a backup containing the data. See “Restoring from a Backup” on page 157.
Delete an App Store application: 1 Touch and hold any application icon on the Home screen until the icons start to wiggle.
2 Tap
3 Tap Delete, then press the Home
in the corner of the application you want to delete. button to save your arrangement.
When you delete an application, its data is no longer accessible via the iPod touch user interface, but it isn’t erased from your iPod touch. For information about erasing all content and settings, see “Erase All Content and Settings” in iPod touch settings. See “Resetting iPod touch” on page 122.
Writing Reviews
You can write and submit your own application reviews directly on iPod touch.
Write a review: 1 Tap Ratings near the bottom of the Info screen.
2 On the Reviews screen, tap “Write a Review.”
3 Select the number of stars (1–5) for your rating of the application, and enter your nickname, a title for the review, and optional review comments. If you’ve written reviews before, the nickname field is already filled in. Otherwise, you’re asked to create a reviewer nickname.
4 Tap Send. You must be signed in to your iTunes Store account and have purchased or downloaded the item in order to submit reviews.
64
Chapter 5 App Store
Updating Applications
Whenever you access the App Store, it checks for updates to applications you’ve installed. The App Store also automatically checks for updates every week. The App Store icon shows the total number of application updates available.
If an update is available and you access the App Store, the Updates screen appears immediately. Application updates are downloaded and automatically installed when you choose to update them. Application upgrades are new releases that can be purchased or downloaded through the App Store on iPod touch or the iTunes Store on your computer.
Update an application: 1 At the bottom of the screen, tap Updates.
2 Tap an application to see more information about the update.
3 Tap Update. Update all applications: At the bottom of the screen, tap Updates, then tap Update All. If you try to update an application purchased from a different iTunes Store account, you’re prompted for that account’s ID and password in order to download the update.
Syncing Purchased Applications
iTunes automatically syncs applications you’ve downloaded or purchased on iPod touch to your iTunes library when you connect iPod touch to your computer. This lets you access the downloads on your computer and provides a backup if you delete applications from iPod touch. Downloaded applications are backed up the next time you sync with iTunes. Afterwards, only application data is backed up when you sync with iTunes. Applications are synced to the Applications list in your iTunes library. iTunes creates the list if it doesn’t exist.
Chapter 5 App Store
65
6
Mail works with MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, and many of the most popular email systems—including Yahoo! Mail, Google email, and AOL—as well as other industrystandard POP3 and IMAP email systems. You can send and receive embedded photos and graphics, and view PDFs and other attachments. To download and send messages in Mail, iPod touch must join a Wi-Fi network that is connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 35.
Setting Up Email Accounts
You can set up email accounts on iPod touch in either of the following ways: • Set up an account directly on iPod touch. See “Setting Up Accounts” on page 13. • In iTunes, use the iPod touch preference panes to sync email accounts settings from
your computer. See “Syncing” on page 9.
Sending Email
You can send an email message to anyone who has an email address.
Compose and send a message: 1 Tap . 2 Type a name or email address in the To field, or tap contacts.
to add a name from your
As you type an email address, matching email addresses from your contacts list appear below. Tap an address to add it. To add more names, tap Return or . Note: If you’re composing a message from your Microsoft Exchange account and have access to your enterprise Global Address List (GAL), matching addresses from the contacts on iPod touch appear first, followed by matching GAL addresses.
66
3 Tap Cc/Bcc/From if you want to copy or blind copy the message to others, or change the account you send the message from. If you have more than one email account, you can tap the From field to change the account you’re sending from.
4 Enter a subject, then your message. You can tap Return to move from one field to another.
5 Tap Send. Send a photo in an email message
In Photos, choose a photo, tap , then tap Email Photo or Email Video. You can also copy and paste photos. The photo is sent using your default email account (see “Mail” on page 127).
Send a video in an email message
In Photos, choose a video, then touch and hold the video until the Copy command appears. Tap Copy. Go to Mail and create a new message. Tap to place an insertion point where you want the video, then tap the insertion point to display the edit commands and tap Paste. The video is sent using your default email account (see “Mail” on page 127).
Save a draft of a message to complete later
Tap Cancel, then tap Save. The message is saved in the Drafts mailbox.
Reply to a message
Tap . Tap Reply to reply only to the sender or tap Reply All to reply to the sender and all recipients. Type your return message, then tap Send. Files or images attached to the initial message aren’t sent back.
Forward a message
Open a message and tap , then tap Forward. Add one or more email addresses, type your message, then tap Send. When you forward a message, you can include the files or images attached to the original message.
Share contact information
In Contacts, choose a contact, tap Share Contact at the bottom of the Info screen, then tap Email.
Checking and Reading Email
The Mail icon shows the total number of unread messages in all your inboxes. You may have other unread messages in other mailboxes. Number of unread emails in your inboxes
Chapter 6 Mail
67
Check for new messages: Choose a mailbox or tap
at any time.
On each account screen, you can see the number of unread messages in each mailbox. Tap to see all your email accounts
Number of unread messages
Tap a mailbox to see its messages. Unread messages have a blue dot
next to them.
Unread messages
When you open a mailbox, Mail loads the number of most recent messages specified in your Mail settings, if the messages haven’t already been loaded automatically. (See “Mail” on page 127.) Load additional messages: Scroll to the bottom of the list of messages and tap Load More Messages. Read a message: Tap a mailbox, then tap a message. Within a message, tap see the next or previous message.
68
or
to
Zoom in on part of a message
Double-tap an area of the message to zoom in. Double-tap again to zoom out.
Resize any column of text to fit the screen
Double-tap the text.
Resize a message manually
Pinch to zoom in or out.
Chapter 6 Mail
Follow a link
Tap the link. Text links are typically underlined and blue. Many images are also links. A link can take you to a webpage, open a map, or open a new preaddressed email message. Web and map links open Safari or Maps on iPod touch. To return to your email, press the Home button and tap Mail.
See a link’s destination address
Touch and hold the link. The address is displayed, and you can choose to open the link in Safari or copy the link address to the clipboard.
iPod touch displays picture attachments in many commonly used formats (JPEG, GIF, and TIFF) inline with the text in email messages. iPod touch can play many audio attachments (such as MP3, AAC, WAV, and AIFF). You can download and view files (such as PDF, webpage, text, Pages, Keynote, Numbers, and Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint documents) attached to messages you receive. Open an attached file: Tap the attachment. It downloads to iPod touch and then opens.
Tap attachment to download
You can view attachments in portrait or landscape orientation. If the format of an attached file isn’t supported by iPod touch, you can see the name of the file but you can’t open it. iPod touch supports the following document types: .doc
Microsoft Word
.docx
Microsoft Word (XML)
.htm
webpage
.html
webpage
.key
Keynote
.numbers
Numbers
.pages
Pages
Chapter 6 Mail
69
Preview, Adobe Acrobat
.ppt
Microsoft PowerPoint
.pptx
Microsoft PowerPoint (XML)
.rtf
Rich Text Format
.txt
text
.vcf
contact information
.xls
Microsoft Excel
.xlsx
Microsoft Excel (XML)
Save an attached photo to your Saved Photos album: Tap the photo, then tap Save Image. If the photo hasn’t been downloaded yet, tap the download notice first. Save an attached video to your Saved Photos album: Touch and hold the attachment, then tap Save Video. If the video hasn’t been downloaded yet, tap the download notice first. See all the recipients of a message
Tap Details. Tap a name or email address to see the recipient’s contact information. Then tap an email address to contact the person. Tap Hide to hide the recipients.
Add an email recipient to your contacts list
Tap the message and, if necessary, tap Details to see the recipients. Then tap a name or email address and tap Create New Contact or “Add to Existing Contact.”
Mark a message as unread
Open the message and tap “Mark as Unread.” A blue dot appears next to the message in the mailbox list until you open it again.
Open a meeting invitation: Tap the invitation.
You can get contact information for the organizer and other attendees, set an alert, add notes to the event, and add comments that are included in your response emailed to the organizer. You can accept, tentatively accept, or decline the invitation. See “Responding to Meeting Invitations” on page 77. Turn Push on or off: In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Fetch New Data, then turn Push on or off.
70
Chapter 6 Mail
Searching Email
You can search the To, From, and Subject fields of email messages. Mail searches the downloaded messages in the currently open mailbox. For MobileMe, Exchange, and some IMAP mail accounts, you can also search messages on the server.
Search email messages: Open a mailbox, scroll to the top, and enter text in the Search field. Tap From, To, Subject, or All (From, To, and Subject) to choose which fields you want to search. (Tap the status bar to scroll quickly to the top of the list and reveal the search field.) Search results for the messages already downloaded to iPod touch appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more of the results. Search messages on the server: Tap “Continue Search on Server” at the end of the search results. Note: Search results of messages on servers may vary depending on the type of account. Some servers may search only whole words.
Organizing Email
You can delete messages one at a time, or select a group to delete all at once. You can also move messages from one mailbox or folder to another. Delete a message: Open the message and tap . You can also delete a message directly from the mailbox message list by swiping left or right over the message title, then tapping Delete.
To show the Delete button, swipe left or right over the message.
Chapter 6 Mail
71
Delete multiple messages: When viewing a list of messages, tap Edit, select the messages you want to delete, then tap Delete.
Move a message to another mailbox or folder: When viewing a message, tap then choose a mailbox or folder. Move multiple messages: When viewing a list of messages, tap Edit, select the messages you want to move, then tap Move and select a mailbox or folder.
72
Chapter 6 Mail
,
Calendar
7
About Calendar
Calendar lets you view individual calendars for your different accounts or a combined calendar for all accounts. You can view your events in a continuous list, by day, or by month, and search events by title, invitee, or location. You can sync iPod touch with the calendars on your computer. You can also make, edit, or cancel appointments on iPod touch, and have them synced back to your computer. You can subscribe to Google, Yahoo!, or Mac OS X iCal calendars using a CalDAV or iCalendar (.ics) account. If you have a Microsoft Exchange account, you can receive and respond to meeting invitations.
Syncing Calendars
You can sync Calendar in either of the following ways: • In iTunes, use the iPod touch preference panes to sync with iCal or Microsoft Entourage on a Mac, or Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC when you connect iPod touch to your computer. See “Syncing” on page 9. • In Settings on iPod touch, select Calendar in your MobileMe or Microsoft
Exchange accounts to sync your calendar information over the air. See “Setting Up Accounts” on page 13. To sync calendars, iPod touch must join a Wi-Fi network that is connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 35.
73
Viewing Your Calendar
You can view individual calendars for your different accounts or a combined calendar for all accounts. View a different calendar: Tap Calendars, then select a calendar. Tap All Calendars to view combined events from all calendars. You can view your calendar events in a list, by day, or by month. The events for all of your synced calendars appear in the same calendar on iPod touch. Switch views: Tap List, Day, or Month. • List view: All your appointments and events appear in a scrollable list. • Day view: Scroll up or down to see the events in a day. Tap
or
to see the
previous or next day’s events. • Month view: Tap a day to see its events. Tap
month. Add an event
Days with dots have scheduled events
Events for selected day Respond to calendar invitation Go to today
Switch views
See the details of an event: Tap the event.
74
Chapter 7 Calendar
or
to see the previous or next
Searching Calendars
You can search the titles, invitees, and locations of the events in your calendars. Calendar searches the calendar you’re currently viewing, or all calendars if you’re viewing them all.
Search events: In list view, enter text in the search field. Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more results.
Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars
You can subscribe to calendars that use the CalDAV or iCalendar (.ics) formats. Many calendar-based services, including Yahoo!, Google, and the Mac OS X iCal application, support either format. Subscribed calendars are read only. You can read events from subscribed calendars on iPod touch, but can’t edit them or create new events. You also can’t accept invitations from CalDAV accounts.
Subscribe to a CalDAV or .ics calendar: 1 In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” then tap Add Account.
2 Choose Other, then choose either Add CalDAV Account or Add Subscribed Calendar.
3 Enter your account information, then tap Next to verify the account.
4 Tap Save. Apple provides links to a number of free iCal calendars—for national holidays or sports events, for example—that you may want to subscribe to. The calendars are automatically added to iCal on your desktop when you download them. You can then sync them to iPod touch as described in “Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars” on page 75. Go to /www.apple.com/downloads/macosx/calendars. Chapter 7 Calendar
75
You can also subscribe to an iCal (or other .ics) calendar published on the web by tapping a link to the calendar you receive in an email message on iPod touch.
Adding Calendar Events to iPod touch
You can also enter and edit calendar events directly on iPod touch. Add an event: Tap
and enter event information, then tap Done.
You can enter any of the following: • Title • Location • Starting and ending times (or turn on All-day if it’s an all-day event) • Repeat times—none, or every day, week, two weeks, month, or year • Alert time—from five minutes to two days before the event
When you set an alert, the option to set a second alert appears. When an alert goes off, iPod touch displays a message. You can also set iPod touch to play a sound (see “Alerts” on page 78). Important: If you’re traveling, iPod touch may not alert you at the correct local time. To manually set the correct time, see “Date and Time” on page 121. • Notes
To select which calendar to add the event to, tap Calendar. Read-only calendars don’t appear in the list.
76
Edit an event
Tap the event, then tap Edit.
Delete an event
Tap the event, tap Edit, then scroll down and tap Delete Event.
Chapter 7 Calendar
Responding to Meeting Invitations
If you have a Microsoft Exchange account set up on iPod touch with Calendars enabled, you can receive and respond to meeting invitations from people in your organization. When you receive an invitation, the meeting appears in your calendar with a dotted line around it. The icon in the lower-right corner of the screen indicates the total number of new invitations you have, as does the Calendar icon on the Home screen. To receive and respond to meeting invitations, iPod touch must join a Wi-Fi network that is connected to the Internet.
Number of meeting invitations
Respond to an invitation in Calendar: 1 Tap a meeting invitation in the calendar, or tap an invitation.
to display the Event screen and tap
• Tap “Invitation from” to get contact information for the meeting organizer. Tap the
email address to send a message to the organizer.
Chapter 7 Calendar
77
• Tap Attendees to see the other people invited to the meeting. Tap a name to see
an attendee’s contact information. Tap the email address to send a message to the attendee. • Tap Alert to set iPod touch to sound an alert before the meeting. • Tap Add Comments to add comments in the email response to the meeting
organizer. You comments will also appear in your Info screen for the meeting. Notes are made by the meeting organizer.
2 Tap Accept, Maybe, or Decline. When you accept, tentatively accept, or decline the invitation, a response email that includes any comments you added is sent to the organizer. If you accept or tentatively accept the meeting, you can change your response later. Tap Add Comments if you want to change your comments. Exchange meeting invitations are also sent in an email message, which lets you open the meeting’s Info screen from Mail. Open a meeting invitation in an email message: Tap the invitation.
Alerts Set calendar alerts: In Settings, choose General > Sounds, then turn Calendar Alerts on. If Calendar Alerts is off when an event is about to occur, iPod touch displays a message but makes no sound. Sound alerts for invitations: In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendar.” Under Calendars, tap New Invitation Alert to turn it on.
78
Chapter 7 Calendar
Photos
8
About Photos
iPod touch lets you carry photos and videos with you, so you can share them with your family, friends, and associates. You can sync photos and videos (Mac only) from your computer, and use photos as wallpaper. You can also send photos and videos in email messages, and upload photos to MobileMe galleries.
Syncing Photos and Videos with Your Computer
iTunes can sync your photos and videos (Mac only) with the following applications: • Mac: iPhoto 4.0.3 or later, or Aperture • PC: Adobe Photoshop Elements 3.0 or later
See “Syncing with iTunes” on page 9. iPod touch supports H.264 and MPEG-4 video formats, with AAC audio. If you are having trouble syncing a video to iPod touch, you might be able to use iTunes to create an iPod touch version of the video.
Create an iPod touch version of a video: 1 Copy the video to your iTunes library.
2 In iTunes, select Movies in the Library list and select the video you want to sync.
3 Choose Advanced > “Create iPod or iPhone Version.” For additional information, go to support.apple.com/kb/HT1211.
Viewing Photos and Videos
Photos and videos (Mac only) synced from your computer’s photo application or saved from an email message can be viewed in Photos. 79
View photos and videos: 1 In Photos, tap a photo album.
2 Tap a thumbnail to see the photo or video in full screen. Show or hide the controls: Tap the full-screen photo or video to show the controls. Tap again to hide the controls.
Play a video: Tap
in the center of the screen.
To replay a video, tap to show the controls.
at the bottom of the screen. If you don’t see , tap the screen
View a photo or video in landscape orientation: Rotate iPod touch sideways. The photo or video reorients automatically and, if it’s in landscape format, expands to fit the screen.
Zoom in on part of a photo: Double-tap where you want to zoom in. Double-tap again to zoom out. You can also pinch to zoom in or out.
80
Chapter 8 Photos
View video in full screen, or fit video to screen: Double tap the screen to scale the video to fill the screen. Double-tap again to fit the video to the screen. Pan around a photo: Drag the photo. See the next or previous photo or video: Flick left or right. Or tap the screen to show the controls, then tap or .
Slideshows
You can view photo albums as slideshows, complete with background music. View a photo album as a slideshow: Tap an album, then tap . Videos play automatically when they appear during the slideshow. Stop a slideshow: Tap the screen. Set slideshow settings: In Settings, choose Photos and set the following options: • To set the length of time each slide is shown, tap Play Each Slide For and choose a time. • To set transition effects when moving from photo to photo, tap Transition and choose a
transition type. • To set whether slideshows repeat, turn Repeat on or off. • To set whether photos and videos are shown in random order, turn Shuffle on or off.
Play music during a slideshow: In iPod, play a song, then choose Photos from the Home screen and start a slideshow.
Sharing Photos and Videos
You can send photos and videos in email messages, and add photos to MobileMe galleries. You can also copy and paste photos and videos, save photos and videos from email messages to Photos, and save images from webpages to Photos.
Sending a Photo or Video in an Email Message Send a photo: Choose a photo and tap Chapter 8 Photos
, then tap Email Photo. 81
If you don’t see
, tap the screen to show the controls.
Paste a video in an email message: 1 Touch and hold a video until the Copy command appears.
2 Tap Copy.
3 Go to Mail and create a new message.
4 Tap to place an insertion point where you want to place the video, then tap the insertion point to display the edit commands.
5 Tap Paste. If necessary, iPod touch may compress the photo.
Copying and Pasting Photos and Videos You can copy a photo or video from Photos and paste it to an email message. Some third-party applications may also support copying and pasting photos and videos. Copy a photo or video: Hold your finger on the screen until the Copy button appears, then tap Copy. Paste a photo or video: Tap to place an insertion point where you want to place the photo or video, then tap the insertion point and tap Paste.
Adding a Photo to a MobileMe Gallery If you have a MobileMe account, you can add photos directly from iPod touch to a gallery you’ve created. You can also add photos to someone else’s MobileMe gallery if that person has enabled email contributions. Before you can add photos to a gallery in your MobileMe account, you must: • Set up your MobileMe account on iPod touch • Publish a MobileMe gallery, and allow adding photos via email or iPod touch • Join a Wi-Fi network that’s connected to the Internet
For more information about creating a gallery and adding photos to it, see MobileMe Help. Add a photo to your gallery: Choose a photo and tap , then tap “Send to MobileMe.” Enter a title and description, if you like, then select the album to add the photo to and tap Publish. If you don’t see
, tap the screen to show the controls.
iPod touch tells you when the photo has been published, and gives you options to view it on MobileMe or email a link to a friend. Adding a photo to someone else’s gallery: Choose a photo and tap “Email Photo.” Enter the album’s email address, then click Send.
82
Chapter 8 Photos
, then tap
Saving Photos and Videos from Email Messages and Webpages Save a photo in an email message to your Saved Photos album: Tap the photo, then tap Save Image. If the photo hasn’t been downloaded yet, tap the download notice first. Save a video in an email message to your Saved Photos album: Touch and hold the attachment, then tap Save Video. If the video hasn’t been downloaded yet, tap the download notice first. Save a photo on a webpage to your Saved Photos album: Touch and hold the photo, then tap Save Image. You can download the photos and videos in your Saved Photos album to your computer’s photo application by connecting iPod touch to your computer.
Assigning a Photo to a Contact You can assign a photo to a contact.
Assign a photo to a contact: 1 Choose any photo on iPod touch and tap
2 Tap “Assign to Contact” and choose a contact.
3 Position and size the photo until it looks the way you want.
.
Drag the photo to pan, and pinch to zoom in or out.
4 Tap Set Photo. You can also assign a photo to a contact in Contacts by tapping Edit and then tapping the picture icon.
Wallpaper
You see a wallpaper background picture as you unlock iPod touch.
Set a photo as wallpaper: 1 Choose any photo and tap
, then tap Use As Wallpaper.
2 Drag the photo to pan, or pinch the photo to zoom in or out, until it looks the way you want.
3 Tap Set Wallpaper. You can also choose from several wallpaper pictures included with iPod touch by choosing Settings > Wallpaper > Wallpaper from the Home screen.
Chapter 8 Photos
83
Contacts
9
Adding Contacts
You can add contacts to iPod touch in the following ways: • In iTunes, sync contacts from Google or Yahoo!, or sync with applications on your computer (see “Syncing” on page 9) • Set up MobileMe or Microsoft Exchange accounts on iPod touch, with Contacts
enabled (see “Setting Up Accounts” on page 13) • Install a profile that sets up an Exchange account, with Contacts enabled (see
“Installing Configuration Profiles” on page 15) • Set up an LDAP account on iPod touch • Enter contacts directly on iPod touch
The number of contacts you can add is limited only by the amount of memory on iPod touch.
Set up an LDAP account: 1 In Settings, tap “Mail Contacts, Calendars,” then tap Add Account.
2 Tap Other, then tap Add LDAP Account.
3 Enter your LDAP account information and tap Next to verify the account.
4 Tap Save. When you set up an LDAP account, you can view and search for contacts on your company or organization’s LDAP server. The server appears as a new group in Contacts. Since LDAP contacts aren’t downloaded to iPod touch, you must have an Internet connection to view them. Check with your system administrator for specific account settings and other requirements (such as VPN).
84
Searching Contacts
You can search first, last, and company names in your contacts on iPod touch. If you have a Microsoft Exchange account set up on iPod touch, you may also be able to search your enterprise Global Address List (GAL) for contacts in your organization. If you have an LDAP account set up on iPod touch, you can search contacts on your organization’s LDAP server. When you enter search information, contacts with matching information appear immediately as you start to type. Search contacts: In Contacts, tap the search field at the top of any list of contacts and enter a first, last, or company name. (To scroll quickly to the top of the list, tap the status bar.) Search a GAL: Tap Groups, tap Directories at the bottom of the list, then enter a first, last, or company name. You can’t edit GAL contacts or save them to iPod touch. Search an LDAP server: Tap Groups, tap the LDAP server name, then enter a first, last, or company name. You can’t edit LDAP contacts or save them to iPod touch.
Managing Contacts on iPod touch Add a contact on iPod touch: Tap Contacts and tap . Delete a contact
In Contacts, choose a contact, than tap Edit. Scroll down and tap Delete Contact.
Add a contact from the keypad
. Tap Tap Keypad, enter a number, then tap Create New Contact and enter information, or tap “Add to Existing Contact” and choose a contact.
Edit contact information
In Contacts, choose a contact, then tap Edit. To add an item, tap . To delete an item, tap .
Enter a pause in a number
Tap , then tap Pause. Pauses appear as commas when the number is saved.
Assign a photo to a contact: 1 Tap Contacts and choose a contact.
2 Tap Edit and tap Add Photo, or tap the existing photo.
3 Tap Choose Photo and choose a photo.
4 Drag and scale the photo as desired.
5 Tap Set Photo.
Chapter 9 Contacts
85
YouTube
10
Finding and Viewing Videos
YouTube features short videos submitted by people from around the world. To use some features on iPod touch, you need to sign in to a YouTube account when prompted. For information about requirements and how to get a YouTube account, go to www.youtube.com. Note: YouTube isn’t available in all languages and locations. To use YouTube, iPod touch must join a Wi-Fi network that is connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 35. Browse videos: Tap Featured, Most Viewed, or Favorites. Or tap More to browse by Most Recent, Top Rated, History, Subscriptions, or Playlists. • Featured: Videos reviewed and featured by YouTube staff. • Most Viewed: Videos most seen by YouTube viewers. Tap All for all-time most viewed
videos, or Today or This Week for most-viewed videos of the day or week. • Favorites: Videos you’ve added to Favorites. When you sign in to a YouTube account,
account favorites appear and any existing favorites can be synced to your account. • Most Recent: Videos most recently submitted to YouTube. • Top Rated: Videos most highly rated by YouTube viewers. To rate videos, go to
www.youtube.com. • History: Videos you’ve viewed most recently. • Subscriptions: Videos from YouTube accounts to which you’ve subscribed. You must
be signed in to a YouTube account to use this feature. • Playlists: Videos you’ve added to playlists. You must be signed in to a YouTube
account to use this feature.
86
Search for a video: 1 Tap Search, then tap the YouTube search field.
2 Type a word or phrase that describes what you’re looking for, then tap Search. YouTube shows results based on video titles, descriptions, tags, and user names. Listed videos show title, rating, number of views, length, and the account name that posted the video. Play a video: Tap the video. The video begins to download to iPod touch and a progress bar appears. When enough of the video has downloaded, it begins to play. You can also tap to start the video.
Controlling Video Playback
When a video starts playing, the controls disappear so they don’t obscure the video. Show or hide the video controls: Tap the screen. Playhead
Download progress
Scrubber bar Scale Play/Pause Next/ Fast-forward Email Volume
Bookmark
Previous/rewind
Play or pause a video
Tap or . You can also press the center button on the iPod touch headset (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset.
Adjust the volume
Drag the volume slider, or use the volume buttons on the side of iPod touch. You can also use the volume buttons on the iPod touch headset (only on Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more).
Start a video over
Tap
Skip to the next or previous video in a list
Tap Tap
Chapter 10 YouTube
. twice to skip to the previous video. to skip to the next video.
87
Rewind or fast-forward
Touch and hold
or
.
Skip to any point in a video
Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar.
Stop watching a video before it finishes playing Tap Done, or press the Home
button.
Toggle between scaling a video to fill the screen Double-tap the video. You can also tap or fit to the screen make the video fill the screen, or tap it fit the screen. Add a video to Favorites using video controls
Start playing a video and tap
.
Email a link to the video using video controls
Start playing a video and tap
.
to to make
Managing Videos Tap
88
next to a video to see related videos and more controls for managing videos.
Add the video to Favorites
Tap “Add to Favorites.”
Add the video to a playlist
Tap “Add to Playlist,” then select an existing playlist or tap to create a new playlist.
Email a link to the video
Tap Share Video.
Browse and view related videos
Tap a video in the list of related videos to view, next to a video for more information. or tap
Chapter 10 YouTube
Getting More Information
Tap next to the video to show the video’s comments, description, date added, and other information.
Rate the video or add a comment
On the More Info screen, tap “Rate, Comment, or Flag,” then choose “Rate or Comment.” You must be signed in to a YouTube account to use this feature.
See more videos from this account
On the More Info screen, tap More Videos.
Subscribe to this YouTube account
On the More Info screen, tap More Videos, then tap “Subscribe to
Using YouTube Account Features
If you have a YouTube account, you can access account features such as subscriptions, comments and ratings, and playlists. To create a YouTube account, go to www.youtube.com. Show favorites you’ve added to your account: In Favorites, tap Sign In, then enter your username and password to see your account favorites. Any existing favorites you’ve added to iPod touch can be merged with your account favorites when you sign in. Delete a favorite: In Favorites, tap Edit, tap
next to a video, then tap Delete.
Show subscriptions you’ve added to your account: In Subscriptions, tap Sign In, then enter your username and password to see your account subscriptions. Tap an account in the list to see all videos for that account.
Chapter 10 YouTube
89
Unsubscribe from a YouTube account: In Subscriptions, tap an account in the list, then tap Unsubscribe. View playlists: In Playlists, tap a playlist to see the list of videos you’ve added. Tap any video in the playlist to begin playing videos from that point in the playlist. Edit a playlist: In Playlists, tap Edit, then do one of the following: • To delete the entire playlist, tap • To create a new playlist, tap
Add a video to a playlist: Tap a playlist.
next to a playlist, then tap Delete.
, then enter a name for the playlist. next to a video, then tap “Add to Playlist” and choose
Delete a video from a playlist: 1 In Playlists, tap a playlist, then tap Edit.
2 Tap
next to a playlist, then tap Delete.
Changing the Browse Buttons
You can replace the Featured, Most Viewed, Bookmarks, and Search buttons at the bottom of the screen with ones you use more frequently. For example, if you watch top rated videos often but don’t watch many featured videos, you could replace the Featured button with Top Rated. Change the browse buttons: Tap More and tap Edit, then drag a button to the bottom of the screen, over the button you want to replace.
You can drag the buttons at the bottom of the screen left or right to rearrange them. When you finish, tap Done. When you’re browsing for videos, tap More to access the browse buttons that aren’t visible. 90
Chapter 10 YouTube
Stocks
11
Viewing Stock Quotes
Stocks lets you see the latest available quotes for your selected stocks, funds, and indexes. To use Stocks, iPod touch must join a Wi-Fi network that is connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 35. Quotes are updated every time you open Stocks when connected to the Internet. Quotes may be delayed by up to 20 minutes or more depending upon the reporting service.
Add a stock, fund, or index to the stock reader: 1 Tap , then tap .
2 Enter a symbol, company name, fund name, or index, then tap Search.
3 Select an item from the search results and tap Done. View charts in landscape orientation: Rotate iPod touch sideways. Flick left or right to view the other charts in your stock reader. Show the progress of a stock, fund, or index over time: Tap the stock, fund, or index in your list, then tap 1d, 1w, 1m, 3m, 6m, 1y, or 2y. The chart adjusts to show progress over one day, one week, one month, three months, six months, one year, or two years.
91
When you’re viewing a chart in landscape orientation, you can touch the chart to display the value for a specific point in time.
Use two fingers to see the change in value over a specific period of time.
Delete a stock: Tap
and tap
Change the order of the list: Tap place in the list.
next to a stock, then tap Delete. . Then drag
next to a stock or index to a new
Switch the display to percentage change, price change, or market capitalization: Tap any of the values along the right side of the screen. Tap again to switch to another view. Or tap and tap %, Price, or Mkt Cap, then tap Done.
Getting More Information See the summary, chart, or news page about a stock, fund, or index: Select the stock, fund, or index in your list, then flick the pages underneath the stock reader to view the summary, chart, or recent news page. On the news page, you can scroll up and down to read headlines, or tap a headline to view the article in Safari. See more information at Yahoo.com: Select the stock, fund, or index in your list, then tap .
92
Chapter 11 Stocks
Maps
12
Finding and Viewing Locations WARNING: For important information about driving and navigating safely, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/ipodtouch. Maps provides street maps, satellite photos, a hybrid view, and street views of locations in many of the world’s countries. You can get detailed driving, public transit, or walking directions and traffic information. Find your current (approximate) location, and use your current location to get driving directions to or from another place. To use Maps, iPod touch must join a Wi-Fi network that is connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 35. Important: Maps, directions, and location-based applications provided by Apple depend on data collected and services provided by third parties. These data services are subject to change and may not be available in all geographic areas, resulting in maps, directions, or location-based information that may be unavailable, inaccurate, or incomplete. Compare the information provided on iPod touch to your surroundings and defer to posted signs to resolve any discrepancies. In order to provide your location, data is collected in a form that doesn’t personally identify you. If you don’t want such data collected, don’t use the feature. Not using this feature won’t impact the non–location-based functionality of your iPod touch.
Find a location and see a map: 1 Tap the search field to bring up the keyboard.
2 Type an address, intersection, area, landmark, bookmark, contact, or zip code.
3 Tap Search.
93
A pin marks the location. Tap the pin to see the name or description of the location.
Tap to get information about the location, get directions, add the location to your bookmarks or contacts list, or email a link to Google Maps.
Locations can include places of interest added by Google My Maps users (“Usercreated content”), and sponsored links that appear as special icons (for example, Zoom in to a part of a map
Pinch the map with two fingers. Or double-tap the part you want to zoom in on. Double-tap again to zoom in even closer.
Zoom out
Pinch the map. Or tap the map with two fingers. Tap with two fingers again to zoom out further.
Pan or scroll to another part of the map
Drag up, down, left, or right.
Find your current location: Tap
94
).
Chapter 12 Maps
.
Your current (approximate) location is indicated by a blue marker. If your location can’t be determined precisely, a blue circle also appears around the marker. The size of the circle depends on how precisely your location can be determined—the smaller the circle, the greater the precision. If you drag the map and tap approximate location.
again, iPod touch centers the map back to your
iPod touch uses Location Services to determine your location. Location Services uses available information from local Wi-Fi networks (if you have Wi-Fi turned on). This feature isn’t available in all areas. If Location Services is turned off, you’ll be prompted to turn it on. You can’t find your current location if Location Services is turned off. See “Location Services” on page 118. To conserve battery life, turn Location Services off when you’re not using it. In Settings, choose General > Location Services. Get information about your current location: Tap the blue marker, then tap . iPod touch displays the address of your current location, if available. You can use this information to: • Get directions • Add the location to contacts • Send the address via email • Bookmark the location
Use the dropped pin: Tap
, then tap Drop Pin.
A pin drops down on the map, which you can then drag to any location you choose.
Replace the pin: Tap , then tap Replace Pin. iPod touch drops the pin in the area you’re currently viewing.
Chapter 12 Maps
95
See a satellite or hybrid view: Tap , then tap Satellite or Hybrid to see just a satellite view or a combined street map and satellite view.
To return to map view, tap Map. See the Google Street View of a location: Tap . Flick left or right to pan through the 360° panoramic view. (The inset shows your current view.) Tap an arrow to move down the street.
Tap to return to map view
To return to map view, tap the map inset in the lower-right corner. Street View isn’t available in all areas.
96
Chapter 12 Maps
See the location of someone’s address in your contacts list
in the search field, then tap Contacts Tap and choose a contact. To locate an address in this way, the contact must include at least one address. If the contact has more than one address, choose the one you want to locate. You can also find the location of an address by tapping the address directly in Contacts.
Add a location to your contacts list
Find a location, tap the pin that points to it, tap next to the name or description, tap “Add to Contacts,” then tap “Create New Contact” or “Add to Existing Contact.”
Email a link to a Google Maps location
Find a location, tap the pin that points to it, tap next to the name or description, then tap Share Location and tap Email.
Bookmarking Locations
You can bookmark locations that you want to find again later. Bookmark a location: Find a location, tap the pin that points to it, tap next to the name or description, then tap “Add to Bookmarks” at the bottom of the Info screen. See a bookmarked location or recently viewed location: Tap then tap Bookmarks or Recents.
in the search field,
Getting Directions
You can get step-by-step directions for driving, taking public transit, or walking to a destination.
Get directions: 1 Tap Directions. 2 Enter starting and ending locations in the Start and End fields. By default, iPod touch starts with your current approximate location (if available). Tap in either field to choose a location in Bookmarks (including your current approximate location and the dropped pin, if available), Recents, or Contacts. For example, if a friend’s address is in your contacts list, you can tap Contacts and tap your friend’s name instead of having to type the address. To reverse the directions, tap
.
3 Tap Route (if you entered locations manually), then select driving ( ), public transit ( ), or walking ( ) directions. The travel options available depend on the route.
Chapter 12 Maps
97
4 Do one of the following: • To view directions one step at a time, tap Start, then tap
trip. Tap
to see the next leg of the
to go back.
• To view all the directions in a list, tap
, then tap List. Tap any item in the list to see a map showing that leg of the trip. Tap Route Overview to return to the overview screen.
If you’re driving or walking, the approximate distance and travel time appear at the top of the screen. If traffic data is available, the driving time is adjusted accordingly. If you’re taking public transit, the overview screen shows each leg of the trip and the mode of transportation, including where you need to walk. The top of the screen shows the time of the bus or train at the first stop, the estimated arrival time, and the total fare. Tap to set your departure or arrival time, and to choose a schedule for the trip. Tap the icon at a stop to see the departure time for that bus or train, and to get a link to the transit provider’s website or contact info. When you tap Start and step through the route, detailed information about each leg of the trip appears at the top of the screen. You can also get directions by finding a location on the map, tapping the pin that points to it, tapping , then tapping Directions To Here or Directions From Here. Switch start and end points, for reverse directions: Tap If you don’t see
, tap List, then tap Edit.
See recently viewed directions: Tap
98
Chapter 12 Maps
.
in the search field, then tap Recents.
Showing Traffic Conditions
When available, you can show highway traffic conditions on the map. Show or hide traffic conditions: Tap
, then tap Show Traffic or Hide Traffic.
Highways are color-coded according to the flow of traffic:
Red = less than 25 miles per hour Gray = no data currently available Yellow = 25–50 miles per hour Green = more than 50 miles per hour
If you don’t see color-coded highways, you may need to zoom out to a level where you can see major roads, or traffic conditions may not be available for that area.
Finding and Contacting Businesses
Find businesses in an area: 1 Find a location—for example, a city and state or country, or a street address—or scroll to a location on a map.
2 Type the kind of business in the text field and tap Search. Pins appear for matching locations. For example, if you locate your city and then type “movies” and tap Search, pins mark movie theatres in your city. Tap the pin that marks a business to see its name or description. Find businesses without finding the location first: Type things like: • restaurants san francisco ca • apple inc new york
Chapter 12 Maps
99
Contact a business or get directions: Tap the pin that marks a business, then tap next to the name. From there, you can do the following: • Tap an email address to send email to, or a web address to visit. • For directions, tap Directions To Here or Directions From Here. • To add the business to your contacts list, scroll down and tap “Create New Contact”
or “Add to Existing Contact.” • Share the location of the business by email
See a list of the businesses found in the search: From the Map screen, tap List. Tap a business to see its location. Or tap
next to a business to see its information.
Visit website Get directions Tap
100
to show contact info
Chapter 12 Maps
13
Weather
Viewing Weather Summaries
Tap Weather from the Home screen to get the current temperature and six-day forecast for one or more cities around the world. To use Weather, iPod touch must join a Wi-Fi network that is connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 35. Today’s high and low
Current conditions Current temperature
Six-day forecast
Add and delete cities
Number of cities stored
If the weather board is light blue, it’s daytime in that city—between 6:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. If the board is dark purple, it’s nighttime—between 6:00 p.m. and 6:00 a.m.
101
Add a city: 1 Tap , then tap .
2 Enter a city name or zip code, then tap Search.
3 Choose a city in the search list. Switch to another city: Flick left or right, or tap to the left or right of the row of dots. The number of dots below the weather board shows how many cities are stored. Reorder cities: Tap
, then drag
Delete a city: Tap
and tap
next to a city to a new place in the list. next to a city, then tap Delete.
Display temperature in Fahrenheit or Celsius: Tap
, then tap °F or °C.
Getting More Weather Information
You can see a more detailed weather report, news and websites related to the city, and more. See information about a city at Yahoo.com: Tap
102
Chapter 13 Weather
.
14
Voice Memos
Recording Voice Memos
Voice Memos lets you use iPod touch as a portable recording device (not available on first-generation iPod touch). Important: To use Voice Memos on iPod touch, you must connect the Apple Earphones with Remote and Mic (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) or a compatible accessory with microphone (such as Apple-branded earbuds or authorized third-party accessories marked with the Apple “Made for iPod” logo). You can adjust the recording level by moving the microphone closer to or further away from what you’re recording. For better recording quality, the loudest level on the level meter should be between –3dB and 0 dB.
Audio level meter
Go to voice memos
Record button
103
Record a voice memo: 1 Tap to start recording. You can also press the center button on a compatible threebutton headset with mic. 2 Tap to pause or to stop recording. You can also press the center button on a compatible three-button headset with mic to stop recording. You can record in either mono or stereo depending upon the external microphone you use. When you start a voice recording, iPod touch makes a shutter sound. To use other applications while recording your voice memo, you can lock iPod touch or press the Home button. Play back a voice memo you just recorded: Tap .
Listening to Voice Memos
Playhead Scrubber bar
Play a voice memo you’ve previously recorded: 1 Tap . Memos are listed in chronological order, with the most recent memo first.
2 Tap a memo, then tap . Tap to pause, then tap
again to resume playback.
Skip to any point in a memo: Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Listen through the built-in speaker: Tap Speaker.
Managing Voice Memos Delete a voice memo: Tap a memo in the list, then tap Delete.
104
Chapter 14 Voice Memos
See more information: Tap next to the memo. The Info screen displays information about the length, recording time and date, and provides additional editing and sharing functions.
Add a label to a memo: On the Info screen tap , then select a label in the list on the Label screen. To create a custom label, choose Custom at the bottom of the list, then type a name for the label.
Trimming Voice Memos
You can trim the beginning or ending of a voice memo to eliminate unwanted pauses or noise.
Trim a voice memo: 1 On the Voice Memos screen, tap
2 Tap Trim Memo.
3 Using the time markers as a guide, drag the edges of the audio region to adjust the beginning and end of the voice memo. To preview your edit, tap .
Chapter 14 Voice Memos
next to the memo you want to trim.
105
4 Tap Trim Voice Memo. Important: Edits you make to voice memos can’t be undone.
Sharing Voice Memos
You can share your voice memos as attachments in email messages.
Share a voice memo: 1 On the Voice Memos screen or Info screen, tap Share.
2 Choose Email Voice Memo to open a new message in Mail with the memo attached. A message appears if the file you’re trying to send is too large.
Syncing Voice Memos
iTunes automatically syncs voice memos to your iTunes library when you connect iPod touch to your computer. This lets you listen to voice memos on your computer and provides a backup if you delete them from iPod touch. Voice memos are synced to the Voice Memos playlist. iTunes creates the playlist if it doesn’t exist. When you sync voice memos to iTunes, they remain in the Voice Memos application until you delete them. If you delete a voice memo on iPod touch, it isn’t deleted from the Voice Memos playlist in iTunes. However, if you delete a voice memo from iTunes, it is deleted from iPod touch the next time you sync with iTunes. You can sync the iTunes Voice Memos playlist to the Music application on iPod touch using the Music pane in iTunes.
106
Sync the Voice Memos playlist to iPod touch: 1 Connect iPod touch to your computer.
2 In iTunes, select iPod touch in the sidebar.
3 Select the Music tab.
4 Select the “Include voice memos” checkbox and click Apply.
Chapter 14 Voice Memos
15
Notes
Writing and Reading Notes
Notes are listed in the order of the last modified date, with the most recently modified note at the top. You can see the first few words of each note in the list. Rotate iPod touch to view notes in landscape orientation and type using a larger keyboard. Add a note: Tap , then type your note and tap Done. Read a note: Tap the note. Tap
or
to see the next or previous note.
Edit a note: Tap anywhere on the note to bring up the keyboard. Delete a note: Tap the note, then tap .
Searching Notes
You can search the text of notes.
107
Search for notes: 1 Drag the note list down or tap the status bar to expose the search window.
2 Enter text in the search field. Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more of the results.
Emailing Notes Email a note: Tap the note, then tap . To email a note, iPod touch must be set up for email. See “Setting Up Email Accounts” on page 66.
Syncing Notes
You can set up iTunes to automatically sync your notes with email applications such as Mac OS X Mail (requires Mac OS X version 10.5.7 or later) or Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC. See “Syncing with iTunes” on page 9.
108
Chapter 15 Notes
16
Clock
World Clocks
You can add clocks to show the time in other major cities and time zones around the world. View clocks: Tap World Clock. If the clock face is white, it’s daytime in that city. If the clock face is black, it’s nighttime. If you have more than four clocks, flick to scroll through them.
Add a clock: 1 Tap World Clock.
2 Tap , then type the name of a city. Cities matching what you’ve typed appear below.
3 Tap a city to add a clock for that city. If you don’t see the city you’re looking for, try a major city in the same time zone. Delete a clock: Tap World Clock and tap Edit. Then tap Delete.
next to a clock and tap
Rearrange clocks: Tap World Clock and tap Edit. Then drag place in the list.
next to a clock to a new
109
Alarms
You can set multiple alarms. Set each alarm to repeat on days you specify, or to sound only once.
Set an alarm: 1 Tap Alarm and tap .
2 Adjust any of the following settings: • To set the alarm to repeat on certain days, tap Repeat and choose the days. • To choose the ringtone that sounds when the alarm goes off, tap Sound. • To set whether the alarm gives you the option to hit snooze, turn Snooze on or off.
If Snooze is on and you tap Snooze when the alarm sounds, the alarm stops and then sounds again in ten minutes. • To give the alarm a description, tap Label. iPod touch displays the label when the
alarm sounds. If at least one alarm is set and turned on, top of the screen.
appears in the iPod touch status bar at the
Turn an alarm on or off: Tap Alarm and turn any alarm on or off. If an alarm is turned off, it won’t sound again unless you turn it back on. If an alarm is set to sound only once, it turns off automatically after it sounds. You can turn it on again to reenable it. Change settings for an alarm: Tap Alarm and tap Edit, then tap you want to change. Delete an alarm: Tap Alarm and tap Edit, then tap Delete.
next to the alarm
next to the alarm and tap
Stopwatch
Use the stopwatch to time an event: 1 Tap Stopwatch.
2 Tap Start to start the stopwatch. • To record lap times, tap Lap after each lap. • To pause the stopwatch, tap Stop. Tap Start to resume. • To reset the stopwatch, tap Reset when the stopwatch is pause.
If you start the stopwatch and go to another iPod touch application, the stopwatch continues running in the background.
110
Chapter 16 Clock
Timer Set the timer: Tap Timer, then flick to set the number of hours and minutes. Tap Start to start the timer. Choose the sound: Tap When Timer Ends. Set a sleep timer: Set the timer, then tap When Timer Ends and choose Sleep iPod. When you set a sleep timer, iPod touch stops playing music or video when the timer ends. If you start the timer and then switch to another iPod touch application, the timer continues running.
Chapter 16 Clock
111
Calculator
17
Using the Calculator
Tap numbers and functions in Calculator just as you would with a standard calculator. When you tap the add, subtract, multiply, or divide button, a white ring appears around the button to let you know the operation to be carried out. Rotate iPod touch to get an expanded scientific calculator.
Standard Memory Functions • C: Tap to clear the displayed number. • MC: Tap to clear the memory. • M+: Tap to add the displayed number to the number in memory. If no number is in
memory, tap to store the displayed number in memory. • M-: Tap to subtract the displayed number from the number in memory. • MR: Tap to replace the displayed number with the number in memory. If the button
has a white ring around it, there is a number stored in memory. The stored number remains in memory when you switch between the standard and scientific calculators.
112
Scientific Calculator Keys
Rotate iPod touch to landscape orientation to display the scientific calculator.
2nd
Changes the trigonometric buttons (sin, cos, tan, sinh, cosh, and tanh) to their inverse functions (sin-1, cos-1, tan-1, sinh-1, cosh-1, and tanh-1). It also changes ln to log2, and ex to 2x. Tap 2nd again to return the buttons to their original functions.
(
Opens a parenthetical expression. Expressions can be nested.
)
Closes a parenthetical expression.
%
Calculates percentages, adds markups, and subtracts discounts. To calculate a percentage, use it with the multiplication (x) key. For example, to calculate 8% of 500, enter 500 x 8 % = which returns 40. To add a markup or subtract a discount, use it with the plus (+) or minus (–) key. For example, to compute the total cost of a $500 item with an 8% sales tax, enter 500 + 8 % = which returns 540.
1/x
Returns the reciprocal of a value in decimal format.
x2
Squares a value.
x3
Cubes a value.
yx
Tap between values to raise the first value to the power of the second value. For example, to compute 34, enter 3 yx 4 = which returns 81.
x!
Calculates the factorial of a value.
√
Calculates the square root of a value.
x
Use between values to calculate the x root of y. For example to compute 4√81, enter 81 x√y 4 = which returns 3.
√y
Chapter 17 Calculator
113
log
Returns the log base 10 of a value.
sin
Calculates the sine of a value.
sin-1
Calculates the arc sine of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.)
cos
Calculates the cosine of a value.
cos
Calculates the arc cosine of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.)
tan
Calculates the tangent of a value.
tan-1
Calculates the arc tangent of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.)
ln
Calculates the natural log of a value.
log2
Calculates the log base 2. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.)
sinh
Calculates the hyperbolic sine of a value.
sinh
Calculates the inverse hyperbolic sine of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.)
-1
-1
cosh
Calculates the hyperbolic cosine of a value.
cosh
Calculates the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.)
-1
tanh
Calculates the hyperbolic tangent of a value.
tanh
Calculates the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.)
ex
Tap after entering a value to raise the constant “e” (2.718281828459045...) to the power of that value.
2x
Calculates 2 to the power of the displayed value. For example, 10 2x = 1024. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.)
Rad
Changes the mode to express trigonometric functions in radians.
Deg
Changes the mode to express trigonometric functions in degrees.
π
Enters the value of π (3.141592653589793...).
EE
An operator that multiplies the currently displayed value by 10 to the power of the next value you enter.
Rand
Returns a random number between 0 and 1.
-1
114
Chapter 17 Calculator
Settings
18
Settings allows you to customize iPod touch applications, set the date and time, configure your network connection, and enter other preferences for iPod touch.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi settings determine whether iPod touch uses local Wi-Fi networks to connect to the Internet. Turn Wi-Fi on or off: Choose Wi-Fi and turn Wi-Fi on or off. Join a Wi-Fi network: Choose Wi-Fi, wait a moment as iPod touch detects networks in range, then select a network. If necessary, enter a password and tap Join. (Networks that require a password appear with a lock icon.) Once you’ve joined a Wi-Fi network manually, iPod touch automatically joins it whenever the network is in range. If more than one previously used network is in range, iPod touch joins the one last used. When iPod touch is joined to a Wi-Fi network, the Wi-Fi icon in the status bar at the top of the screen shows signal strength. The more bars you see, the stronger the signal. Set iPod touch to ask if you want to join a new network: Choose Wi-Fi and turn “Ask to Join Networks” on or off. When you’re trying to access the Internet, by using Safari or Mail for example, and you aren’t in range of a Wi-Fi network you‘ve previously used, this option tells iPod touch to look for another network. iPod touch displays a list of all available Wi-Fi networks that you can choose from. (Networks that require a password appear with a lock icon.) If “Ask to Join Networks” is turned off, you must manually join a network to connect to the Internet when a previously used network isn’t available. Forget a network, so iPod touch doesn’t join it automatically: Choose Wi-Fi and tap next to a network you’ve joined before. Then tap “Forget this Network.”
115
Join a closed Wi-Fi network: To join a Wi-Fi network that isn’t shown in the list of scanned networks, choose Wi-Fi > Other, then enter the network name. If the network requires a password, tap Security, tap the type of security the network uses, and enter the password. You must already know the network name, password, and security type to connect to a closed network. Some Wi-Fi networks may require you to enter or adjust additional settings, such as a client ID or static IP address. Ask the network administrator which settings to use. Adjust settings to connect to a Wi-Fi network: Choose Wi-Fi, then tap network.
next to a
VPN
This setting appears when you have VPN configured on iPod touch, allowing you to turn VPN on or off. See “Network” on page 117.
Notifications
This setting appears when you’ve installed an application from the App Store that uses the Apple Push Notification service. Push notifications are used by applications to alert you of new information, even when the application isn’t running. Notifications differ depending upon the application, but may include text or sound alerts, and a numbered badge on the application’s icon on the Home screen. You can turn notifications off if you don’t want to be notified or want to conserve battery life. Turn all notifications on or off: Tap Notifications and turn notifications on or off. Turn sounds, alerts, or badges on or off for an application: Tap Notifications, then choose an application from the list and choose the types of notification you want to turn on or off.
Brightness
Screen brightness affects battery life. Dim the screen to extend the time before you need to recharge iPod touch, or use Auto-Brightness. Adjust the screen brightness: Choose Brightness and drag the slider. Set whether iPod touch adjusts screen brightness automatically: Choose Brightness and turn Auto-Brightness on or off. If Auto-Brightness is on, iPod touch adjusts the screen brightness for current light conditions using the built-in ambient light sensor.
116
Chapter 18 Settings
General
The General settings include date and time, security, network, and other settings that affect more than one application. This is also where you can find information about your iPod touch, and reset iPod touch to its original state.
About Choose General > About to get information about iPod touch, including: • Number of songs, videos, and photos • Total storage capacity • Space available • Software version • Serial and model numbers • Wi-Fi and Bluetooth addresses • Legal information • Regulatory information
Wallpaper You see a wallpaper background picture when you unlock iPod touch. You can select one of the images that came with iPod touch, or use a photo you’ve synced to iPod touch from your computer. Set wallpaper: Choose Wallpaper and choose a picture.
Sounds Adjust alerts volume: Choose General > Sounds and drag the slider. Or, if no song or video is playing use the volume buttons on the side of iPod touch. Note: On the first-generation iPod touch, choose General > Sounds and select whether you want sound effects to play over the internal speaker, through the headphones, or both. Set alert and effects sounds: Choose General > Sounds and turn items on or off. You can set iPod touch to play a sound whenever you: • Get an email message • Send an email message • Have an appointment that you’ve set up to alert you • Lock iPod touch • Type using the keyboard
Network Use the Network settings to configure a VPN (virtual private network) connection, or access Wi-Fi settings.
Chapter 18 Settings
117
Add a new VPN configuration: Choose General > Network > VPN > Add VPN Configuration. VPNs used within organizations allow you to communicate private information securely over a non-private network. You may need to configure VPN, for example, to access your work email on iPod touch. iPod touch can connect to VPNs that use the L2TP, PPTP, or Cisco IPSec protocols. Ask your network administrator which settings to use. In most cases, if you’ve set up VPN on your computer, you can use the same VPN settings for iPod touch. Once you’ve entered VPN settings, a VPN switch appears in the Settings menu that you can use to turn VPN on or off. VPN may also be automatically set up by a configuration profile. See “Installing Configuration Profiles” on page 15. Change a VPN configuration: Choose General > Network > VPN and tap the configuration you want to update. Turn VPN on or off: Tap Settings and turn VPN on or off. Delete a VPN configuration: Choose General > Network > VPN, tap the blue arrow to the right of the configuration name, and tap Delete VPN at the bottom of the configuration screen.
Bluetooth iPod touch can connect wirelessly to Bluetooth headphone devices for music listening (not available on first-generation iPod touch). See “Bluetooth Headphones” on page 34. Turn Bluetooth on or off: Choose General > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth on or off.
Location Services Location Services allows applications such as Maps to gather and use data indicating your location. Location Services doesn’t correlate the data it collects with your personally identifiable information. Your approximate location is determined using available information from local Wi-Fi networks (if you have Wi-Fi turned on). You can turn Location Services off if you don’t want to use this feature. If you turn Location Services off, you’ll be prompted to turn it on again the next time an application tries to use this feature. Turn Location Services on or off: Choose General > Location Services and turn location services on or off. To conserve battery life, turn Location Services off when you’re not using it.
Auto-Lock Locking iPod touch turns off the display to save your battery and to prevent unintended operation of iPod touch.
118
Chapter 18 Settings
Set the amount of time before iPod touch locks: Choose General > Auto-Lock and choose a time.
Passcode Lock By default, iPod touch doesn’t require you to enter a passcode to unlock it. Set a passcode: Choose General > Passcode Lock and enter a 4-digit passcode, then enter the passcode again to verify it. iPod touch then requires you to enter the passcode to unlock it or to display the passcode lock settings. Turn passcode lock off: Choose General > Passcode Lock, enter your passcode, and tap Turn Passcode Off, then enter your passcode again. Change the passcode: Choose General > Passcode Lock, enter your passcode, and tap Change Passcode. Enter your passcode again, then enter and reenter your new passcode. If you forget your passcode, you must restore the iPod touch software. See “Updating and Restoring iPod touch Software” on page 158. Set how long before your passcode is required: Choose General > Passcode Lock and enter your passcode. Tap Require Passcode, then select how long iPod touch can be idle before you need to enter a passcode to unlock it. Erase data after ten failed passcode attempts: Choose General > Passcode Lock, enter your passcode, and tap Erase Data to turn it on. After ten failed passcode attempts, your settings are reset to their defaults and all your information and media is erased: • On Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more: by removing the encryption key to the data
(which is encrypted using 256-bit AES encryption) • On Fall 2009 models with less than 32 GB, and models prior to Fall 2009: by overwriting
the data Important: You can’t use iPod touch while data is being overwritten. This can take up to four hours or more, depending on the model and storage capacity of your iPod touch. (On Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more, the removal of the encryption key is immediate.)
Restrictions You can set restrictions for the use of some applications and for iPod content on iPod touch. For example, parents can restrict explicit music from being seen on playlists, or turn off YouTube access entirely.
Turn on restrictions: 1 Choose General > Restrictions, then tap Enable Restrictions.
2 Enter a four-digit passcode.
3 Reenter the passcode.
Chapter 18 Settings
119
Turn off restrictions: Choose General > Restrictions, then enter the passcode. Tap Disable Restrictions, then reenter the passcode. If you forget your passcode, you must restore your iPod touch software from iTunes. See “Updating and Restoring iPod touch Software” on page 158. Set application restrictions: Set the restrictions you want by tapping individual controls on or off. By default, all controls are on (not restricted). Tap an item to turn it off and restrict its use. Safari is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. You cannot use Safari to browse the web or access web clips. Other third-party applications may allow web browsing even if Safari is disabled. YouTube is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. The iTunes Store is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. You cannot preview, purchase, or download content. The App Store is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. You cannot install applications on iPod touch. Location data isn’t provided to applications.
Restrict purchases within applications: Turn In-App Purchases off. When enabled, this feature allows you to purchase additional content or features within applications downloaded from the App Store. Set content restrictions: Tap Ratings For, then select a country from the list. You can then set restrictions using that country’s ratings system for the following categories of content: • Music & Podcasts • Movies • TV Shows • Apps
In the United States for example, to allow only movies rated PG or below, tap Movies, then select PG from the list. Note: Not all countries have rating systems.
Home Choose General > Home to set preferences for double-clicking the Home button and searching categories on the Spotlight page. You can set iPod touch so that doubleclicking the Home button goes to the Home screen, Search, or iPod.
120
Chapter 18 Settings
Set whether double-clicking the Home button shows iPod controls: Turn on iPod Controls to display iPod controls when you’re playing music and double-click the Home button. This feature works even when the display is turned off or iPod touch is locked. Set what categories appear in search results: Tap Search Results. All search categories in the list are selected by default. Tap an item to deselect it. Set the order of search result categories: Tap Search Results, then drag search category to a new place in the list.
next to a
Date and Time These settings apply to the time shown in the status bar at the top of the screen, and in world clocks and calendars. Set whether iPod touch shows 24-hour time or 12-hour time: Choose General > Date & Time and turn 24-Hour Time on or off. (Not available in all countries.) Set the date and time: Choose General > Date & Time. Tap Time Zone and enter the name of a major city in your time zone. Tap the “Date & Time” return button, then tap “Set Date & Time” and enter the date and time.
Keyboard Turn Auto-Correction on or off: Choose General > Keyboard and turn Auto-Correction on or off. By default, if the default keyboard for the language you select has a dictionary, iPod touch automatically suggests corrections or completed words as you type. Turn Auto-Capitalization on or off: Choose General > Keyboard and turn AutoCapitalization on or off. By default, iPod touch automatically capitalizes words after you type sentence-ending punctuation or a return character. Set whether caps lock is enabled: Choose General > Keyboard and turn Enable Caps Lock on or off. If caps lock is enabled and you double-tap the Shift key on the keyboard, all letters you type are uppercase. The Shift key turns blue when caps lock is on. Turn the “.” shortcut on or off: Choose General > Keyboard and turn “.” Shortcut on or off. The “.” shortcut lets you double-tap the space bar to enter a period followed by a space when you’re typing. It’s on by default. Turn international keyboards on or off: Choose General > Keyboards > International Keyboards and turn on the keyboards you want. If more than one keyboard is turned on, tap to switch keyboards when you’re typing. When you tap the symbol, the name of the newly active keyboard appears briefly. See “International Keyboards” on page 30.
Chapter 18 Settings
121
International Use International settings to set the language for iPod touch, turn keyboards for different languages on or off, and set the date, time, and telephone number formats for your region. Set the language for iPod touch: Choose General > International > Language, choose the language you want to use, then tap Done. Set the Voice Control language for iPod touch: Choose General > International > Voice Control, then choose the language you want to use (available only on Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more). Turn international keyboards on or off: Choose General > International > Keyboards, and turn on the keyboards you want. If more than one keyboard is turned on, tap to switch keyboards when you’re typing. When you tap the symbol, the name of the newly active keyboard appears briefly. See “International Keyboards” on page 30. Set date, time, and telephone number formats: Choose General > International > Region Format, and choose your region. The Region Format also determines the language used for the days and months that appear in native iPod touch applications.
Accessibility To turn on accessibility features (available only on Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more), choose Accessibility and choose the features you want. See Chapter 21, “Accessibility,” on page 139.
Resetting iPod touch Reset all settings: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset All Settings. All your preferences and settings are reset. Information, such as your contacts and calendars, and media, such as your songs and videos, aren’t deleted. Erase all content and settings: Connect iPod touch to your computer or a power adapter. Choose General > Reset and tap “Erase All Content and Settings.” This resets all settings to their defaults and erases all your information and media: • On Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more: by removing the encryption key to the data
(which is encrypted using 256-bit AES encryption) • On Fall 2009 models with less than 32 GB, and models prior to Fall 2009: by overwriting
the data Important: You can’t use iPod touch while data is being overwritten. This can take up to four hours or more, depending on the model and storage capacity of your iPod touch. (On Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more, the removal of the encryption key is immediate.)
122
Chapter 18 Settings
Reset network settings: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset Network Settings. When you reset network settings, your list of previously used networks and VPN settings not installed by a configuration profile are removed. Wi-Fi is turned off and then back on, disconnecting you from any network you’re on. The Wi-Fi and “Ask to Join Networks” settings are left turned on. To remove VPN settings installed by a configuration profile, choose Settings > General > Profile, then select the profile and tap Remove. Reset the keyboard dictionary: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset Keyboard Dictionary. You add words to the keyboard dictionary by rejecting words iPod touch suggests as you type. Tap a word to reject the correction and add the word to the keyboard dictionary. Resetting the keyboard dictionary erases all words you’ve added. Reset the Home screen layout: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset Home Screen Layout. Reset the location warnings: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset Location Warnings. Location warnings are the requests made by applications (such as Maps) to use Location Services with those applications. iPod touch stops presenting the warning for an application the second time you tap OK. Tap Reset Location Warnings to resume the warnings.
Music
The Music settings apply to songs, podcasts, and audiobooks. Turn Shake to Shuffle on or off: Choose Music, then turn Shake to Shuffle on or off. When Shake to Shuffle is on, you can shake iPod touch to turn shuffle on and immediately change the currently playing song. Set iTunes to play songs at the same sound level: In iTunes, choose iTunes > Preferences if you’re using a Mac, or Edit > Preferences if you’re using a PC, then click Playback and select Sound Check. Set iPod touch to use the iTunes volume settings (Sound Check): Choose Music and turn Sound Check on. Use the equalizer to customize the sound on iPod touch: Choose Music > EQ and choose a setting. Set a volume limit for music and videos: Choose Music > Volume Limit and drag the slider to adjust the maximum volume. Tap Lock Volume Limit to assign a code to prevent the setting from being changed.
Chapter 18 Settings
123
WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss, see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/ipodtouch.
Video
Video settings apply to video content, including rented movies. You can set where to resume playing videos that you previously started, turn closed captioning on or off, and set up iPod touch to play videos on your TV. Set where to resume playing: Choose Video > Start Playing, then select whether you want videos that you previously started watching to resume playing from the beginning or where you left off. Turn closed captioning on or off: Choose Video and turn Closed Captioning on or off.
TV Out Use these settings to set up how iPod touch plays videos on your TV. For more information about using iPod touch to play videos on your TV, see “Watching Videos on a TV” on page 53. Turn widescreen on or off: Choose Video and turn Widescreen on or off. Set TV signal to NTSC or PAL: Choose Video > TV Signal and select NTSC or PAL. NTSC and PAL are TV broadcast standards. iPod touch displays NTSC 480p/PAL 576p when attached to a TV using a component cable, or NTSC 480i/PAL 576i using a composite cable. Your TV might use either of these, depending on where you bought it. If you’re not sure which to use, check the documentation that came with your TV.
Photos
Use Photos settings to specify how slideshows display your photos. Set the length of time each slide is shown: Choose Photos > Play Each Slide For and select the length of time. Set a transition effect: Choose Photos > Transition and select a transition effect. Set whether to repeat slideshows: Choose Photos and turn Repeat on or off. Set photos to appear randomly or in order: Choose Photos and turn Shuffle on or off.
124
Chapter 18 Settings
Store
Use Store settings to change or create an iTunes Store account. By default, the iTunes account you’re signed in to when you sync iPod touch with your computer appears in Store settings. You can change accounts on iPod touch to purchase music or applications from another account. If you don’t have an iTunes account, you can create one in Store settings. Go to www.apple.com/legal/itunes/ww/ for iTunes Store terms and conditions. Sign in to an account: Choose Store and tap Sign in, then enter your user name and password. View your iTunes Store account information: Choose Store and tap View Account, then type your password and follow the onscreen instructions. Sign in to a different account: Choose Store and tap Sign out, then tap Sign in and enter your username and password. Create a new account: Choose Store and tap Create New Account, then follow the onscreen instructions.
Mail, Contacts, Calendars
Use Mail, Contacts, Calendars settings to set up and customize accounts for iPod touch: • Microsoft Exchange • MobileMe • Google email • Yahoo! Mail • AOL • Other POP and IMAP mail systems • LDAP accounts for Contacts • CalDAV or iCalendar (.ics) accounts for Calendars
Accounts The Accounts section lets you set up accounts on iPod touch. The specific settings that appear depend on the type of account you’re setting up. Your service provider or system administrator should be able to provide the information you need to enter. For more information, see: • “Setting Up Accounts” on page 13 • “Adding Contacts” on page 84 • “Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars” on page 75
Change an account’s settings: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” choose an account, then make the changes you want.
Chapter 18 Settings
125
Changes you make to an account’s settings on iPod touch are not synced to your computer, so you can configure your accounts to work with iPod touch without affecting the account settings on your computer. Stop using an account: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” choose an account, then turn Account off. If an account is off, iPod touch doesn’t display the account and doesn’t send or check email from or sync other information with that account, until you turn it back on. Adjust advanced settings: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” choose an account, then do one of the following: • To set whether drafts, sent messages, and deleted messages are stored on iPod touch or
remotely on your email server (IMAP accounts only), tap Advanced and choose Drafts Mailbox, Sent Mailbox, or Deleted Mailbox. If you store messages on iPod touch, you can see them even when iPod touch isn’t connected to the Internet. • To set how long before messages are removed permanently from Mail on iPod touch, tap
Advanced and tap Remove, then choose a time: Never, or after one day, one week, or one month. • To adjust email server settings, tap Host Name, User Name, or Password under
Incoming Mail Server or Outgoing Mail Server. Ask your network administrator or Internet service provider for the correct settings. • To adjust SSL and password settings, tap Advanced. Ask your network administrator or
Internet service provider for the correct settings. Delete an account from iPod touch: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” choose an account, then scroll down and tap Delete Account. Deleting an account means you can no longer access the account with your iPod touch. All email and the contacts, calendar, and bookmark information synced with the account are removed from iPod touch. However, deleting an account doesn’t remove the account or its associated information from your computer.
Fetch New Data This setting lets you turn Push on or off for MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, Yahoo! Mail, and any other push accounts you’ve configured on iPod touch. Push accounts automatically deliver new information to iPod touch when new information appears on the server (some delays may occur). To fetch or sync pushed data, iPod touch must join a Wi-Fi network that is connected to the Internet. You might want to turn Push off to suspend delivery of email and other information, or to conserve battery life. When Push is off, and with accounts that don’t support push, data can still be fetched—that is, iPod touch can check with the server and see if new information is available. Use the Fetch New Data setting to determine how often data is requested. For optimal battery life, don’t fetch too frequently.
126
Chapter 18 Settings
Turn Push on: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Fetch New Data, then tap to turn Push on. Set the interval to fetch data: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Fetch New Data, then choose how often you want to fetch data for all accounts. To conserve battery life, fetch less frequently. Setting Push to OFF or setting Fetch to Manually in the Fetch New Data screen overrides individual account settings.
Mail The Mail settings, except where noted, apply to all accounts you’ve set up on iPod touch. To turn alerts sounds for new or sent mail on or off, use the General > Sounds settings. Set the number of messages shown on iPod touch: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Show, then choose a setting. Choose to see the most recent 25, 50, 75, 100, or 200 messages. To download additional messages when you’re in Mail, scroll to the bottom of your inbox and tap Load More Messages. Note: For Microsoft Exchange accounts, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” and choose the Exchange account. Tap “Mail days to sync” and choose the number of days of mail you want to sync with the server. Set how many lines of each message are previewed in the message list: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Preview, then choose a setting. You can choose to see up to five lines of each message. That way, you can scan a list of messages in a mailbox and get an idea of what each message is about. Set a minimum font size for messages: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Minimum Font Size, then choose Small, Medium, Large, Extra Large, or Giant. Set whether iPod touch shows To and Cc labels in message lists: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” then turn Show To/Cc Label on or off. If Show To/Cc Label is on, To or Cc next to each message in a list indicates whether the message was sent directly to you or you received a copy. Set whether iPod touch confirms that you want to delete a message: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” and turn Ask Before Deleting on or off. If Ask Before Deleting is on, to delete a message you must tap , then confirm by tapping Delete. Set whether iPod touch automatically loads remote images: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” and turn Load Remote Images on or off. If Load Remote Images is off, you can load images manually when reading a message.
Chapter 18 Settings
127
Set whether iPod touch sends you a copy of every message you send: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” then turn Always Bcc Myself on or off. Set the default email account: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Default Account, then choose an account. This setting determines which of your accounts a message is sent from when you create a message from another iPod touch application, such as sending a photo from Photos or tapping the email address of a business in Maps. To send the message from a different account, tap the From field in the message and choose another account. Add a signature to your messages: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Signature, then type a signature. You can set iPod touch to add a signature—your favorite quote, or your name, title, and phone number, for example—to the bottom of every message you send.
Contacts Set how contacts are sorted: Choose “Mail Contacts, Calendars,” then under Contacts tap Sort Order and do one of the following: • To sort by first name first, tap First, Last. • To sort by last name first, tap Last, First.
Set how contacts are displayed: Choose “Mail Contacts, Calendars,” then under Contacts tap Display Order and do one of the following: • To show first name first, tap First, Last. • To show last name first, tap Last, First.
Calendar Set alerts to sound when your receive meeting invitation: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” and under Calendar tap “New Invitation Alerts” to turn it on. Set how far back in the past to show your calendar events on iPod touch: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Sync, then choose a period of time. Turn on Calendar time zone support: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Time Zone Support, then turn Time Zone Support on. Select a time zone for calendars by tapping Time Zone and entering the name of a major city. When Time Zone Support is on, Calendar displays event dates and times in the time zone of the city you selected. When Time Zone Support is off, Calendar displays events in the time zone of your current location as determined by the network time. Important: If you’re traveling, iPod touch may not display events or sound alerts at the correct local time. To manually set the correct time, see “Date and Time” on page 121.
128
Chapter 18 Settings
Safari
Safari settings let you select your Internet search engine, set security options, and for developers, turn on debugging.
General You can use Google or Yahoo! to perform Internet searches. Select a search engine: Choose Safari > Search Engine and select the search engine you want to use. You can set Safari to automatically fill out web forms using contact information, names and passwords you previously entered, or both. Enable AutoFill: Choose Safari > AutoFill, then do one of the following: • To use information from contacts, turn Use Contact Info on, then choose My Info and
select the contact you want to use. Safari uses information from Contacts to fill in contact fields on web forms. • To use information from names and passwords, turn Names & Passwords on.
When this feature is on, Safari remembers names and passwords of websites you visit and automatically fills in the information when you revisit the website. • To remove all AutoFill information, tap Clear All.
Security By default, Safari is set to show features of the web, such as some movies, animation, and web applications. You may wish to change security settings to help protect iPod touch from possible security risks on the Internet. Change security settings: Choose Safari, then do one of the following: • To set whether you’re warned when visiting potentially fraudulent websites, turn Fraud
Warning on or off. Fraud warning protects you from potentially fraudulent Internet sites. When you visit a suspicious site, Safari warns you about its suspect nature and doesn’t load the page. • To enable or disable JavaScript, turn JavaScript on or off.
JavaScript lets web programmers control elements of the page—for example, a page that uses JavaScript might display the current date and time or cause a linked page to appear in a new pop-up page. • To enable or disable plug-ins, turn Plug-ins on or off. Plug-ins allow Safari to play some
types of audio and video files and to display Microsoft Word files and Microsoft Excel documents. • To block or allow pop-ups, turn Block Pop-ups on or off. Blocking pop-ups stops only
pop-ups that appear when you close a page or open a page by typing its address. It doesn’t block pop-ups that open when you tap a link. Chapter 18 Settings
129
• To set whether Safari accepts cookies, tap Accept Cookies and choose Never, “From
visited,” or Always. A cookie is a piece of information that a website puts on iPod touch so the website can remember you when you visit again. That way, webpages can be customized for you based on information you may have provided. Some pages won’t work correctly unless iPod touch is set to accept cookies. • To clear the history of webpages you’ve visited, tap Clear History. • To clear all cookies from Safari, tap Clear Cookies. • To clear the browser cache, tap Clear Cache.
The browser cache stores the content of pages so the pages open faster the next time you visit them. If a page you open doesn’t show new content, clearing the cache may help.
Developer The debug console can help you resolve webpage errors. If it’s turned on, the console appears automatically when a webpage error occurs. Turn the debug console on or off: Choose Safari > Developer, and turn Debug Console on or off.
Nike + iPod
Use Nike + iPod settings to activate and adjust settings for the Nike + iPod application (not available on first-generation iPod touch). See Chapter 20, “Nike + iPod,” on page 137.
130
Chapter 18 Settings
iTunes Store
19
About the iTunes Store
You can search for, browse, preview, purchase, and download music, audiobooks, TV shows, movies, and music videos from the iTunes Store directly to iPod touch. You can listen to audio or watch video podcasts from the iTunes Store, either by streaming them from the Internet or by downloading them directly to iPod touch. Note: The iTunes Store is not available in all regions, and iTunes Store content may vary across regions. To access the iTunes Store, iPod touch must join a Wi-Fi network that’s connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 35. To purchase songs or write reviews, you need an iTunes Store account. By default, iPod touch gets your iTunes Store account settings from iTunes. If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, or if you want to make purchases from another iTunes Store account, go to Settings > Store. See “Store” on page 125. You don’t need an iTunes Store account to play or download podcasts.
131
Finding Music, Videos, and More Browse content: Tap Music, Videos, or Podcasts. Or tap More to browse by Audiobooks, iTunes U, or Downloads. Choose a sorting method at the top of the screen to browse by lists such as Featured, Top Tens, or Genres.
Search for content: Tap Search, tap the search field and enter one or more words, then tap Search. Search results are grouped by category, such as Movies, Albums, or Podcasts.
Tap an item in a list to see more details on its Info screen. You can read reviews, write your own review, or email a link about the item to a friend. Depending on the item, you can also buy, download, or rent it. Note: If you join a Starbucks Wi-Fi network in a select Starbucks location (available in the U.S. only), the Starbucks icon appears at the bottom of the screen. You can preview and purchase the currently playing and other songs from featured Starbucks Collections. 132
Chapter 19 iTunes Store
Purchasing Music or Audiobooks
When you find a song, album, or audiobook you like in the iTunes Store, you can purchase and download it to iPod touch. You can preview an item before you purchase it to make sure it’s what you want. Preview a song or audiobook: Tap the item.
Purchase and download a song, album, or audiobook: 1 Tap the price, then tap Buy Now.
2 Sign in to your account as requested, then tap OK. If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, tap Create New Account to set one up. Your purchase is charged to your iTunes Store account. For additional purchases made within the next fifteen minutes, you don’t have to enter your password again. An alert appears if you’ve previously purchased one or more songs from an album. Tap Buy if you want to purchase the entire album including the songs you’ve already purchased, or tap Cancel if you want to purchase any remaining songs individually. Some albums include bonus content, which is downloaded to your iTunes library on your computer. Not all bonus content is downloaded directly to iPod touch. Once you purchase an item it begins downloading and appears in the Downloads screen. See “Checking Download Status” on page 135. Purchased songs are added to a Purchased playlist on iPod touch. If you delete the Purchased playlist, iTunes creates a new one when you buy an item from the iTunes Store. You can redeem iTunes Store gift cards, gift certificates, or other promotional codes to make purchases. When you’re signed in to your account, your remaining store credit appears with your account information at the bottom of most iTunes Store screens. Enter a redemption code: Tap Music, then tap Redeem at the bottom of the screen and follow the onscreen instructions.
Purchasing or Renting Videos
When you find a movie, TV show, or music video you like in the iTunes Store, you can purchase and download it to iPod touch. You can purchase movies and TV shows in standard (480p) or high definition (720p) format. When you purchase a high-definition video on iPod touch, a standard definition version compatible with iPod and iPhone immediately downloads for viewing. The high definition version appears in iTunes on your computer in the Downloads queue. You must be signed in to your iTunes Store account on your computer to view and download items from the Downloads queue.
Chapter 19 iTunes Store
133
Rented movies are available in standard definition only (not available in all regions). See “Watching Rented Movies” on page 53. Preview a video: Tap Preview.
Purchase or rent a video: 1 Tap Buy or Rent.
2 Sign in to your account as requested, then tap OK. If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, tap Create New Account to set one up. Your purchase is charged to your iTunes Store account. For additional purchases made within the next fifteen minutes, you don’t have to enter your password again. Once you purchase an item it begins downloading and appears in the Downloads screen. Rented movies won’t begin playing until the download completes. See “Checking Download Status” on page 135. Purchased videos are added to a Purchased playlist on iPod touch. If you delete the Purchased playlist, iTunes creates a new one the next time you buy an item from the iTunes Store. You can redeem iTunes Store gift cards, gift certificates, or other promotional codes to make purchases. When you’re signed in to your account, your remaining store credit appears with your account information at the bottom of most iTunes Store screens. Enter a redemption code: Tap Music, then tap Redeem at the bottom of the screen and follow the onscreen instructions.
Streaming or Downloading Podcasts
You can listen to audio podcasts or watch video podcasts streamed over the Internet from the iTunes Store. You can also download audio and video podcasts to iPod touch. Podcasts you download to iPod touch are synced to your iTunes library when you connect iPod touch to your computer. Tap Podcasts to browse podcasts in the iTunes Store. To see a list of episodes, tap a podcast. Video podcasts are indicated by the icon. Stream a podcast: Tap the podcast title. Download a podcast: Tap the Free button, then tap Download. Downloaded podcasts appear in the Podcasts list in Music. Listen to or watch a podcast you’ve downloaded: In Music, tap Podcasts at the bottom of the screen (you may need to tap More first), then tap the podcast. Video podcasts also appear in your list of videos. Get more episodes of the podcast you’ve downloaded: In the Podcasts list in Music, tap the podcast, then tap Get More Episodes.
134
Chapter 19 iTunes Store
Delete a podcast: In the Podcasts list in Music, swipe left or right over the podcast, then tap Delete.
Checking Download Status
You can check the Downloads screen to see the status of in-progress and scheduled downloads, including purchases you’ve pre-ordered. See the status of items being downloaded: Tap Downloads. To pause a download, tap . If a download is interrupted, iPod touch starts the download again the next time it has an Internet connection. Or, if you open iTunes on your computer, iTunes completes the download to your iTunes library (if your computer is connected to the Internet and signed in to the same iTunes account). See the status of pre-ordered items: Tap Downloads. Pre-ordered items appear in a list until the date the item is released. Tap the item for release date information. Once the item is available for download, a download icon appears next to the download. Download a pre-ordered item: Tap the item, then tap
.
Pre-ordered items don’t download automatically when they’re released. Return to the Downloads screen to begin the download.
Syncing Purchased Content
iTunes automatically syncs everything you’ve downloaded or purchased on iPod touch to your iTunes library when you connect iPod touch to your computer. This lets you access the downloads on your computer and provides a backup if you delete purchased content from iPod touch. Purchased content is synced to the “Purchased on
Changing the Browse Buttons
You can replace the Music, Podcasts, Videos, and Search buttons at the bottom of the screen with ones you use more frequently. For example, if you download audiobooks often but don’t watch many videos, you could replace the Videos button with Audiobooks.
Chapter 19 iTunes Store
135
Change the browse buttons: Tap More and tap Edit, then drag a button to the bottom of the screen, over the button you want to replace.
You can drag the buttons at the bottom of the screen left or right to rearrange them. When you finish, tap Done. When you’re browsing, tap More to access the browse buttons that aren’t visible.
Viewing Account Information
To view your iTunes Store account information on iPod touch, tap your account (at the bottom of most iTunes Store screens). Or go to Settings > Store and tap View Account. You must be signed in to view your account information. See “Store” on page 125.
Verifying Purchases
You can use iTunes on your computer to verify that all the music, videos, applications, and other items you bought from the iTunes Store or App Store are in your iTunes library. You might want to do this if a download was interrupted.
Verify your purchases: 1 Make sure your computer is connected to the Internet.
2 In iTunes, choose Store > Check for Available Downloads.
3 Enter your iTunes Store account ID and password, then click Check. Purchases not yet on your computer are downloaded. The Purchased playlist displays your purchases. However, because you can add or remove items in this list, it might not be accurate. To see all of your purchases, sign in to your account, choose Store > View My Account, and click Purchase History.
136
Chapter 19 iTunes Store
Nike + iPod
20
Activating Nike + iPod
When activated in Settings, the Nike + iPod application appears on the Home screen (not available on first-generation iPod touch). With a Nike + iPod Sensor (sold separately), the Nike + iPod application provides audible feedback on your speed, distance, time elapsed, and calories burned during a running or walking workout. When iPod touch is connected to iTunes on your computer, you can send your workout information to Nikeplus.com, where you can track your progress, set goals, and participate in challenges.
See the Nike + iPod documentation for information about activating and using Nike + iPod. Turn Nike + iPod on or off: In Settings, choose Nike + iPod and turn Nike + iPod on or off. When Nike + iPod is turned on, its icon appears on the Home screen.
137
Additional Nike + iPod Settings
In Settings, choose Nike + iPod to activate and adjust settings for the Nike + iPod application. Choose a PowerSong: Choose PowerSong and select a song from your music library. Turn spoken feedback on or off: Choose Spoken Feedback and select a male or female voice to accompany your workout, or Off to turn off spoken feedback. Set a distance preference: Choose Distance, then select Miles or Kilometers to measure your workout distance. Set your weight: Choose Weight, then flick to enter your weight. Set the screen orientation: Choose Lock Screen, then select a screen orientation preference. Set up the Nike + iPod Sensor: Choose Sensor, then follow the onscreen instructions to set up your sensor (sold separately). You can use a Nike+ compatible remote (sold separately) to control Nike + iPod wirelessly. Before using a remote for the first time, you must set it up on iPod touch. Set up the Nike + iPod remote: Choose Remote, then follow the onscreen instructions to set up your remote (third-party product sold separately).
138
Chapter 20 Nike + iPod
Accessibility
21
Accessibility Features
In addition to the many features that make iPod touch easy to use for everyone, accessibility features (available only on Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) are designed to make it easier for users with visual, auditory, or other physical disabilities to use iPod touch. These accessibility features include: • VoiceOver • Zoom • White on Black • Mono Audio • Speak Auto-text
With the exception of VoiceOver, these accessibility features work with all iPod touch applications, including third-party applications you download from the App Store. VoiceOver works with all applications that come preinstalled on iPod touch. In addition, third-party developers can use the iPod touch Accessibility API to make their applications accessible for VoiceOver users. For more information about the accessibility features of iPod touch, go to www.apple.com/accessibility. Each accessibility feature can be turned on or off in the Accessibility settings on iPod touch. You can also turn accessibility features on or off in iTunes when iPod touch is connected to your computer.
Turn accessibility features on or off in iTunes: 1 Connect iPod touch to your computer.
2 In iTunes, select iPod touch in the sidebar.
3 In the Summary pane, click Configure Universal Access in the Options section.
139
4 Select the accessibility features that you want to use and click OK.
VoiceOver
VoiceOver describes aloud what appears onscreen, so that you can use iPod touch without seeing it. VoiceOver speaks in the language specified in International settings, which may be influenced by the Region Locale setting. Note: VoiceOver isn’t available in all languages. VoiceOver tells you about each element on the screen as it’s selected. When an element is selected, it’s enclosed by a black rectangle (for the benefit of those who can see the screen) and VoiceOver speaks the name or describes the item. The enclosing rectangle is referred to as the VoiceOver cursor. If text is selected, VoiceOver reads the text. If a control (such as a button or switch) is selected and Speak Hints is turned on, VoiceOver may tell you the action of the item or provide instructions for you—for example, “double-tap to open.” When you go to a new screen, VoiceOver plays a sound and automatically selects and speaks the first element of the screen (typically, the item in the upper-left corner). VoiceOver also lets you know when the display changes to landscape or portrait, and when the screen is locked or unlocked.
Setting Up VoiceOver Important: VoiceOver changes the gestures used to control iPod touch. Once VoiceOver is turned on, you have to use VoiceOver gestures to operate iPod touch— even to turn VoiceOver off again to resume standard operation. Turn VoiceOver on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver and tap the VoiceOver On/Off switch. You can also set Triple-click Home to turn VoiceOver on or off. See “Triple-click Home” on page 148. Note: You cannot use VoiceOver and Zoom at the same time. 140
Chapter 21 Accessibility
Turn spoken hints on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver, and tap the Speak Hints On/Off switch. Spoken hints are turned on by default. Set the VoiceOver speaking rate: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver, and adjust the Speaking Rate slider. You can choose what kind of feedback you get when you type. You can set VoiceOver to speak characters, words, both, or nothing. If you choose to hear both characters and words, VoiceOver speaks each character as you type it, then speaks the whole word when you finish it by entering a space or punctuation. Choose typing feedback: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Typing Feedback, then choose Characters, Words, Characters and Words, or Nothing. Change the language spoken by VoiceOver: In Settings, choose General > International > Language, then select a language and tap OK. Some languages may be influenced by the Region Local setting. In Settings, choose General > International > Region Format and select the format. Note: VoiceOver isn’t available in all languages. Practice gestures: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Practice Gestures, then tap Practice VoiceOver Gestures. Practice the gestures described in “VoiceOver Gestures,” below. When you’re finished practicing, tap Done.
VoiceOver Gestures When VoiceOver is turned on, the standard touchscreen gestures have different effects. These and some additional gestures allow you to move around the screen and to control the individual elements when they’re selected. VoiceOver gestures include using two and three fingers to tap or flick. For best results when using two- and threefinger gestures, relax and let your fingers touch the screen with some space between your fingers. You can use standard gestures when VoiceOver is turned on, by double-tapping and holding your finger on the screen. A series of tones indicates that normal gestures are in force. They remain in effect until you lift your finger. Then VoiceOver gestures resume. You can use many different techniques to enter VoiceOver gestures. For example, you can enter a two-finger tap using two fingers from one hand, or one finger from each hand. You can also use your thumbs. Try different techniques to discover which works best for you. If your gestures don’t work, try quicker movements, especially for double-tap and flicking gestures. To flick, try quickly brushing the screen with your finger or fingers. You can practice VoiceOver gestures in Settings: choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Practice Gestures and tap the Practice VoiceOver Gestures button.
Chapter 21 Accessibility
141
Here’s a summary of key VoiceOver gestures: Navigate and Read • Tap: Speak item. • Flick right or left: Select the next or previous item. • Flick up or down: Depends on the Rotor Control setting. See “Rotor Control” on
page 142. • Two-finger tap: Stop speaking the current item. • Two-finger flick up: Read all from top of screen. • Two-finger flick down: Read all from current position. • Three-finger flick up or down: Scroll one page at a time. • Three-finger flick right or left: Go to the next or previous page (such as the Home
screen, Stocks, or Safari). • Three-finger tap: Speak the scroll status (which page or rows are visible).
Select and Activate • Double-tap: Activate selected item. • Touch an item with one finger, tap the screen with another finger (“split-tapping”):
Activate item. • Double-tap and hold (1 second) + standard gesture: Use a standard gesture.
The double-tap and hold gesture tells iPod touch to interpret the subsequent gesture as standard. For example, you can double-tap and hold, then without lifting your finger, drag your finger to slide a switch. • Two-finger double tap: Play or pause in iPod, YouTube, Voice Memos, or Photos. Start
or pause recording in Voice Memos. Start or stop the stopwatch. • Three-finger double tap: Mute or unmute VoiceOver. • Three-finger triple tap: Turn the display on or off.
Do single-finger flicking gestures quickly, to distinguish them from dragging gestures.
Rotor Control The rotor control is an invisible dial that you can use to change the results of up and down flick gestures when VoiceOver is turned on. Operate the rotor: Rotate two fingers on the iPod touch screen to “turn” the dial to choose between options.
142
Chapter 21 Accessibility
The effect of the rotor depends on what you’re doing. For example, if you’re reading text in an email you received, you can use the rotor to switch between hearing text spoken word-by-word or character-by-character when you flick up or down. If you’re browsing a webpage, use the rotor to choose whether you hear text word-by-word or character-by-character, hear just the headers, hear just the links (all of them, visited links, or links not yet visited), hear form elements, or hear descriptions of images. In other words, you can use the rotor setting to hear all the text, or to jump from one element to another of a certain type, such as headers or links. Rotor options depend on the context of what you’re doing. Reading text • Select and hear text character-by-character • Select and hear text word-by-word
Browsing a webpage • Select and hear text character-by-character • Select and hear text word-by-word • Select and hear headers • Select and hear links • Select and hear form controls • Select and hear visited links • Select and hear links not visited • Select and hear images • Select and hear static text • Zoom in or out
Entering text • Move insertion point and hear text character-by-character • Move insertion point and text word-by-word • Text editing functions • Auto-text
Using a control (such as the spinner for setting the time in Clock) • Select and hear value character-by-character • Select and hear value word-by-word • Adjust the value of the control object
Chapter 21 Accessibility
143
Using VoiceOver Select items on the screen: Drag your finger over the screen. VoiceOver identifies each element as you touch it. You can also move systematically from one element to the next by flicking left or right with a single finger. Elements are selected from leftto-right, top-to-bottom. Flick right to go to the next element, or flick left to go to the previous element. “Tap” a selected item when VoiceOver is turned on: Double-tap anywhere on the screen. Speak the text of an element, character by character or word by word: With the element selected, flick up or down with one finger. Flick down to read the next character, or flick up to read the previous character. Twist the rotor control to read word by word. Adjust a slider: With a single finger, flick up to increase the setting or down to decrease the setting. VoiceOver announces the setting as you adjust it. Scroll a list or area of the screen: Flick up or down with three fingers. Flick down to page down through the list, or flick up to page up through the list. When paging through a list, VoiceOver speaks the range of items displayed (for example, “showing rows 5 through 10”). You can also scroll continuously through a list, instead of paging through it. Doubletap and hold. When you hear a series of tones, you can move your finger up or down to scroll the list. Continuous scrolling stops when you lift your finger. Use a list index: Some lists have an alphabetical index along the right side. The index cannot be selected by flicking between elements; you must touch the index directly to select it. With the index selected, flick up or down to move along the index. You can also double-tap, then slide your finger up or down. Unlock iPod touch: Select the Unlock switch, then double-tap the screen. Rearrange the Home screen: On the Home screen select the icon you want to move. Double-tap and hold, then drag the icon. VoiceOver speaks the row and column position as your drag the icon. Release the icon when it’s in the location you want. You can drag additional icons. Drag an item to the left or right edge of the screen to move it to another page of the Home screen. When you’re finished rearranging the icons, press the Home button.
144
Chapter 21 Accessibility
Mute VoiceOver
Double-tap with three fingers. Double-tap again with three fingers to turn speaking back on. To turn off only VoiceOver sounds, set the Ring/ Silent switch to Silent.
Stop speaking an item
Tap once with two fingers. Tap again with two fingers to resume speaking. Speaking automatically resumes when you select another item.
Turn off the display while you use VoiceOver
Triple-tap with three fingers. Triple-tap again with three fingers to turn on the display again.
Speak entire screen from the top
Flick up with two fingers.
Speak from current item to bottom of screen
Flick down with two fingers.
Status information about iPod touch can be heard by touching the top of the screen. This can include the time, battery life, Wi-Fi signal strength, and more.
Entering and Editing Text When you select a text field with VoiceOver, you can use the onscreen keyboard to enter text. You can use the editing features of iPod touch to cut, copy, or paste in the text field. Note: Safari doesn’t support copying webpage content. The editing features work only in editable text fields.
Enter text: 1 Use VoiceOver to select an editable text field, then double tap to display the insertion point and bring up the onscreen keyboard. If the field already contains text, the insertion point is placed at the beginning or at the end of the text. Double-tap again to place the insertion point at the opposite end. VoiceOver tells you the position of the insertion point. The insertion point and onscreen keyboard may appear automatically when you select a text field. VoiceOver announces when you’re in editing mode.
2 To type, select a key on the keyboard by flicking left or right, then double-tap to enter the character. Or drag you finger around the keyboard to select a key, and, while holding the key with one finger, tap the screen with another finger to enter the character. VoiceOver speaks the key when it’s selected, and again when it’s entered. To enter an accented character, double-tap and hold until you hear a sound that indicates the alternate characters have appeared, then drag left or right to select and hear the choices. Release your finger to enter the current selection.
Chapter 21 Accessibility
145
Move the insertion point: Flick up or down to move the insertion point forward or backward in the text. VoiceOver makes a sound when the insertion point moves, and speaks the character that the insertion point moved across. Use the rotor to choose whether you want to move the insertion point by character or by word. Select text: Use the rotor to choose edit. Flick up or down to choose between the Select and Select All functions, then double tap. If you chose Select, the word closest to the insertion point is selected when you double-tap. If you chose Select All, the entire text is selected. Pinch to increase or decrease the selection. Cut, Copy, or Paste: Make sure the rotor is set to edit. With text selected, flick up or down to choose Cut, Copy, or Paste, then double-tap. Undo: Shake iPod touch, flick left or right to choose the action to undo, then doubletap.
Using Maps With VoiceOver, you can zoom in or out, select pins, and get information about locations. Zoom in or out: Use the rotor to choose zoom mode, then flick up or down to zoom in or out. Select a pin: Touch a pin, or flick left or right to move from one item to another. Get information about a location: With a pin selected, double-tap to display the information flag. Flick left or right to select the flag, then double-tap to display the information page.
Editing Voice Memos You can use VoiceOver gestures to trim Voice Memo recordings. Trim a voice memo: On the Voice Memos screen, select the button to the right of the memo you want to trim, then double-tap. Then select Trim Memo and double-tap. Select the beginning or end of the trim tool. Flick up to drag to the right, or flick down to drag to the left. VoiceOver announces the amount of time the current position will trim from the recording. To execute the trim, select Trim Voice Memo and double-tap.
Zoom
Many iPod touch applications let you zoom in and out specific elements. For example, you can double-tap or use the pinch gesture to expand webpage columns in Safari. Zoom is a special accessibility feature that lets you magnify the entire screen of any application you’re using to help you see what’s on the display. Turn Zoom on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > Zoom and tap the Zoom On/Off switch.
146
Chapter 21 Accessibility
Note: You cannot use VoiceOver and Zoom at the same time. Zoom in or out: Double-tap the screen with three fingers. By default, the screen is magnified by 200 percent. If you manually change the magnification (by using the tap-and-drag gesture, described below), iPod touch automatically returns to that magnification when you zoom in by double-tapping with three fingers. Increase magnification: With three fingers, tap and drag toward the top of the screen (to increase magnification) or toward the bottom of the screen (to decrease magnification). The tap-and-drag gesture is similar to a double-tap, except you don’t lift your fingers on the second tap—instead, drag your fingers on the screen. Once you start dragging, you can drag with a single finger. Move around the screen: When zoomed in, drag or flick the screen with three fingers. Once you start dragging, you can drag with a single finger so that you can see more of the screen. Hold a single finger near the edge of the display to pan to that side of the screen image. Move your finger closer to the edge to pan more quickly. When you open a new screen, Zoom always goes to the top-middle of the screen.
White on Black
Use White on Black to invert the colors on the iPod touch display, which may make it easier to read the screen. The screen looks like a photographic negative when White on Black is turned on. Invert the screen’s colors: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility and tap the “White on Black” switch.
Mono Audio
Mono Audio combines the sound of the left and right channels into a mono signal played on both sides. This enables users with hearing impairment in one ear to hear the entire sound signal with the other ear. Turn Mono Audio on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility and tap the Mono Audio switch.
Speak Auto-text
Speak Auto-text speaks the text corrections and suggestions iPod touch makes when you’re typing. Turn Speak Auto-text on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility and tap the Speak Auto-text switch. Speak Auto-text also works with VoiceOver or Zoom.
Chapter 21 Accessibility
147
Triple-click Home
Triple-click Home provides an easy way to turn some of the Accessibility features on or off when you press the Home button quickly three times. You can set Triple-click Home to turn VoiceOver on or off, turn White on Black on or off, or present the options to: • Turn VoiceOver on or off • Turn Zoom on or off • Turn White on Black on or off
Triple-click Home is turned off by default. Set the Triple-click Home function: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > Triple-click Home and choose the function you want.
Closed Captioning and Other Helpful Features
Many features available on all models of iPod touch help make iPod touch accessible to all users, including those with visual or auditory impairments.
Closed Captioning You can turn on closed captioning for videos in iPod settings. See “Video” on page 124.
Voice Control Voice Control (available only on Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) lets you control iPod music playback by using voice commands. See “Using Voice Control with iPod” on page 46.
Widescreen Keyboards Several applications let you rotate iPod touch when you’re typing so that you can use a larger keyboard: • Mail • Safari • Notes • Contacts
Instant Messaging (IM) Chat The App Store features many Internet Messaging (IM) applications such as AIM, BeejiveIM, ICQ, and Yahoo! Messenger that are optimized for iPod touch.
Minimum Font Size for Mail Messages To increase readability, set a minimum font size for Mail message text to Large, Extra Large, or Giant. See “Mail” on page 127.
148
Chapter 21 Accessibility
Universal Access in Mac OS X Take advantage of the Universal Access features in Mac OS X when you use iTunes to sync information and content from your iTunes library to iPod touch. In the Finder, choose Help > Mac Help, then search for “universal access.” For more information about iPod touch and Mac OS X accessibility features, go to www.apple.com/accessibility.
Chapter 21 Accessibility
149
A
Apple iPod touch Support Site
Comprehensive support information is available online at www.apple.com/support/ ipodtouch.
General Low-Battery Image Appears iPod touch is low on power and needs to charge for up to ten minutes before you can use it. For information about charging iPod touch, see “Charging the Battery” on page 36.
or
iPod touch Doesn’t Respond • iPod touch may be low on power. Connect iPod touch to your computer or to its
power adapter to charge. See “Charging the Battery” on page 36. • Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of iPod touch for a few seconds until
a red slider appears, and then press and hold the Home button until the application you were using quits. • If that doesn’t work, turn iPod touch off, then turn it on again. Press and hold the
Sleep/Wake button on top of iPod touch for a few seconds until a red slider appears, and then drag the slider. Then press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears.
150
Appendix
Troubleshooting
• If that doesn’t work, reset iPod touch. Press and hold both the Sleep/Wake button
and the Home
button for at least ten seconds, until the Apple logo appears.
iPod touch Still Doesn’t Respond After Reset • Reset iPod touch settings. From the Home screen choose Settings > General > Reset
> Reset All Settings. All your preferences are reset, but your data and media aren’t deleted. • If that doesn’t work, erase all content on iPod touch. See “Resetting iPod touch” on
page 122. • If that doesn’t work, restore the iPod touch software. See “Updating and Restoring
iPod touch Software” on page 158.
“This accessory is not supported by iPod touch” Appears The accessory you attached may not work with iPod touch. Make sure the dock connector is free of debris.
Connect-to-iTunes Screen Appears iPod touch needs to be registered with iTunes. Connect iPod touch to your computer and open iTunes if it doesn’t open automatically.
iTunes and Syncing iPod touch Doesn’t Appear in iTunes • The iPod touch battery might need to be recharged. For information about charging
iPod touch, see “Charging the Battery” on page 36. • Disconnect other USB devices from your computer and connect iPod touch to a
different USB 2.0 port on your computer (not on your keyboard). • Restart your computer and reconnect iPod touch to your computer. • Download and install (or reinstall) the latest version of iTunes from
www.apple.com/itunes.
Syncing Doesn’t Work • The iPod touch battery might need to be recharged. For information about charging
iPod touch, see “Charging the Battery” on page 36. • Disconnect other USB devices from your computer and connect iPod touch to a
different USB 2.0 port on your computer (not on your keyboard). • Restart your computer and reconnect iPod touch to your computer. • For push accounts, make sure iPod touch is joined to a Wi-Fi network that is
connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 35.
Appendix A Troubleshooting
151
• Download and install (or reinstall) the latest version of iTunes from
www.apple.com/itunes.
Contacts, Calendars, or Bookmarks Don’t Sync • Download and install (or reinstall) the latest version of iTunes from
www.apple.com/itunes. • For push accounts, make sure iPod touch is joined to a Wi-Fi network that is
connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 35.
Yahoo! or Google Contacts Doesn’t Sync iTunes may not be able to connect with Yahoo! or Google. Make sure iPod touch is joined to a Wi-Fi network that is connected to the Internet. Make sure your computer is connected to the Internet, and that you’ve entered the correct ID and password in iTunes. Connect iPod touch to your computer, click the Info tab in iTunes, click Configure in the Contacts section, then enter your current ID and password.
Yahoo! Address Book Still Has Contacts Deleted From iPod touch Yahoo! Address Book doesn’t allow contacts containing a Messenger ID to be deleted through syncing. To delete a contact containing a Messenger ID, log in to your Yahoo! account online and delete the contact using Yahoo! Address Book.
Sound, Music, and Video No Sound • Unplug and reconnect the headset. Make sure the connector is pushed in all
the way. • Make sure the volume isn’t turned down all the way. • Music on iPod touch might be paused. Try pressing the center button on the
iPod touch headset (included with Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more) or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset to resume playback. Or from the Home screen, tap Music, tap Now Playing, then tap . • Check to see if a volume limit is set. From the Home screen choose Settings > iPod
> Volume Limit. For more information, see “Music” on page 123. • Make sure you’re using the latest version of iTunes (go to www.apple.com/itunes). • If you’re using the optional dock’s line out port, make sure your external speakers or
stereo are turned on and working properly.
152
Appendix A Troubleshooting
Song, Video, or Other Items Won’t Play The song may have been encoded in a format that iPod touch doesn’t support. The following audio file formats are supported by iPod touch. These include formats for audiobooks and podcasting: • AAC (M4A, M4B, M4P, up to 320 Kbps) • Apple Lossless (a high-quality compressed format) • MP3 (up to 320 Kbps) • MP3 Variable Bit Rate (VBR) • WAV • AA (audible.com spoken word, formats 2, 3, and 4) • AAX (audible.com spoken word, AudibleEnhanced format) • AIFF
The following video file formats are supported by iPod touch: • H.264 (Baseline Profile Level 3.0) • MPEG-4 (Simple Profile)
A song encoded using Apple Lossless format has full CD-quality sound, but takes up only about half as much space as a song encoded using AIFF or WAV format. The same song encoded in AAC or MP3 format takes up even less space. When you import music from a CD using iTunes, it’s converted to AAC format by default. Using iTunes for Windows, you can convert nonprotected WMA files to AAC or MP3 format. This can be useful if you have a library of music encoded in WMA format. iPod touch doesn’t support WMA, MPEG Layer 1, MPEG Layer 2 audio files, or audible. com format 1. If you have a song or video in your iTunes library that isn’t supported by iPod touch, you may be able to convert it to a format iPod touch supports. See iTunes Help for more information.
iTunes Stores iTunes Store Isn’t Available To use the iTunes Store, iPod touch must be connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 35. The iTunes Store isn’t available in all countries.
Can’t Purchase Content To use the iTunes Store or the App Store, iPod touch must join a Wi-Fi network that is connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to the Internet” on page 35.
Appendix A Troubleshooting
153
To purchase content from the iTunes Store or App Store, you must have an iTunes Store account. Open iTunes on your computer and choose Store > Create Account. You can also set up an account on iPod touch. See “Viewing Account Information” on page 136. Note: The iTunes Store is available only in some countries.
Safari, Mail, and Contacts Can’t Send Email If iPod touch is unable to send email, try the following: • In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” and select the account you’re trying to use. Tap Account Info, then tap SMTP under Outgoing Mail Server. You can set up additional SMTP servers, or select one from another mail account on iPod touch. Contact your Internet service provider for configuration information. • Set up your email account directly on iPod touch instead of syncing it from iTunes.
In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” tap Add Account and enter your account information. If iPod touch is unable to locate your service provider’s settings when you enter your email address, go to www.apple.com/support and search for HT1277 to get additional help in setting up your account. • Turn iPod touch off, then turn it on again. Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button
on top of iPod touch for a few seconds until a red slider appears, and then drag the slider. Then press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. For additional troubleshooting information, go to www.apple.com/support and search for TS1426. If you still can’t send email, you can call an Apple Expert (not available in all countries). Go to www.apple.com/support/expert for information. If Apple Expert is not available in your country, get a free GMail, Yahoo!, or AOL account and try forwarding your mail to that account.
Can’t Receive Email If iPod touch is unable to receive email, try the following: • If you’re using one or more computers to check the same email account, that may be creating a lock-out issue. For more information, go to www.apple.com/support and search for TS2621. • Set up your email account directly on iPod touch instead of syncing it from iTunes.
In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” tap Add Account and enter your account information. If iPod touch is unable to locate your service provider’s settings when you enter your email address, go to www.apple.com/support and search for HT1277 to get additional help in setting up your account.
154
Appendix A Troubleshooting
• Turn iPod touch off, then turn it on again. Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button
on top of iPod touch for a few seconds until a red slider appears, and then drag the slider. Then press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. • Turn off Wi-Fi so iPod touch is connecting to the Internet via the cellular data
network. In Settings, choose Wi-Fi and turn off Wi-Fi. For additional troubleshooting information, go to www.apple.com/support and search for TS1426. If you still can’t receive email, you can call an Apple Expert (not available in all countries). Go to www.apple.com/support/expert for information. If Apple Expert is not available in your country, get a free GMail, Yahoo!, or AOL account and try forwarding your mail to that account.
Email Attachment Won’t Open The file type may not be supported. iPod touch supports the following email attachment file formats: .doc
Microsoft Word
.docx
Microsoft Word (XML)
.htm
webpage
.html
webpage
.key
Keynote
.numbers
Numbers
.pages
Pages
Preview, Adobe Acrobat
.ppt
Microsoft PowerPoint
.pptx
Microsoft PowerPoint (XML)
.rtf
Rich Text Format
.txt
text
.vcf
contact information
.xls
Microsoft Excel
.xlsx
Microsoft Excel (XML)
GAL Contacts Don’t Appear Make sure iPod touch is joined to a Wi-Fi network that is connected to the Internet. Check your Microsoft Exchange settings to make sure you’re on the right server. In Settings, tap “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” and choose an account to display its settings. If you’re trying to search for GAL contacts in Contacts, tap Groups and tap Directories at the bottom of the list.
Appendix A Troubleshooting
155
Backing Up iPod touch
iTunes creates backups of settings, downloaded applications and data, and other information on iPod touch. You can use a backup to restore these items to your iPod touch after a software restore or to transfer the information to another iPod touch. Backing up iPod touch or restoring from a backup is not the same as syncing content and other items (such as music, podcasts, photos, videos, and applications that you download via iTunes) with your iTunes library. Backups include settings, downloaded applications and data, and other information that resides on iPod touch. You can restore these items from a backup using iTunes, but you may also have to sync your iTunes library content again. Applications downloaded from the App Store are backed up the next time you sync with iTunes. Afterwards, only application data is backed up when you sync with iTunes.
Creating Backups Backups can be created in the following ways: • Once iPod touch has been configured to sync with a particular computer, iTunes automatically makes a backup of iPod touch on that computer when you sync. iTunes won’t automatically back up an iPod touch that isn’t configured to sync with that computer. If you’ve configured iPod touch to automatically sync with iTunes on a specific computer, iTunes will back up iPod touch every time you connect it to that computer. Automatic syncing is turned on by default. iTunes only makes one backup each time you connect, even if you sync multiple times before disconnecting. • If you choose to update the software on iPod touch, iTunes will back up iPod touch
automatically, even if it isn’t configured to sync with iTunes on that computer. • If you choose to restore the software on iPod touch, iTunes asks if you want to back
up iPod touch before restoring. If you use a Bluetooth headset or car kit with iPod touch and you restore settings, you must pair the Bluetooth device with iPod touch again to use it. For more information about backups, including the settings and information stored in a backup, go to www.apple.com/support and search for HT1766.
156
Appendix A Troubleshooting
Restoring from a Backup You can restore the settings, application data, and other information from a backup, or use this feature to transfer these items to another iPod touch.
Restore iPod touch from a backup: 1 Connect iPod touch to the computer you normally sync with.
2 In iTunes, Control-click iPod touch in the sidebar and choose “Restore from Backup” from the menu that appears.
3 Choose the backup that you want to restore from the pop-up menu, then click Restore. If your backup is encrypted, you’ll need to enter your password. After restoring from a backup, previous data is no longer accessible via the iPod touch user interface, but it isn’t erased from your iPod touch. For information about erasing all content and settings, see “Resetting iPod touch” on page 122. Important: Restoring iPod touch from a backup restores all data in the backup, including data for other applications. If you choose an old backup, restoring from it could replace the data for applications with data that is not current.
Removing a Backup You can remove a backup of iPod touch from the list of backups in iTunes. You may want to do this, for example, if a backup was created on someone else’s computer.
Remove a backup: 1 In iTunes, open iTunes Preferences. • Windows: Choose Edit > Preferences. • Mac: Choose iTunes > Preferences.
2 Click Devices (iPod touch does not need to be connected).
3 Select the backup you want to remove, then click Delete Backup.
4 Confirm you wish to remove the selected backup by clicking Delete Backup.
5 Click OK to close the iTunes Preferences Window.
Appendix A Troubleshooting
157
Updating and Restoring iPod touch Software
You can use iTunes to update or reinstall iPod touch software, restore default settings, and delete all data on iPod touch. • If you update, the iPod touch software is updated. Your downloaded applications, settings, and data aren’t affected. Note: In some cases, an update may also include restoring iPod touch. • If you restore, the latest version of iPod touch software is reinstalled, settings are
restored to their defaults, and data stored on iPod touch is deleted, including downloaded applications, songs, videos, contacts, photos, calendar information, and any other data. If you’ve backed up iPod touch with iTunes on your computer, you can restore data from the backup at the end of the restore process. Deleted data is no longer accessible via the iPod touch user interface, but isn’t erased from your iPod touch. For information about erasing all content and settings, see “Resetting iPod touch” on page 122.
Update or restore iPod touch: 1 Make sure you have an Internet connection and have installed the latest version of iTunes from www.apple.com/itunes.
2 Connect iPod touch to your computer.
3 Select iPod touch in the iTunes sidebar and click the Summary tab.
4 Click “Check for Update.” iTunes tells you if there’s a newer version of the iPod touch software available.
5 Click Update to install the latest version of the software. Or click Restore to restore. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the restore process. For more information about updating and restoring iPod touch software, go to www.apple.com/support and search for HT1414.
158
Appendix A Troubleshooting
Appendix
B
Other Resources
Safety, Software, and Service Information
The following table describes where to get more iPod touch-related safety, software, and service information. To learn about
Do this
Using iPod touch safely
See the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/ipodtouch for the latest safety and regulatory information.
iPod touch service and support, tips, forums, and Apple software downloads
Go to www.apple.com/support/ipodtouch.
The latest information about iPod touch
Go to www.apple.com/ipodtouch.
Using iTunes
Open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help. For an online iTunes tutorial (available in some areas only), go to www.apple.com/support/itunes.
MobileMe
Go to www.me.com.
Using iPhoto on Mac OS X
Open iPhoto and choose Help > iPhoto Help.
Using Address Book on Mac OS X
Open Address Book and choose Help > Address Book Help.
Using iCal on Mac OS X
Open iCal and choose Help > iCal Help.
Microsoft Outlook, Windows Address Book, Adobe Photoshop Album, and Adobe Photoshop Elements
See the documentation that came with those applications.
Obtaining warranty service
First follow the advice in this guide and online resources. Then go to www.apple.com/support or see the Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/ipodtouch.
Battery replacement service
Go to www.apple.com/support/ipod/service/ battery.
Using iPod touch in an enterprise environment
Go to www.apple.com/iphone/enterprise.
159
Viewing the User Guide on iPod touch
The iPod touch User Guide, optimized for viewing on iPod touch, is available at help. apple.com/ipodtouch. View the guide on iPod touch: In Safari, tap bookmark.
, then tap the iPod touch User Guide
Add an icon for the guide to the Home screen: When viewing the guide, tap , then tap “Add to Home Screen.” The iPod touch User Guide is available in many languages. View guide in a different language: Tap “Change Language” at the bottom of the screen on the main contents page, then choose the language you want.
Disposal and Recycling Information
Your iPod must be disposed of properly according to local laws and regulations. Because this product contains a battery, the product must be disposed of separately from household waste. When your iPod reaches its end of life, contact Apple or your local authorities to learn about recycling options. For information about Apple’s recycling program, go to: www.apple.com/environment/recycling Deutschland: Dieses Gerät enthält Batterien. Bitte nicht in den Hausmüll werfen. Entsorgen Sie dieses Gerätes am Ende seines Lebenszyklus entsprechend der maßgeblichen gesetzlichen Regelungen.
Nederlands: Gebruikte batterijen kunnen worden ingeleverd bij de chemokar of in een speciale batterijcontainer voor klein chemisch afval (kca) worden gedeponeerd. Türkiye: EEE yönetmeliğine (Elektrikli ve Elektronik Eşyalarda Bazı Zararlı Maddelerin Kullanımının Sınırlandırılmasına Dair Yönetmelik) uygundur. Taiwan: Battery Replacement: The rechargeable battery in iPod touch should be replaced only by an authorized service provider. For battery replacement services, go to: www.apple.com/support/ipod/service/battery
160
Appendix B Other Resources
European Union—Disposal Information: This symbol means that according to local laws and regulations your product should be disposed of separately from household waste. When this product reaches its end of life, take it to a collection point designated by local authorities. Some collection points accept products for free. The separate collection and recycling of your product at the time of disposal will help conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment.
Apple and the Environment
At Apple, we recognize our responsibility to minimize the environmental impacts of our operations and products. For more information go to: www.apple.com/environment
Appendix B Other Resources
161
12-hour time 121 24-hour time 121
A
accessibility features 139 Mono Audio 147 setting up iPod touch using VoiceOver 8 settings 122 Speak Auto-text 147 Triple-click Home 148 VoiceOver 140 White on Black 147 Zoom 146 accounts 13, 125 “push” 15, 126 adjusting brightness 116 Adobe Photoshop 79 Adobe Photoshop Elements 11 alarms deleting 110 setting 110 status icon 18 turning on or off 110 album covers 47 album tracks 48 alerts adjusting volume 23, 117 calendar 78 turning on or off 117 alternate audio language 52 anti-phishing. See Safari fraud warning App Store about 60 browsing 60 deleting applications 64 Genius 61 store account 60, 125 syncing 9 syncing purchased content 65 updating applications 65 verifying purchases 136 applications 19
162
Index
Index
deleting 64 attachments email 69 audio alternate language 52 mono 147 audio file formats, supported 153 audiobooks syncing 9 Auto-Brightness 116 AutoFill 58, 129 auto-lock, setting time for 119 AV cables 53
B
backing up iPod touch 11 backups creating 156 removing 157 restoring from 157 battery charging 36 low on power 37, 150 maximizing life 37 replacing 37, 159 status icon 18 Bluetooth headphones 34 headset 22, 33, 34, 43, 44, 46, 47, 51, 52, 87, 104, 152, 156 pairing headphones 34 status icon 18 turning on or off 118 unpairing device 35 bookmarking map locations 97 webpages 58 YouTube videos 88 bookmarks, syncing 9, 12, 59 brightness adjusting 116 setting to adjust automatically 116 browser cache, clearing 130
browsing album covers 47 App Store 60 iTunes Music Store 132 YouTube videos 86 businesses, finding 99 buttons, changing 54
C
cable, Dock Connector to USB 8, 18 cache, clearing browser 130 Calculator 112 scientific 113 Calendar about 73 searching 75 views 74 See also events calendars, syncing 9, 12, 73 caps lock, enabling 121 Cc 127, 128 charging battery 36 cleaning iPod touch 38 Clock 109 clocks, adding 109 closed captioning, turning on or off 124 component AV cable 53 composite AV cable 53 computer requirements 7 configuration profiles 15 connecting to Internet 35 contacts adding and editing 85 adding from Maps 97 assigning photo to 83 GAL (Global Address List) 66, 85, 155 LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) 85 seeing location of 97 send info by email 67 setting how displayed 128 setting how sorted 128 syncing 9, 10, 12, 84 Yahoo! Address Book 12 controls, using 24 converting videos 42 converting unprotected WMA files 153 cookies 130 copying images 82 text 29 Cover Flow 47 current approximate location 97 cutting and pasting text 29
Index
D
data, erasing 14, 38, 119, 122 date and time, setting 121 date format 122 debug console 130 deleting alarms 110 all content and settings 38, 122 applications from the App Store 64 clocks 109 contacts 85 email account 126 email messages 71 notes 107 playlists 50 removing 157 songs from a playlist 50 videos 53 YouTube playlists 90 YouTube videos from a playlist 90 developer settings 130 directions, getting 97 disconnecting iPod touch from computer 16 display freezes 151 Dock Connector 103 Dock Connector to USB cable 8, 18 downloading applications 63 podcasts 134
E
editing text 29 effects sounds, turning on or off 117 email accounts syncing 9, 10 enterprise, using iPod touch 159 equalizer 123 erasing data 14, 38, 119, 122 events, calendar 76 Exchange. See Microsoft Exchange
F
Fetch New Data 126 file formats, supported 69, 153, 155 Find My iPod touch 14, 38 force quit an application 39 formats date, time, and telephone number 122 forwarding messages 67
G
GAL (Global Address List) 66, 85, 155 Genius Mixes 42, 49 Genius playlists 45, 48
163
Genius, App Store 61 gestures, VoiceOver 141 getting help 159 getting started 7 Google search engine 129 Google Contacts 12, 152 searching the web 58 grab points 29
H
headset about 34 center button 22, 33, 34, 43, 44, 46, 47, 51, 52, 87, 104, 152 using with Voice Memos 103 headset button. See mic button help, getting 159 Home screen 19, 24 adding web clips 59 customizing 21 hybrid view 96
I
iCal 12, 159 icons applications 19 status 18 See also buttons images copying 82 pasting 82 IMAP accounts 66 searching email 71 installing applications from the App Store 63 configuration profiles 15 international keyboards 30, 121, 122 Internet, connecting to 35 iPhoto 11, 159 iPod changing browse buttons 54 converting videos for iPod touch 42 deleting videos 53 Genius Mixes 49 Genius playlists 48 headset controls 34 on-the-go playlists 50, 90 playing songs using Voice Control 46 repeating or shuffling songs 45 searching 48, 52 Shake to Shuffle 42, 123 sleep timer 54 iTunes Store about 131
164
Index
account 7, 60, 125, 131, 133 browsing 132 checking download status 135 purchasing songs and albums 133 streaming or downloading podcasts 134 syncing purchased content 135 verifying purchases 136 iTunes U syncing 9, 11, 40 iTunes getting help 159 iPod touch doesn’t appear in 151 settings panes 10
K
keyboards international 30, 122 typing on 27
L
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) 85 links in email 69 on webpages 56 location. See Maps Location Services 118 location warnings 123 locking iPod touch 18, 22, 23 lyrics, displaying 44
M
Mac system requirements 7 Mail account setup 66, 125 attachments 69, 155 Cc 127, 128 checking for new messages 67, 71 deleting email account 126 deleting messages 71 forwarding messages 67 links 69 load additional messages 68 marking messages as unread 70 organizing email 72 password settings 126 problems opening an attachment 155 reading messages 68 replying to messages 67 resizing text column 68 saving drafts 67 searching 71 seeing recipients 70 sending messages 66 sending photos 67 sending videos 67
sending webpage addresses 57 sending YouTube video links 88 settings 125, 126 share contact information 67 signatures 128 storing email on iPod touch or server 126 syncing email account settings 9, 10 Yahoo! email account 15 zooming in a message 68 Maps adding location to a contact 97 bookmarking location 97 current approximate location 95, 97 dropped pin 95 finding businesses 99 finding location 93 getting directions 97 hybrid view 96 satellite view 96 seeing location of a contact 97 share location 97 traffic conditions 99 zooming 94 mic button 34 microphone about 34 microphone, external 103 Microsoft Excel 129 Microsoft Exchange 13, 19, 20, 66, 84 push accounts 15 searching email 71 setting up account 13 syncing 13, 73 Microsoft Internet Explorer 12, 58 Microsoft Outlook 12 Microsoft Word 129 MMS 81 MobileMe 13, 19, 20, 84 getting help 159 push accounts 15 searching email 71 security features 14, 38 sending photos to a gallery 82 setting up account 13 syncing 59, 73 model number 117 Mono Audio 147 movies rented 11, 53 syncing 9 music lyrics 44 managing manually 11 previewing 133 purchasing 133 searching 48
Index
settings 123 syncing 9, 11, 40 music videos syncing 9
N
navigating. See panning, scrolling Network activity status icon 18 Nike + iPod settings 130, 138 Notes 107 searching 107 syncing 9 NTSC 124
O
on-the-go playlists 50 orientation, changing 55 Outlook Express. See Windows Address Book Outlook. See Microsoft Outlook overview, iPod touch applications 19
P
pairing with Bluetooth headphones 34 PAL 124 panning maps 94 webpages 56 parental controls. See Restrictions passcode 119 pasting images 82 text 29 pausing songs and videos 34 PC system requirements 7 photo albums 81 photos, syncing 9 Photos assigning photos to contacts 83 emailing photos 81 playing music during slideshow 81 sending in email messages 67 settings 81, 124 syncing 11, 79 using photos as wallpaper 83 viewing slideshows 81 zooming photos 80 playlists, making 50 plug-ins 129 podcasts downloading 134 streaming 134 syncing 9, 11, 40 pop-ups 129
165
power, low 37 previewing music 133 videos 134 problems. See troubleshooting purchased content syncing 65, 135 purchasing applications 60 iTunes content 41 music 131, 133 videos 133 push accounts 15, 126
R
reading email 68 rechargeable batteries 37 removing backups 157 rented movies 53 renting movies 11 videos 133 repeating 45 replacing battery 37, 159 replying to messages 67 requirements for using iPod touch 7 reset iPod touch 39 resizing webpage columns 56 restarting 39 restoring iPod touch software 158 restoring settings and information 157 restrictions, setting 119 rotor control 142
S
Safari AutoFill 58, 129 bookmarking webpages 58 clearing cache 130 cookies 130 Debug Console 130 developer settings 130 fraud warning 129 Home screen web clips 59 navigating 56 opening webpages 55, 57 plug-ins 129 pop-ups 129 reloading webpages 56 resizing columns to fit screen 56 saving images to your Photo Library 57 searching the web 58 security 129 sending webpage addresses in email 57 settings 129
166
Index
stopping webpages from loading 56 syncing bookmarks 9, 12 typing in text fields 57 zooming webpages 56 satellite view 96 screen 116 setting to adjust automatically 116 using 24 screen reader 8 scrolling about 24 maps 94 webpages 56 search engine 129 searching App Store 60 calendars 75 global 32 iTunes Music Store 132 Mail messages 71 music 48 notes 107 videos 52 searching the web 58 searching YouTube videos 87 security erase data after ten failed passcode attempts 119 features 37 Find My iPod touch 14, 38 setting passcode for iPod touch 119 web 129 selecting text 29 sending email 66 photos from Photos 81 serial number, finding 117 service and support information 159 settings accessibility 122 accounts 125 alarms 110 alerts 78 auto-capitalization 121 auto-correction 28, 121 auto-lock 118 Bluetooth 118 brightness 116 Calendar 78 date and time 121 developer 130 email server 126 Fetch New Data 126 international 122 language 122 location services 118 Mail, Contacts, Calendars 125
Mail 125 music 123 Nike + iPod 130, 138 notifications 116 passcode lock 119 Photos 81, 124 resetting 122 restrictions 119 Safari 58, 129 screen brightness 116 security 129 Shake to Shuffle 123 slideshow 81 sound 78 Store 125 temperature 102 TV out 124 video 124 VoiceOver 139 VPN 118 wallpaper 83, 117 Shake to Shuffle 42, 123 sharing photos in email messages 67 videos in email messages 67 shuffling songs 45 signatures, email 128 sleep timer 54 slideshows 81 settings 124 software getting help 159 updating and restoring 158 version 117 sound adjusting alerts volume 117 adjusting volume 23 no sound 152 setting limit 123 Sound Check 123 sound effects 23 sounds adjusting volume 34 calendar alert 78 turning on or off 117 Speak Auto-text 147 SSL 126 Starbucks, browsing and purchasing music 132 status icons 18 stock information, Yahoo! 92 Stocks, adding and deleting quotes 91 stopwatch, using 110 storage capacity 117 Store, settings 125 streaming podcasts 134 subtitles 52
Index
surfing the web 55 syncing calendars 73 Google Contacts 12, 152 iTunes library contents 9 Microsoft Exchange 13, 73 MobileMe 13, 73 photos 79 preventing 13 purchased songs 135 “Sync in progress” message 16 webpage bookmarks 59 Yahoo! Address Book 152 syncing voice memos 106 system requirements 7
T
telephone number format 122 text cutting or copying 29 pasting 29 typing 27 Text typing in webpages 57 time format 122 time zone support 75, 128 time, setting 121 timer setting 111 sleep 111 touchscreen, using 24 traffic conditions, checking 99 transfer settings and information 156 transferring purchased content 42, 135 transferring purchased content 65 transferring settings and information 157 transition effects, setting 124 Triple-click Home setting 148 troubleshooting backing up 156 can’t open an attachment 155 can’t purchase music or applications 154 display freezes 150 GAL contacts don’t appear 155 iPod touch doesn’t appear in iTunes 151 iPod touch doesn’t respond 150 iPod touch doesn’t turn on 150 no sound 152 problems playing songs or other content 153 restarting 39 software update and restore 158 turning iPod touch on or off 22 TV shows syncing 9, 11 TV shows, syncing 9
167
TV signal settings 124 typing keyboard 27 in webpage text fields 57
U
undoing edits 29 unlocking iPod touch 23 unpairing Bluetooth device 35 unread messages, marking 70 unsupported audio file formats 153 updating iPod touch software 158 USB cable 8, 18 port 8
V
video settings 124 videos alternate audio language 52 converting for iPod touch 42 deleting 53 previewing 134 purchasing 133 searching 52 sending in email messages 67 subtitles 52 syncing 11, 40 watching on a TV 53 See also iPod, Music, YouTube virtual private network. See VPN Voice Control playing songs 33, 46 using with headset 34 Voice Memos emailing 106 recording 103 syncing 106 trimming 105 VoiceOver about 140 entering and editing text 145 gestures 141 rotor control 142 setting up iPod touch using 8 volume adjusting 23, 34 adjusting for alerts 117 setting limit 123 VPN accessing networks using 36 configuring 118 set up by configuration profile 15 turning on or off 118
168
Index
W
waking iPod touch 23 wallpaper choosing 117 settings 83 using photo as 83 warranty service 159 watching videos on a TV 53 weather information, Yahoo! 102 Weather adding cities 102 deleting cities 102 temperature settings 102 viewing 101 web. See Safari web clips, adding to Home screen 59 webpages bookmarking 58 syncing 9, 12 White on Black 147 Wi-Fi forgetting a network 115 joining networks 35, 115 status icon 18 turning on or off 115 Windows Address Book 12 Windows XP 7 WMA files, converting 153 “Works with iPod touch” logo 103 World Clock 109
Y
Yahoo! Address Book 12, 152 search engine 129 search using 58 searching using 58 stock information 92 weather information 102 YouTube bookmarking videos 88 browsing videos 86 emailing links 88 playing videos 87 searching for videos 87
Z
Zoom (Accessibility feature) 146 zooming email messages 68 maps 94 photos 80 webpages 56
K Apple Inc. © 2009 Apple Inc. All rights reserved. Apple, the Apple logo, Cover Flow, iCal, iPhoto, iPod, iTunes, Keynote, Mac, Macintosh, Mac OS, Numbers, Pages, Safari, and Spotlight are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Apple Inc. is under license. Adobe and Photoshop are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the U.S. and/or other countries.
Finder, iPhone, Multi-Touch, and Shuffle are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Other company and product names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective companies.
iTunes Store is a service mark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Mention of third-party products is for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation. Apple assumes no responsibility with regard to the performance or use of these products. All understandings, agreements, or warranties, if any, take place directly between the vendors and the prospective users. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Apple is not responsible for printing or clerical errors.
App Store and MobileMe are service marks of Apple Inc. The Nike + iPod Sport Kit is covered by one or more of U.S. patent numbers 6,018,705, 6,052,654, 6,493,652, 6,298,314, 6,611,789, 6,876,947, and 6,882,955, either alone or when used in combination with a Nike + iPod enabled iPod media player.
019-1594/2009-09
Related Documents
Ipod Touch User Guide
July 2020 13
Ipod Touch 3.0 User Guide
June 2020 10
Ipod Touch 2.2 User Guide
December 2019 19
Ipod Touch 2.1 User Guide
October 2019 13
Ipod Touch Features Guide
November 2019 27
Ipod Touch 2.1 User Guide Ch
November 2019 17More Documents from "Abe Li"
Case3:07 Cv 00693 Vrw Document38
July 2020 11
Doi: 10.1079/wps200570
July 2020 6
